Found in Translation: Martin Luther King’s ‘Dream’ Plays in Beijing
May 30, 2006 6:25 PM
Copyright The New York Times - May 30, 2006
Beijing Journal
By HOWARD W. FRENCH
BEIJING For months now, Caitrin McKiernan has gone from place to place in this city to ask Chinese people an unlikely question: What does the life of the Rev. Dr. Martin Luther King Jr. mean to you?
The questions don’t end there, either. In most of these gatherings, she gets far more specific, burrowing into the history and tactics of the American civil rights movement.
“Who knows what the Birmingham bus boycott was?” she asked a group of university students in May. “What is a sit-in?” “What’s the meaning of separate but equal?” At the level of language, every one of those terms presents a formidable challenge, even to a woman who has spent years in this country and speaks fluent Chinese.
But language is not the half of it. How can one translate Dr. King’s actions into the realm of ideas for an audience in a city notably hostile to protests? How does one convey to Chinese people the meaning of the life of a man who died fighting for civil rights nearly 40 years ago?
The answers may have begun to emerge since the production at the National Theater on Sunday of the play “Passages of Martin Luther King Jr.” by the noted King scholar Clayborne Carson and based on the life and words of the American civil rights leader. Ms. McKiernan, who studied under Mr. Carson at Stanford and is the play’s producer, was prepared for any kind of audience response, from deeply moved to completely stumped and anything in between.
But the responses of Ms. McKiernan’s discussion groups and the reactions of her cast suggested that Dr. King’s message would hit home here, that Chinese viewers would see parallels to divisions in their own society. That prospect poses a thorny problem for the government, which, on one hand, has endorsed Dr. King’s work as a blow for the class struggle and against American imperialism, but on the other insists that racism and discrimination are purely problems of decadent Western societies.
The government, however, gave the production its imprimatur, and permission to play at the prestigious theater.
A distinct possibility was that the universality of Dr. King’s message and the causes he fought for would completely escape Chinese viewers.
But the reactions Ms. McKiernan has heard so far suggest otherwise, and give her reason to hope that her dream of building a bridge between the societies by talking about peaceful struggle and universal rights has some hold on reality.
During one recent discussion at a Beijing university, after viewing excerpts from the PBS documentary “Eyes on the Prize,” students explored their feelings on the discrimination they discern between migrant workers and more affluent residents of the country’s eastern cities. Others spoke about the inferior position of women in their society or of being treated badly during visits overseas or the predominance of American power in the world.
“The significance of Martin Luther King for me is that we have to have the courage to stand up for our legitimate benefits,” said a Chinese student who identified himself as Paul.
Ms. McKiernan has avoided lecturing her audiences, or even steering the discussions. “I don’t want this to be about what happened in the U.S. in some past year,” she said. “I want this to be about what discrimination is, and how it relates to your life.”
The talks have usually begun with an explanation of how Dr. King’s life came to mean so much to her, a Californian who first came to this city at 16 as an exchange student and had to struggle to overcome cultural differences with her host family. Then she studied Dr. King in college, and she has had him on her mind ever since.
“I realized that King was this great bridge between the United States and China,” Ms. McKiernan said. “China is an emerging superpower, and the U.S. is the superpower, and King is someone that both sides believe in, and can be the starting point for a dialogue about how we wish the world to be.”
Then she sighed, and said, “But it’s the hardest thing I’ve ever done.”
The challenges have come from every direction: persuading the National Theater to accept the production, recruiting professional actors and production people, enlisting gospel singers from the United States to join the performance, doing endless and mostly fruitless fund-raising.
The American Embassy provided a modest grant, as did Stanford. But the multinational corporations that abound in Beijing proved skittish, even more than the government.
Beijing’s unexpected stake in Dr. King’s legacy is twofold, involving both past and present. The country’s slogan for the 2008 summer Olympics is “One World, One Dream,” which officials say brings to mind Dr. King’s “I Have a Dream” speech. That address has been famous here since Mao Zedong hailed it in August 1963, and it is still taught in schools.
In such matters context is everything, and for Mao, Dr. King was first and foremost a symbol of “the sharpening of class struggle and national struggle within the United States.” In a speech some people here still recall today, Mao called on “enlightened persons of all colors in the world, white, black, yellow and brown, to unite to oppose the racial discrimination practiced by U.S. imperialism.”
Then, as now, Chinese people were ill prepared to discuss their country’s internal problems, a subject about which they were not educated, nor did Mao link Dr. King’s struggles to the problems of China’s ethnic minorities or, for that matter, human rights or inequality.
But to listen to the participants in Ms. McKiernan’s discussion groups, or the actors in her production, that is what many people confronted with Dr. King’s words today readily do.
“In today’s China it would seem that discriminatory actions are not so common,” said Yan Shikui, the narrator for the production. “But in fact, it is very serious. We talk about the difference between urban and rural citizens, the gap between the strong and the weak. All of these are very deep notions buried in people’s minds, which cannot be solved by using violence. They have to be addressed through ideas.”
Posted at 6:25 PM · Comments (0)
China should help Japan win a Security Council seat
May 29, 2006 10:42 PM
Copyright The Financial Times
China has thus far been stubbornly opposed to Japans bid for a permanent seat on the United Nations Security Council. However, a dispassionate examination of the issue shows that there are a number of reasons why China, for its own benefit, should support Japan becoming a permanent member.
One reason is diplomatic. If China wishes to take a leadership role in Asia, good political relations with Japan are necessary. At present Chinas political system differs from those of the many democratic countries in the region and, although it is a big power, it is not in a position to provide substantial economic and technical assistance to poor countries. In these circumstances, it is particularly inadvisable for China to vie with Japan for leadership.
A second big reason for China to support Japans permanent Security Council membership relates to the danger of China becoming isolated in the international community. Chinas high economic growth rate has attracted the attention of many countries, but at the same time there is a strong wariness of China.
In the western world, in particular, there are those who see it as a rival civilisation and many people regard it with hostility from the standpoint of democracy and human rights, some even as a potential enemy.
In order to get along in the international community under these circumstances, China needs a partner that understands it. China should bear in mind that Japan can play a role in mitigating its isolation, particularly in forums such as the UN Security Council.
The third reason relates to security. If Chinas military capability becomes excessively large, not only the US but also many Asian countries will grow even more wary. Such a situation risks prompting Japan to take steps to expand its own military capability. In order to restrain militaristic elements in Japan and ensure that the combination of Japans military and economic strength does not exert an influence unfavourable to Chinese interests, it is important for China that Japan should be securely positioned within international frameworks. If China truly fears a resurgence of Japanese militarism, it is extremely important that Japan should hold a position of influence and respect in the UN.
The fourth reason is connected to Chinas internal political situation. It is self-evident that as Chinese society becomes increasingly information-based and democratic, the question of how the country can modernise itself while making the most of the traditions of Chinese civilisation will be of paramount importance in terms of maintaining political stability. I believe that China can use Japan as a model for its own development, in reconciling the traditional and the modern. From this standpoint, projecting an image to the world of Japan and China co-operating at the UN and other multilateral forums could play a significant role in maintaining Chinas stability.
The final reason relates to Chinas economy. As the Chinese economy grows in size and power, increased friction between the international community and China is inevitable. Japan is the only country that will be able to understand the frictions that are sure to appear in such areas as voluntary export controls, agriculture and intellectual property, because Japan has experience of these very problems. China should not forget that it was Japan that made the greatest efforts in support of Chinas accession to the World Trade Organisation. When economic friction does occur, Japan will be in a position to play an intermediary role in getting other countries to understand Chinas thinking and in getting China to understand the wishes of the international community.
The Security Council is by its nature a body that should act in a manner consistent with the idea of economic security in its broad sense. Given that permanent members hold important positions also in various other UN agencies, Chinese support for Japans permanent membership is important both for the stable development of Chinas economy and for forging harmonious relations between the Chinese economy and the international economic community.
If China wishes to become a major power, it must first be able to establish a partnership with its neighbour, Japan. Japan used to be a permanent member of the council of the League of Nations, but lost its status as a major power in the international community because it failed to establish a partnership of equals with China. I hope that China will not repeat Japans mistake.
The writer, president of the Japan Foundation, is a former Japanese deputy minister of foreign affairs
Posted at 10:42 PM · Comments (0)
Clint Eastwood attacks Japan war myths
May 29, 2006 1:31 PM
Copyright The Guardian
Two new movies based on a bloody 1945 battle are stirring up memories and forcing both sides to re-examine their history
Sunday May 28, 2006
More than 60 years after it became one of the bloodiest battlefields of the Second World War, Iwo Jima’s tragic history retains the power to overwhelm.
As his plane prepared to land on the isolated Japanese island last month, the actor Ken Watanabe found he could not hold back the tears. Accompanying Watanabe, who shot to stardom playing a feudal warlord opposite Tom Cruise in The Last Samurai, was another hard man of Hollywood whose time on Iwo Jima would lead to something of a professional epiphany.
Article continues
When Clint Eastwood’s two films about Iwo Jima, one of the darkest periods of the Pacific War, reach cinemas this year, audiences could be excused for forgetting the man behind them was once the trigger-happy Dirty Harry.
The 75-year-old director has promised Flags Of Our Fathers and Red Sun, Black Sand will attempt to show for the first time the suffering of both sides during 36 days of fighting in early 1945 that turned the island into a flattened wasteland.
On a recent trip to Japan, Eastwood said his time on Iwo Jima had forced him to re-evaluate the one-dimensional portrayal of America’s former enemy in so many war films. ‘There were good guys on one side. Life isn’t like that,’ he said.
He describes Red Sun, shot in Japanese and with a largely Japanese cast, as his attempt to understand the country’s soldiers. ‘I think those soldiers deserve a certain amount of respect,’ he said. ‘I feel terrible for both sides in that war and in all wars. A lot of innocent people get sacrificed. It’s not about winning or losing, but mostly about the interrupted lives of young people. These men deserve to be seen, and heard from.’
Eastwood had to mount a diplomatic offensive before filming could begin. Tokyo’s ultra-conservative governor, Shintaro Ishihara, who administers the island, gave Eastwood permission to film only after he agreed he would ‘absolutely not’ trample on Japanese sensitivities.
Japanese Iwo Jima veterans who met Eastwood say they are confident the films will honour their fallen comrades. ‘I asked him to make a human drama, not a war film,’ said 83-year-old Kiyoshi Endo, of the Japanese Iwo Jima Veterans’ Association. ‘I wanted him to show how the soldiers felt when they were fighting and, having read the script, I think he has done that. Who won or lost is not the point.’
The US assault on Iwo Jima began on the morning of 19 February 1945. When fighting ended 36 days later, an estimated 7,000 US troops and more than 21,000 Japanese soldiers were dead. Fewer than 1,000 Japanese survived.
Koji Kitahara, 84, who served aboard a vessel protecting supply ships, said he hoped the film would capture the utter desperation of the Japanese troops. ‘I remember countless soldiers in smaller boats coming out to my ship and begging us for food and water,’ he said. ‘All I could give them were a few cigarettes and some sweet bean jelly I had on me. I was haunted by their appearance and certain that they would die soon.’
While Eastwood promises to avoid the jingoism of John Wayne’s 1949 film Sands of Iwo Jima, the first of his two films, Flags Of Our Fathers, promises to be more palatable to American audiences. Based on the 2000 bestselling book of the same name, it focuses on the six US soldiers captured in AP photographer Joe Rosenthal’s iconic and controversial photograph, as they raised the Stars and Stripes at the summit of Mt Suribachi.
But if Iwo Jima was one of the US marines’ hardest-won victories, it came at a price: nearly a third of all marines killed in the war died on the island.
These days Iwo Jima, 700 miles south of Tokyo, is populated by only a few hundred Japanese soldiers, the families of the dead having successfully lobbied against building on what they regard as sacred ground. For veterans like Kitahara, Red Sun’s release in December promises to evoke painful memories. For younger Japanese, it will be their first exposure to one of the bloodiest episodes in their country’s modern history.
Just as it was for Watanabe. ‘As we went through this film, we realised that until now we haven’t really looked at Japan’s past. We kind of looked away from it,’ he said. ‘But we have to look at it and accept the fact that this is what our fathers and grandfathers have done. Accepting the reality is the first step.’
Posted at 1:31 PM · Comments (0)
The China Syndrome: Why the Pentagon keeps overestimating Beijing’s military strength.
May 29, 2006 1:25 PM
COpyright Slate
May 26, 2006
Every day and night, hundreds of Air Force generals and Navy admirals must thank their lucky stars for China. Without the specter of a rising Chinese military, there would be no rationale for such a large fleet of American nuclear submarines and aircraft carriers, or for a new generation of stealth combat fightersno rationale for about a quarter of the Pentagon’s budget. In Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld’s Quadrennial Defense Review, released this past February, the looming Chinese threat is the explicit justification for all the big-ticket weapons systems that have nothing to do with fighting terrorists or insurgents.
But is the threat real? In each of the last four years, Congress has required the Defense Department to issue a report titled Military Power of the People’s Republic of China. The latest edition, issued this week, starts out ominously, but as you read through its 50 double-columned pages, you gradually realize that claims of emerging Chinese superpower are way overblown.
The Chinese are hardly sluggish when it comes to modernizing their military. According to the report, they’ve been boosting their military budget by double-digit percentages every year for the past decade. They’ve been expanding their arsenals of missiles, aircraft, air-defense weapons, surface ships, and submarines. They have expanded especially aggressively near the Taiwan Strait, to the point where the balance of forces with Taiwan is now “shifting in the mainland’s favor.” They’re studying the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan, and are shifting their doctrine to focus on joint operations, “network-centric warfare,” and offensive maneuvers.
That’s what you get from the first half of the report. In the second half, you see that it adds up to diddly.
Take the budget. China officially says it’s spending $35 billion on its military, a 14.7 percent increase over last year’s budget, amounting to 1.5 percent of its gross national product. (The U.S. military budget is nearly 15 times as large and amounts to 4 percent of our GNP; Japan’s and South Korea’s defense budgets are larger than China’s, too.) The report says that China’s growth “sustains a trend that has persisted since the 1990s of defense budget growth rates exceeding economic growth”but read on”although the growth of defense expenditures has lagged behind the growth in overall government expenditures over the same period of time.” (Emphasis mine.)
In other words, by the report’s admission, the military is not the Chinese government’s No. 1 priority. (For more on the budget figures, click here.)
More to the point, let’s look at what the Chinese have bought. It’s a surprise to read that the balance of power with Taiwan is now “shifting in the mainland’s favor.” For decades, the widespread calculation has been that China could overwhelm Taiwan if it wanted tojust as the Soviet Union could have overwhelmed West Berlin or North Korea could have captured Seoulbut that it’s been deterred from doing so out of a reluctance to spark a large-scale war.
The report states: “In the near term, China’s military buildup appears focused on preparing for Taiwan Strait contingencies, including the possibility of U.S. intervention.” It claims that in the long term, the Chinese aim to widen their area of military control throughout Asia. But the report later makes clear that the People’s Liberation Army, as China’s military is formally called, is doing nothing of the sort.
It states that “Chinese military theorists” are exploring “the role of information technology as a force multiplier, enabling PLA forces to conduct relatively limited military operations with precision at greater distances from China’s borders. However, in practice,” the report continues, “the PLA remains untested. The lack of operational experience hampers outside assessment.” Military theorists are also thinking about “devising a robust ‘out of area’ offensive capability to provide effective support for joint operations.” However, again in reality, the PLA “faces a persistent lack of inter-service cooperation and a lack of actual experience in joint operations.” The language in its official studies of the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan “suggest(s) China continues to be surprised at the rapid pace of change in military warfare.” In other words, Chinese officers realize they’re not playing in the big leagues.
Read as far as Page 30, and you see that not just China’s capabilities but also its ambitions are far from expansive. “At present,” the report states, “China’s concept for sea-denial appears limited to sea-control in water surrounding Taiwan and its immediate periphery. If China were to shift to a broader ‘sea-control’ strategy”in other words, if it were seeking a military presence farther away from its shores”the principal indicators would include development of an aircraft carrier, development of robust, deep-water anti-submarine-warfare capabilities, development of a true area anti-aircraft warfare capability, acquisition of large numbers of nuclear attack submarines,” etc., etc. The point is: The Chinese aren’t doingthey’re not even close to doingany of those things.
The report notes that Chinese naval officers began to “discuss” aircraft carriers in the late 1970s. In 1998 and 2000, they bought two Soviet carriers. However, neither was turned into a weapons platform. Instead, they were used as (these are the report’s words) “floating military theme parks.” The report notes that some analysts think China might have a single aircraft carrier by 2015, but others think they won’t until 2020 or later.
Finally, Page 40, the next-to-last page of text, contains an eye-opening sidebar that calls into question the report’s very premise:
China does not yet possess the military capability to accomplish with confidence its political objectives on the island [Taiwan], particularly when confronted with outside intervention. Beijing is also deterred by the potential political and economic repercussions of any use of force against Taiwan. China’s leaders recognize that a war could severely retard economic development. Taiwan is China’s single largest source of foreign direct investment. An extended campaign would wreck Taiwan’s economic infrastructure.
Nor, this sidebar states, does China seem physically able to pull off an invasion of Taiwan, even if it wanted: “According to the Intelligence Community, China would have difficulty protecting its vital sea lanes of communication while simultaneously supporting blockade or invasion operations.” This is the case, quite apart from the “virtual certainty of U.S. intervention, and Japanese interests, in any conflict in the Taiwan Strait.”
If you’re worried about the independence of Taiwan, this report suggests that China’s buildup is worth careful monitoring and a modest response. If you’re worried that the Chinese military might dominate Asia, the report suggests you should relax.
It’s an old, recurring story, this business of latching on to China as a rationale for big weapons or budgets that would otherwise be baseless. Back in 1967, President Lyndon B. Johnson ordered his Secretary of Defense, Robert McNamara, to build some kind of anti-ballistic-missile system. McNamara was opposed to an ABM system. He’d recently ordered a study that concluded an ABM would be futile because the Soviets could counter our defensive missiles by just slightly increasing the number of their offensive missiles. But an order was an order, so McNamara gave a speech in which he outlined all the reasons an ABM was a bad ideathen concluded that we needed to build one anyway to defend against an attack by Red China.
Paul Warnke, at the time an assistant secretary of defense, walked into McNamara’s office later that day and asked, “China bomb, Bob?” Warnke told me, many years later, that McNamara looked down at his desk, shuffled some papers, and muttered, “What else am I going to blame it on?”
Fred Kaplan writes the “War Stories” column for Slate. He can be reached at war_stories@hotmail.com.
http://www.slate.com/id/2141966/
Posted at 1:25 PM · Comments (0)
Mao’s lost children: Sun Shuyun’s search for survivors of the Long March
May 29, 2006 2:03 AM
: In 1934, hundreds of thousands of
communists were driven from southern China by nationalists fighting
against a socialist state. Only a fifth of them survived the 8,000-
mile ‘Long March’. Sun Shuyun set out in search of the handful of
surviving veterans
Wang Quanyuan woke up on a bright morning in May feeling a moment of
happiness. She had spent a rare night with her new officer husband.
Outside the wooden house, their temporary village billet in Sichuan
province, she could see a blue lake surrounded by fields of barley with
tall, snowy mountains rising up behind; where she came from there was
no
snow and to her it looked like sugar. It was 1935, the second year of
the
Long March. Wang’s marriage was to prove unequal to the adversities
ahead.
Had she known, she might have been torn between the desire to seal
their
union more tightly by having her husband’s child, and the fear of
falling
pregnant - one of the greatest fears among women on the epic march
through
China.
The day her period came, a few weeks later, “I felt as if a millstone
had
been lifted from my neck. I promptly climbed up a mulberry tree and got
a
wad of leaves. Standing there, I wanted to shout to the world, ‘I’m not
pregnant! I’m not pregnant!’” The women, she said, “dreaded pregnancy
more
than the plague”.
Recalling those times, Wang, now 91, still had a look of pain on her
gentle face, when I tracked her down at the start of my journey
retracing
the Long March. This was the 8,000-mile trek by the fledgling Communist
party and its armed forces that was to become the founding legend of
communist China, a symbol of endurance and courage. Only a fifth of the
200,000 marchers survived the ordeal that began in 1934, when the Red
Armies had to leave their bases in southern China - where Mao Zedong
had
been the leader of a short-lived communist government - to escape
annihilation by Chiang Kai Shek’s nationalist forces. Of the 40,000 who
reached the march’s end two years later in China’s barren north-west
where
the communists regrouped, fewer than 500 are believed to be alive
today,
and they are in their 80s and 90s.
Setting out to follow the route they took, I wanted to find out about
the
realities behind the legend, searching out survivors and unlocking
their
stories. Born in China in the 1960s, I had been raised, like millions
of
young Chinese in the decades after the revolution, on heroic tales of
the
journey. Make light of our difficulties, we were told, and “think of
the
Long Marchers”.
Over 10 months, travelling mainly by bus and train through areas little
changed to this day, I found 40 of the march veterans. Talking to them,
I
learned that their suffering, and what they overcame, was actually much
greater than we had been told, especially among the women. Some of the
realities they described also sit uneasily with the myth - none more
so,
perhaps, than the fate of the children of the Long March: the children
left behind, children given over for hurried adoption after being born
along the way, the young taken on as recruits and sometimes abandoned
if
they could not keep up.
The march comprised different armed columns, following differing
routes.
Wang was one of just 30 women chosen to join 86,000 men on the march in
Mao’s First Army. Six of these women were pregnant at the start of the
march; they had to be carried on stretchers. “Imagine having a stomach
twice as big as a water melon,” Wang recalled. “How could one fight the
enemy? It was a joke.” These pregnant women could not be left behind
because they were the wives of senior party leaders, including Mao’s
wife,
He Zizhen. You could say that the others, unmarried women such as Wang
and
her comrades, were brought along to deflect criticism that leaders’
wives
were getting special treatment when the army’s rule was not to take
women.
Wang saw one woman go into labour while marching, with the baby’s head
dangling out. Another had a difficult birth with Chiang’s troops in hot
pursuit, and bombs dropping like rain. As if afraid of the violent
world,
the baby refused to come out. A whole regiment of the rearguard was
ordered to put up a fierce fight for more than two hours and lost a
dozen
men. After all their pain, however, the women were not allowed to keep
their babies. It was the rule with the First Army: a crying baby could
endanger the troops. The tiny boy whose arrival cost a dozen soldiers’s
lives was left on a bed of straw in the abandoned house where he was
born.
The same rule applied when He Zizhen gave birth in the early spring of
1935. It was the third time she was forced to abandon a child. Her
first
child with Mao, a girl, was given to a peasant woman when she and Mao
had
to flee their guerrilla base. Next came Little Mao, who looked very
much
like his father, hence the nickname. He was two years old when the
First
Army began the march. No one could bring small children along, not even
Mao.
He Zizhen wept before leaving Little Mao in the care of her sister, who
was married to Mao’s brother. Mao did not even say goodbye to his son.
He
could not know that six months later his brother would be killed in
battle, taking with him the secret of the location to which he had
moved
the boy for safety; he had not even told his wife. He Zizhen could
hardly
bring herself to do the unthinkable again, only four months after she
had
torn herself away from Little Mao.
When she was asked to give the girl a name, she shook her head: she
doubted she would see her again. Wrapped in a jacket, the baby was
handed
to an old lady, the only person who had not fled on hearing the Red
Army
was coming. At first she refused, saying she had no milk and could not
possibly look after the child. But when she saw the handful of silver
dollars and a few bowls of opium offered as payment, she changed her
mind.
Years later, He Zizhen was still tormented by her decision: “I did not
even get a good look at my baby. I wasn’t even clear where exactly she
was
born.”
In June 1935, the First Army was reunited with another column, the
Fourth
Army, in Sichuan. The handful of First Army women, including Wang
Quanyuan, were surprised - there were thousands of Fourth Army women,
even
a women’s regiment, which Wang was later to command. Opium was the main
reason: in Sichuan, every family grew opium, and most of the men were
addicts. Often children were too: when they cried or were sick, their
parents would give them a sniff to quiet them. Women smoked, but not
nearly as much as men, so the Fourth Army had no choice but to recruit
women.
Strict rules prohibiting ordinary soldiers from mixing with the women’s
unit did protect these women, but not from the enemy. Later on, many in
the women’s regiment were captured and raped by Muslim warlords’ forces
in
the north-west. Wu Qingxiang, aged 82 when I met her, still shuddered
to
recall what she had been through as a 12-year-old member of a
performing
propaganda troupe. “After they took us, we heard them saying, ‘The Red
bandits really look after their women well. Every single one of them
was a
virgin.’” Another regiment veteran and rape victim, Feng Yuxiang, who
lives in a village not far from Wu’s, told me the same story. I could
imagine them in some dark corner trembling after their ordeal, hearing
those words.
In the Fourth Army, female soldiers were able to bring their children
and
husbands from the start - they would have been lost without them. Some
men
had their entire families, because had they stayed behind they might
have
been killed by government troops. The older children were taken on as
orderlies, messengers, health assistants and buglers. “When you saw men
with children on their backs, or babies peeping out from the horses’
panniers, you wondered if we were really an army,” said Ma Haidiche, a
commander in the women’s regiment, now in her early 90s and living in a
Muslim town in Gansu province in the country’s far north-west.
She remembered a mother walking in front and holding a boy in one hand,
a
bed roll in the other; behind her a girl had her younger brother tied
to
her back. A few days later, she saw the mother again, but not the
children. “Perhaps she gave them away. Then her children were lucky,”
Ma
said quietly, because soon they were to enter the grassland in the far
west of Sichuan where they had no food, and there were no villages
where
local people might take in abandoned children. What little food they
had
was kept for the soldiers. Even so, large numbers of female troops in
Ma’s
unit died. “So many times, I was too hungry to stand up,” she said.
“Death
was easier than life. It was so tempting, just one breath away.” Still
she
was shocked to see a woman drown her baby in a swamp, unable to bear
the
child’s hungry cries.
He Jiesheng, the daughter newly born to He Long, commander of the
Second
Army, was luckier. Her father took her with him because he could not
find
a family to take the three-week-old infant. Carrying her was hard work.
Her mother said: “My baby was heavier than a machine gun! If I were a
man,
I would rather carry a gun. At least I could fight if the enemy caught
up
with us.” He Long tried to help carry her, but the child was so hungry
she
would burrow into his chest, looking for her mother’s breast. Luckily,
He
Long discovered that fish were plentiful - the Tibetan peoples who
lived
in the Sichuan grassland did not eat them. The baby girl survived, the
youngest person to complete the two-year March. Now aged about 70 and
living in Beijing, she can look back on a life that saw her become one
of
the few female generals in the Chinese army.
The Red Army also had large numbers of young recruits, the Little Red
Devils, most in their early teens. No one is sure of their number. Wang
thought it was 5,000 or 6,000 out of 100,000 in the Fourth Army, and
roughly the same number in the First Army. Li Wenying was 14 at the
time
of the march. She had been sold as child bride, and found herself
trapped
with a cruel mother-in-law. Like so many Little Red Devils, she joined
up
for a square meal and some pork now and then. “When I was small, we saw
pigs running about, but never knew what they tasted like. Only the
landlords could afford it.”
Following the Long March route, I came across a report in an archive in
Sichuan. It was compiled by Nationalist officials, detailing Red Army
stragglers abandoned in their particular county. My heart ached as I
ran
down the list, so young, half of them in their early teens, the
youngest
only nine years old. In the remote Sichuan grassland, I found one of
them,
Sangluo, now an old man in his mid-80s. He was 13 when he joined He
Long’s
army far to the east in Hunan province, but in the grassland he could
not
keep up with the marchers. One morning when he woke up, the troops were
gone. They had left behind more than a thousand sick and wounded, and
the
young. “I screamed and screamed. The Red Army was like my parents. How
could they abandon me just like that?”
His youth saved him: the Tibetan families of the grassland relished a
son,
or took pity on the children. He was taken in by a lama, whose mother
looked after him. Isolated for most of his life on the pasture with no
other Han Chinese, he can no longer speak Chinese, nor remember his
home
village. The man before me looked completely Tibetan, his wrinkled face
the same dark red as his robe, his fingers bent from the rheumatoid
arthritis that plagues the nomads. He was grateful for his life: most
of
those abandoned with him died of hunger or were killed by the local
people. As I said goodbye, I asked him whether he felt Chinese or
Tibetan.
He replied, “Does it matter?”
What of the children who were never taken on the march, left behind
when
their parents set off? They fared no better. When nationalist troops
took
the communist bases, they butchered communist sympathisers and
frequently
mutilated or hacked to bits the children entrusted to these people’s
care.
Once the families looking after left-behind children knew what was
coming,
some sold them off, or went into hiding. Yet others became attached to
the
children in their care and could not face losing them when their
parents
returned, so they moved elsewhere. As a result, very few of the Red
Army
marchers ever saw their children again.
As soon as the communists came to power in 1949, He Zizhen, by then no
longer Mao’s wife, and her sister and brother tried to find all three
of
Mao’s abandoned children. Her sister was killed in a car accident with
a
boy supposed to be Little Mao, although the child had been claimed by
another veteran. Her brother thought he had found the eldest daughter,
and
then another Little Mao. He Zizhen rushed to Nanjing to see the boy,
and
was convinced he was her lost son because of his oily ears and armpit
odour, which she said were common to all five of her children with Mao.
But this little boy was also claimed by someone else, with the blessing
of
the party. Rather than lose the boy, He Zizhen decided to share him
with
the parents who claimed him, keeping in close touch and showering him
with
love and gifts. But she never got over the thought that he was her only
surviving son with Mao, even though Mao had long given up on both of
them.
The anguish of pain and loss kept her in and out of mental hospital for
the rest of her life. Decades later, the search went on: in November
2003,
two young men from Britain made headlines by announcing to the world
that
they might have found Mao’s long-lost daughter from the march. The only
way to prove her identity would be by testing the DNA of Mao’s one
known
surviving daughter. But she has refused to collaborate. There have been
so
many claimants that perhaps the pain of loss can never be healed, for
Mao’s family and for all the other marchers.
And what of Wang? Children were on her mind all her life. But like two-
thirds of the women survivors I talked to, the conditions on the march
-
the perpetual hunger, the freezing cold in the mountains, the incessant
marching over rough terrain - made her infertile. She adopted seven
orphans, but one after another they deserted her, saying she was not
after
all their mother. Her only comfort is that two of them married each
other
and continue to live with her, caring for her in her old age. She
regretted being unable to bear children herself; but her last words to
me
were: “It was a small price to pay for the revolution”
The Long March by Sun Shuyun is published this week by HarperCollins at
?20. To order a copy for ?18 with free UK p&p go to
guardian.co.uk/bookshop or call 0870 836 0875
Posted at 2:03 AM · Comments (0)
‘Patriotism’ a useful tool for the government to meddle in education
May 29, 2006 12:22 AM
“I Am a Patriot” was a song released by “Little Steven” Van Zandt in 1984. In it, he sang that he loved his country because “my country is all I know.” It’s worth mentioning as the controversy over the use of “patriotism” in the revision of the Fundamental Law of Education continues to make headlines.
The Japanese government says it wants to make patriotism and “public spirit” official goals of education, since it believes that many of Japan’s social ills stem from the emphasis on individualism found in the Constitution. The government also wants to revise the Constitution, but that requires a national referendum, and since Japan has never held one before it will take a while to hammer out a method for carrying it out.
The purpose of the education law is to promote the ideals set forth in the Constitution, so it doesn’t make sense to revise the law before a new Constitution is passed. The government doesn’t need to seek the people’s permission to amend the education law, which the ruling coalition would like to do during the current Diet session.
The revision amounts to nothing less than defining a desirable form of morality. Though it contains no overt coercion with regards to moral instruction, the revision also contains new stipulations that give the central government greater control over the day-to-day execution of educational policies.
However, the media has fixated on Article 2 of the draft, which attempts to define patriotism, though the word itself (aikoku) is not used. Before and during the war, love of the nation and reverence toward the Emperor were inculcated by means of the Imperial Rescript on Education, which all schoolchildren had to memorize.
The gist of the Rescript minus any mention of the Emperor has essentially been resurrected for the revision. Conservatives have always liked the Rescript. They just thought it was implemented poorly. This time, they expect teachers to instill the values of the Rescript in tender young minds more naturally, without resorting to corporal punishment.
According to Tokyo Shimbun, one of the reasons given by the government for changing the education law is that the text written in 1947 at the order of the occupying Americans was “bad Japanese.” (This is also one of the reasons given for changing the General Headquarters of the Allied Occupation-overseen Constitution.) Still, it’s at least comprehensible. The current revision is incoherent and illogical, reflecting the babble of special interests that have contributed to its wording. The patriotism controversy is essentially a fight over terminology.
But it’s also a red herring. Article 2 is a very small section of the law. Nobuyoshi Takashima, a professor at Ryukyu University, writes in the weekly magazine Shukan Kinyobi that the national media have not bothered to explain much of the rest of the law to the public and implies that the media aren’t interested in it, or if indeed, they even understand it.
More important than the new Article 2 is the old Article 10. The current law says that “education cannot be subjected to ‘improper control’ (futo-na shihai).” This stipulation was put in place by the Americans to pre-empt the kind of indoctrination that the Rescript represented. It has been used by the Japan Teachers Union to keep the authorities from interfering in their work. In essence, it prevents the government from sticking its nose in the classroom.
The Asahi Shimbun said the ruling Liberal Democratic Party wanted to remove this stipulation but left it in, probably because teachers would protest its excision. However, the LDP added a phrase that said decisions about “improper control” could also be subject to “other laws,” which presumably means that it will become easier for the government to legally enforce directives that teachers find objectionable. The government wants to put a stop to lawsuits over its control of the curriculum and teaching methods; for instance, its approval of text books.
In order for the government to reverse what the education ministry has referred to as students’ “deteriorating morality,” which it implies was brought about by the current education law, it apparently needs to be able to dictate all aspects of education in the schools itself. And according to the new law local governments will be compelled to “make efforts” to carry out central government policies. These efforts will then be evaluated by the central government. The Tokyo Metropolitan Government, in fact, has already put such a system in place. Starting last April, teaching staff no longer have a say in directives handed down by their principals.
In a survey carried out by the Asahi, more than half the respondents said they are in favor of revising the education law. The same percentage said they didn’t see any problem with promoting patriotism in schools. These results seem to indicate that most citizens understand only the patriotism controversy and thus equate the revision with an emphasis on loving one’s country. And what’s wrong with that? As Little Steven said, it’s natural to love your country if that’s the limit of your experience.
But to politicians patriotism is a tool and means whatever they want it to mean. It’s the same with any abstraction. When the prime minister defends his visits to Yasukuni Shrine, he claims no one can dictate his conscience. But several years ago a high-school student from Miyazaki sent the government a petition protesting the deployment of Self-Defense Forces to Iraq because it violated the Constitution. When asked to comment, Koizumi said nothing about the young man’s conscience, only that his teachers had obviously not explained the deployment properly. Under the revised education bill that would never happen.
The Japan Times: Sunday, May 28, 2006
(C) All rights reserved
http://search.japantimes.co.jp/cgi-bin/fd20060528pb.html
Posted at 12:22 AM · Comments (0)
Angry old men: ON LATE STYLE: Music and Literature Against the Grain by Edward Said
May 29, 2006 12:15 AM
May 26 2006 15:06
Copyright The Financial Times
Edward Said used to joke that he was the last Jewish intellectual. For a Christian Palestinian New Yorker who made his name with Orientalism, a fierce polemic against western cultural imperialism, this was some claim. Yet four decades of book titles - The Politics of Dispossession; Out of Place: A Memoir; Reflections on Exile - indicate that his leitmotif was precisely the one that haunted the diaspora intelligentsia before the establishment of Israel.
Uniquely, Said brought themes of marginality and powerlessness in art, along with the Jewish tradition of cultural yearning, to bear on late 20th- century Palestinian experience. He believed that the quintessential intellectual hates all systems, whether on our side or theirs, with equal distaste. But the question of exile still courses through the posthumous, apparently apolitical On Late Style, thus confirming the story of his lifes work - that although art cannot be enlisted for political ends, nor can it be separated from political currents.
On Late Style is brilliant cultural criticism from a writer whose perfect-pitch perception across all arts and national boundaries - Euripides, Glenn Gould, Genet, Visconti are among the subjects - was always conditioned by his outsider status. Dying, of course, makes outsiders of us all. And it is the awareness of death waiting, altering the quality of time like a change in the light, which shapes both tone and subject here. In September 2003, days after telling his wife that the book was nearly complete, Said died; it has been elegantly edited by his friend Michael Wood. That On Late Style remained unfinished, however, seems somehow essential to its lovely, urgent art-meets-life truthfulness, for Saids originality here is to explore artistic lateness not as harmony and resolution but as intransigence, difficulty and unresolved contradiction.
We tend to think of late style as the reaching of a new level of expression, as Hermann Broch put it. He cited the penetrating light dissolving human flesh and soul in late Titian; the painted metaphysics of Rembrandt and Goya; The Art of Fugue which Bach in his old age dictated without having a concrete instrument in mind, because what he had to express was either beneath or beyond the audible surface of music.
Broch, in exile in the US and longing for European culture, was writing in the 1940s. Said, revisiting the subject in a 21st century that courts aesthetic disharmony, focuses instead on late styles rooted in non-serene tension. The last plays of angry old man Ibsen tamper irrevocably with the possibility of closure and leave the audience more perplexed and unsettled than before. Schoenberg prolongs the irreconcilabilities, negations and immobilities of the late Beethoven, who exudes a new sense of private striving and instability after the confident, gregarious Eroica.
Saids interpretative genius always rested on a flair for combining critical theory with passionately enthusiastic close reading. What interests him especially about the modernists is how anarchic, out-of-time artists play off late style against the great totalising code of 20th-century western culture and cultural diffusion: the music business, publishing, film, journalism. This subversive individuality and lingering on the old order unites figures in diverse media, from Richard Strauss (Four Last Songs represent the theatricalisation of an old man waiting for death) to Giuseppe di Lampedusa in The Leopard and Luchino Visconti in the screen version of that book and films redolent of historical opera such as Death in Venice. In old age in postwar Europe, each created anachronistic, widely popular modernist classics which turn on the death of tradition as well as personal mortality. Composed when Strauss was an official of the Third Reich, Capriccio is about sustaining a traditional line and yet also allowing us to hear the interruptions of the outside world. Without a shred of self-pity, Lampedusa and Visconti, both aristocrat-artists exiled from their own class, record degenerate old Europe disappearing within a new, crass middle-class world.
Dazzlingly, Said shows how such works depend on an emotional profligacy and glorious extravagance achieved through two privileges of maturity: an absolute refusal to be embarrassed; and a supreme, distilled mastery of form, thanks to a lifetime of technical effort. Risk, resistance and a refusal to sit easily with either mass consumer or avant-garde tastes characterise these works. For each artist it was as if having achieved age, they want none of its serenity [or] amiability or official ingratiation. Yet in none of them is mortality denied or evaded, but keeps coming back as the theme of death which undermines, and elevates their uses of language and aesthetic. There is no better description of this gracefully unquiet, probing and wise book: Saids own elegiac masterpiece of late style.
http://news.ft.com/cms/s/cb947f36-ebb3-11da-b3e2-0000779e2340.html
Posted at 12:15 AM · Comments (0)
Jodi
May 26, 2006 6:33 PM
The Ipod-like device at work served this up this afternoon in one of those miracle sequences, where the tunes seem to have been cued up by some superior spirit.
This song is a fat and languid blues ballad by the all-time master of the genre; a real seminar in feeling, and an essential number for anyone who loves the music of the middle of the last century.
The tune was followed by Unless on Has, by Coltrane, from his Blues Connotation recording. It is a perfect match for Dex’s mood and though full of Coltrane virtuosity, never rushed or insistent.
Two songs later, along came another Dexter masterpiece — one of my all-time favorites: “Don’t Explain”. And I won’t. this stuff has to be heard.
Posted at 6:33 PM · Comments (0)
Take a number, pal: Web etiquette goes wacky when ranking friends becomes an exercise in lifeboat ethics.
May 26, 2006 6:30 PM
Copyright The Los Angeles Times
May 10, 2006
LET’S begin with an exercise. First, name the eight most important people in your life friends, family, rock stars. These are your Top 8. Now rank those people in order of importance. Finally, send a copy of this list to everybody you know, including people who didn’t make the cut. Be careful not to hurt the wrong feelings, or you may end up getting bumped from other people’s Top 8s.
Go ahead and bite your nails. Realize the magnitude of these decisions.
OK, so, you’re either lost in terrifying flashbacks of middle-school cruelty or you’ve already made such a list, already showed it to all your friends, and since you didn’t make all their Top 8s, you’ve already deleted the offenders from your list (and prayed they noticed). In other words, you’re already on MySpace.com or one of the many other social networking websites such as Facebook.com or Friendster.com, doing your best to navigate this complex new world of friends-of-friends-of-friends-etc. with as few social casualties as possible.
If the Internet was once ungoverned by etiquette, those days are gone; MySpace and its siblings, by many accounts the future of the Net, are rife with discussions of good manners versus unforgivable faux pas. There isn’t an aristocratic class, just yet, but you can see the lines forming in the sand, renegades and bad boys posting bulletins pell-mell, uploading risque pictures, collecting “friends” as if it’s all some big popularity contest while mannered netizens look on disapprovingly. Screw up and you just might get dumped, online and off.
J.D. Funari is hoping that clarity prevents offense. A week after logging onto MySpace, the 24-year-old TV editor from Studio City posted a disclaimer above his Top 8: “Since this ‘preferred’ listing of friends can quickly become unnecessarily political, I’d like to briefly explain my sorting technique,” he wrote.
“The first spot will always be my brother (for obvious reasons) and the second spot will always be my friend Katie (for reasons obvious to Katie and I). The third and fourth spots are reserved for music and movies of interest. Five and six are wild-cards which may be related to how well I know the person and/or if I’m dating them (opposite sex only) and/or if they’ve paid me for inclusion. The final two spots are, to be perfectly honest, the two most attractive current female photos from my list of friends.”
The posted explanation sent ripples through Funari’s 97 interconnected friends. “It’s very flattering,” says Katie Rose Houck, 23, an actress in Los Angeles who occupies slot No. 8, reserved for attractive females. “We’ve only known each other for a couple of months, and we have a flirting banter going on between the two of us. This reaffirms that he knows that I’m pretty, that I know that he thinks I’m pretty, and all of his extended friends know that he thinks I’m pretty.”
Houck admits laughingly that she has browsed through Funari’s other friends to see whom she bested. Then again, she is No. 8 on the list, while No. 7 went to Amy Vo, a 25-year-old receptionist from Maryland, who happens to be wearing a bikini in her MySpace picture. “I have an outfit on, so of course Amy is going to get the first spot,” says Houck. “Naked wins over pretty.”
Vo has never actually met Funari in person; the two connected through Funari’s No. 1 friend, Katie. It went like this: Funari clicked on Katie’s picture and was whisked to her profile, where he spied Vo in spot No. 3. He clicked over to Vo’s profile and sent her a message. “He said, ‘Oh, you’re so pretty,’ ” remembers Vo. “And I said, ‘Oh, you’re so nice.’ ” Then Funari requested Vo as a friend, she accepted, and soon she rose to spot No. 7 on his page. (Alas, Funari, you’re absent from Vo’s Top 8.) These, the newfangled dances we dance.
At first it seems as if Funari’s strategy might just work. Play the honesty card, let people know where they stand, watch them celebrate or nurse their wounds and then move on. But life threatens to throw a monkey wrench into his beautiful absolutes. “The first spot will always be my brother,” his rules explain. Problem is, Funari has two younger siblings who will soon be logging on themselves. What then? And what if he gets serious with a girl will she be happy at sixth place?
“If he was my boyfriend, and he didn’t put me in the top 5, I would be a little offended,” Houck says. “And if he kept his best girlfriend at No. 2 and she’s pretty! I would be a little offended. Maybe that’s why he’s still single.”
Well, he is single. It says so right on his page: “Status: Single.” MySpace profile pages are customizable in many ways; you can add pictures, music, write blogs, list your interests or skip all this entirely. You can allow friends to jot comments directly onto your page, viewable by all, or you can retain absolute control. But try as you might, you can’t avoid classifying your relationship status, which isn’t always easy to do.
After the Top 8, relationship status causes the most ire in the MySpace world.
“It gets highly dramatic,” says Danah Boyd, a doctoral student at UC Berkeley who is studying the culture of social networking. “Sometimes one person thinks they’re single while the other person thinks they’re dating. You can’t have your status be, ‘I’m in a relationship that I’m not entirely thrilled with, I’m waiting for something better, come talk to me.’ “
What results is an inordinate amount of “swingers,” an allowed choice that’s sufficiently deviant for teens, ironic for adults (minus actual swingers) and has quickly become socially acceptable within the MySpace mainstream. Still, there remain many conventionalists who choose “single” or “in a relationship,” and watch their physical and digital worlds intertwine.
Five months ago, 27-year-old James was “in a relationship,” according to his MySpace page. Then James, a New York public relations executive who declined to provide his last name, broke up with his girlfriend and switched to “single.”
In the real world and online, James and his ex remained friends, so when James started dating another woman, he didn’t want to rub it in his ex’s face. He delicately broached the MySpace topic with the new girlfriend, and they agreed not to switch their designation to “in a relationship” just yet. So: single online, together off.
It was four months of limbo before James and his girlfriend decided the time was right. “I was at her Easter family dinner,” James remembers, “and that pretty much constitutes a relationship.”
They went online, made the change and all’s well unless things go sour. “There’s a tension that never existed before,” James says.
In this case, James and his girlfriend were making the safe assumption that their exes engage in “MySpace stalking,” the practice of secretly keeping tabs on friends, lovers, co-workers, celebrities or complete strangers by reading their profiles.
If stalking in the real world implies some dangerous psychological imbalance, on MySpace it’s essentially the norm, although etiquette suggests that you keep your stalking to yourself. Mention so-and-so’s dating status too loudly in the wrong context or without the required I’m-just-kidding jocularity and you risk being judged a stalker in the regular sense.
Where there’s stalking, there’s reverse stalking. After all, wouldn’t you want to know who’s watching you? To watch them watch you without them knowing they’re being watched? Um, of course you would. At first. And then you realize that if you watch whoever’s watching you, then you’ll also be unveiled to everybody you’re stalking, which puts a real damper on the initial voyeuristic enterprise.
Some social networking sites, such as Friendster, allow users to view who has visited their profiles; MySpace does not. Which simply means that MySpacers are more desperate than ever to unearth a reverse-stalking technique and then hide it from everyone they know.
In February, James hit gold. He came across a website, Whospyme.com, which gave users the ability to watch the watchers. Unlike the dozens of hoaxes circulating throughout MySpace, this one actually worked. “It showed who visited my page and the exact time they visited. One girl, an old friend, checked it almost every hour.” James was omniscient for nearly two weeks until MySpace blocked Whospyme, returning him to darkness.
Tom Anderson, president of MySpace and its most beloved member he regularly receives marriage proposals among the thousands of comments on his profile explains: “We can’t allow somebody to create a service like that, which reveals who’s looking at your page. That’s a violation of privacy.” If MySpace were to unveil such a feature, Anderson says, each user would get to make an individual decision about whether to be traceable. Yet another decision fraught with online and offline complications.
There are plenty of other decisions to make in the meantime:
Number of friends: Too many, you’re deemed a “MySpace whore,” too few, a loser. (Caveat: If you’re in a band, or you’re a middle-school kid who lied about your age to get on MySpace and are competing with friends to see who’s most popular, “too many” is a good thing.)
Profile picture: Posing in your skivvies opens you to scorn, but, depending on your friends, it may also increase the probability that you’ll score some Top 8 spots. “I can’t stand it when people put pictures up, trying to look all sexy,” says Lori Carter, 25, a Salt Lake City office manager. More specifically, Carter can’t stand it when her husband accepts such people as his friends.
Grammar: “I am not a grammar Nazi,” says Michael Block, 23, an L.A. search engine marketer who uses MySpace and Tagworld.com. “But I do feel terrible for words like ‘probably’ and ‘someone’ that are constantly bastardized into ‘prolly’ and sumone.’ ” Etiquette here is often divided by age, with teens writing in slang that evokes fury in their twentysomething elders. Block has been unable to decipher this message, for instance, which he received from a 15-year-old stranger from Florida: “y u want people 2 look at u 4. u thinken that u looken sweet 4 da females.”
Bulletins: These are messages that users post to virtual bulletin boards. Perhaps the most common social networking pet peeve are posted versions of the chain letters of yore, the “if you don’t send this on you’ll never fall in love again and then you’ll die a horrible death” variety.
If you’ve steered clear of social networking so far, enjoy that simple existence while you’re able. Sooner or later friends will ask then demand that you migrate toward multidimensionality. There are more than 76 million people on MySpace (about 270,000 join daily), and Anderson wants to expand the MySpace experience until the entire Net rests within it. “Anything you do on the Internet, I want you to be able to do on MySpace,” he says. “That’s the goal and ambition. Almost all the things you can do online can be enhanced by the social structure of MySpace.”
Which suggests that the Top 8 will become only more central to the human experience, more dizzyingly complex.
“It’s the Seinfeldian Speed Dial Dilemma of our generation,” says Sarah Ciston, 22, a page designer at the Long Beach Press-Telegram. “I love it. But I think you should also get a Bottom 8, or a Bottom 20. A hall of shame of sorts.”
If you want other stories on this topic, search the Archives at latimes.com/archives.
http://www.calendarlive.com/printedition/calendar/cl-et-etiquette10may10,0,7688804.story?coll=cl-calendar
Posted at 6:30 PM · Comments (0)
Goin’ Down Slow
May 26, 2006 1:38 AM
Great Googlie-mooglie. A masterpiece from Chess Blues - 1960-1967.
Man, you know I done enjoyed things that Kings and Queens ain’t never had. In fact Kings and Queens can’t never get. Don’t even know about! And good times? Ummmmm.
I have had my fun. If I don’t never get well no more. I have had my fun. If I never get well no more. Woah, my health is fading on me. Woah yes, I’m going down slow…
Please write my mother, and tell her the shape I’m in. Please write my mother, and tell her the shape I’m in. Tell her pray for me. Forgive me for my sins.
Posted at 1:38 AM · Comments (0)
A CHINA SYNDROME THAT ONLY HURTS CHINA
May 23, 2006 1:55 PM
>
>LOS ANGELES — The relationship between the United States and China is
>the single most important bilateral entanglement in global politics
>today. Is there really any argument here? So it bears repeating in
>fact, urgently — that the Peoples Republic of China is barking up
>exactly the wrong sort of tree in foolishly crossing swords with The New
>York Times.
>
>This prestigious daily newspaper is an American mass-media leader. On the
>mainland of China, there is absolutely no equivalent. The paper is more
>important by far— than the chairman of the Senate Foreign Relations
>Committee. It is like the South China Morning Post, the excellently
>feisty Asian English-language newspaper based in Hong Kong, times one
>hundred. No one U.S. multinational super-corporation is as influential
>as the daily put out by the boys and girls on West 43rd St. in Manhattan.
>
>Let me suggest, without being too silly, that this longstanding New York
>daily possesses the opinion-making capability of a multi-megaton nuclear
>bomb. For example, our TV networks in part take their news cues from its
>front page — as do many other newspapers the width and breadth of
>America. Should Times editors decide to drop all their destructive power
>—rightly or wrongly on China, the effect would be not at all what
>Beijing would want. So why mess with them if you can avoid it?
>
>But China, which could have avoided this problem altogether, instead
>decided to mess with The Times anew. To make a technically and
>spiritually unedifying long story short, mainland authorities have
>recharged a former Beijing-based researcher from The New York Times for
>offenses that they had just recently dropped.
>
>The researcher in question, Zhao Yan, remains in a Chinese prison. The
>original charge, dropped and restated, claimed theft of state secrets in
>connection with a Times story revealing a power struggle in the PRC
>elite. For its part, the newspaper has stated for the record that its
>leadership-struggle story was not a product of Zhao Yans work in Beijing.
>
>That admission was large-spirited of the newspaper (which has been trying
>to get Yan from behind bars) but it should have been unnecessary: If
>Chinas authorities and its their decision to do so, after all — are
>prepared to permit The Times to report stories from the mainland, they
>need to accept, especially in this age of information-globalization, that
>not every story that appears in the paper will, be enormously wonderful,
>appealing and pro-China (whatever this might mean).
>
>How to explain Chinas unwise conduct? Heres one thought: As backdrop,
>rumor has it that China President Hu Jintao was irritated with the U.S.
>handling of his recent official visit to Washington and thus vengeful.
>Lets not go into the well-reported details but from his perspective (and
>from almost everyone elses) he has the right to sulk. But while humanly
>understandable, sulking for any extended period of time is
>internationally ill-advised.
>
>With almost scientific precision, China, which has many problems, needs
>to maximize its national interests in every single respect and
>opportunity. Indulging in the cult of the sulk if that is what is
>happening in this case is no way for the adult leader of China to behave.
>
>Okay — its hard to explain to PRC friends why The New York Times is so
>important. Everyone knows it is powerful, even though everyone wishes it
>would demonstrate a lot more humility. But it doesnt, and it never will.
>In the U.S., therefore, everyone knows, for all its faults, The New York
>Times is a power to be reckoned with. This is the ways things are today.
>
>Is this column nothing more than a kind of special plea by one journalist
>not in trouble for another journalist now in trouble? On one level,
>perhaps; but this case is special. The New York Times has been
>historically reluctant to take up individual cases for fear of being
>accused of special-interest pleading. To its credit, this is not such a
>case. A major part of The Times argument for the release of Zhao Yan has
>less to do with concern for the individual (though this is sincere) than
>with the larger issue.
>
>You see, Americas leading newspaper would prefer to deal with China
>wholly objectively and seriously. But when China make issues like Zhao
>Yan so personal and ugly, its leaders look to be ones who sulk, and are,
>at the end of the day, the real losers, not The New York Times, as
>arrogant as the latter can be, too.
>
>China needs to always show to the world its peaceful rise side, not its
>testy old Mao kindergarten-brat side: because, before too long, this is
>the side the entire American news media will start to focus on and report
>to the American people about. This is not something China needs. Zhao
>Yan is a much, much hotter potato than Beijing realizes.
>
>
>UCLA Prof. Tom Plate is a member of the Pacific Council on International
>Relations and founder of the UCLA Media Center. 2006, Tom Plate.
Posted at 1:55 PM · Comments (0)
In Mali, Bono Talks the Cotton Trade
May 23, 2006 12:58 PM
Copyright Reuters May 22, 2006
DAFARA VILLAGE, Mali (Reuters) - In this village about a two-hour drive from the capital Bamako, rock star Bono meets local chiefs and elders and says American cotton traded on the international market has an unfair advantage over Mali’s.
ADVERTISEMENT
“There are cotton farmers in America who need to meet you,” says the Irish rocker and activist. “This is my biggest desire because I think they will understand you better because I think American cotton farmers would respect how you work the land so well with little water.”
The 90-year-old chief Julien Traore, sitting opposite the rock star under a mango tree surrounded by villagers and children, nods and encourages Bono to keep talking.
“The reason you don’t get more for your cotton is because world trade talks, the people who are sitting at the table, do not respect your situation,” Bono continues. “We will try to represent you in the trade talks where they won’t let you sit.”
Mali is one of Africa’s five big cotton producers next to Chad, Benin, Burkina Faso and Senegal that are demanding the United States dramatically cuts the subsidies it pays its farmers.
In 2004-5 U.S. producers received about $4.2 billion in federal subsidies, money that impoverished West African nations say depresses world prices and ruins their economies.
The West African producers have sought for several years to give cotton special status in the
World Trade Organization talks, currently stalled over broader farm issues.
Bono, on a six-nation African tour to see how Africa is trying to transform itself amid promises by the West of increased aid, is in Mali specifically to find out how low cotton prices are directly affecting farmers.
“I think Americans would like things to be more fair. We would like to have it more fair,” he says, then asks Chief Traore: “What do you think of America?”
“We think Americans are white men but they are still farmers,” responds the chief.
In his campaigning for Africa, Bono has lobbied leaders from the largest industrialized economies for better access for Africa to the large U.S. and European markets.
On his tour, Bono has argued that the only way Africa can escape the cycle of poverty is through increased trade.
In Mali, Bono also visited a state-owned cotton ginnery where cotton is washed and bundled for export, mainly to Asia.
Issa Djire, an agronomist and senior official at the ginnery, explains that 97 percent of Mali’s cotton is exported, while the remaining three percent is processed locally and turned into yarn and thread at local factories.
Djire stresses that Mali’s cotton is among the highest quality in the world and what it needs is foreign investment.
http://news.yahoo.com/s/nm/20060522/music_nm/africa_bono_cotton_dc_2
Posted at 12:58 PM · Comments (0)
May 23, 2006 12:58 PM
Copyright Reuters May 22, 2006
DAFARA VILLAGE, Mali (Reuters) - In this village about a two-hour drive from the capital Bamako, rock star Bono meets local chiefs and elders and says American cotton traded on the international market has an unfair advantage over Mali’s.
ADVERTISEMENT
“There are cotton farmers in America who need to meet you,” says the Irish rocker and activist. “This is my biggest desire because I think they will understand you better because I think American cotton farmers would respect how you work the land so well with little water.”
The 90-year-old chief Julien Traore, sitting opposite the rock star under a mango tree surrounded by villagers and children, nods and encourages Bono to keep talking.
“The reason you don’t get more for your cotton is because world trade talks, the people who are sitting at the table, do not respect your situation,” Bono continues. “We will try to represent you in the trade talks where they won’t let you sit.”
Mali is one of Africa’s five big cotton producers next to Chad, Benin, Burkina Faso and Senegal that are demanding the United States dramatically cuts the subsidies it pays its farmers.
In 2004-5 U.S. producers received about $4.2 billion in federal subsidies, money that impoverished West African nations say depresses world prices and ruins their economies.
The West African producers have sought for several years to give cotton special status in the
World Trade Organization talks, currently stalled over broader farm issues.
Bono, on a six-nation African tour to see how Africa is trying to transform itself amid promises by the West of increased aid, is in Mali specifically to find out how low cotton prices are directly affecting farmers.
“I think Americans would like things to be more fair. We would like to have it more fair,” he says, then asks Chief Traore: “What do you think of America?”
“We think Americans are white men but they are still farmers,” responds the chief.
In his campaigning for Africa, Bono has lobbied leaders from the largest industrialized economies for better access for Africa to the large U.S. and European markets.
On his tour, Bono has argued that the only way Africa can escape the cycle of poverty is through increased trade.
In Mali, Bono also visited a state-owned cotton ginnery where cotton is washed and bundled for export, mainly to Asia.
Issa Djire, an agronomist and senior official at the ginnery, explains that 97 percent of Mali’s cotton is exported, while the remaining three percent is processed locally and turned into yarn and thread at local factories.
Djire stresses that Mali’s cotton is among the highest quality in the world and what it needs is foreign investment.
http://news.yahoo.com/s/nm/20060522/music_nm/africa_bono_cotton_dc_2
Posted at 12:58 PM · Comments (0)
Katherine Dunham is Dead
May 23, 2006 1:34 AM
Copyright Associated Press
NEW YORK, May 21 (AP) — Katherine Dunham, a pioneering dancer and
choreographer, author and civil rights activist who left Broadway to
teach
culture in one of America’s poorest cities, has died. She was 96.
Dunham died Sunday at the Manhattan assisted living facility where
she
lived, said Charlotte Ottley, executive liaison for the organization
that
preserves her artistic estate. The cause of death was not immediately
known.
Dunham was perhaps best known for bringing African and Caribbean
influences to the European-dominated dance world. In the late 1930s,
she
established the nation’s first self-supporting all-black modern dance
group.
“We weren’t pushing `Black is Beautiful,’ we just showed it,” she
later
wrote.
During her career, Dunham choreographed “Aida” for the Metropolitan
Opera and musicals such as “Cabin in the Sky” for Broadway. She also
appeared in several films, including “Stormy Weather” and “Carnival of
Rhythm.”
Her dance company toured internationally from the 1940s to the ’60s,
visiting 57 nations on six continents. Her success was won in the face
of
widespread discrimination, a struggle Dunham championed by refusing to
perform at segregated theaters.
For her endeavors, Dunham received 10 honorary doctorates, the
Presidential Medal of the Arts, the Albert Schweitzer Prize at the
Kennedy
Center Honors, and membership in the French Legion of Honor, as well as
major honors from Brazil and Haiti.
“She is one of the very small handful of the most important people
in
the dance world of the 20th century,” said Bonnie Brooks, chairman of
the
dance department at Columbia College in Chicago. “And that’s not even
mentioning her work in civil rights, anthropological research and for
humanity in general.”
After 1967, Dunham lived most of each year in predominantly black
East
St. Louis, Ill., where she struggled to bring the arts to a Mississippi
River city of burned-out buildings and high crime.
She set up an eclectic compound of artists from around the globe,
including Harry Belafonte. Among the free classes offered were dance,
African hair-braiding and woodcarving, conversational Creole, Spanish,
French and Swahili and more traditional subjects such as aesthetics and
social science.
Dunham also offered martial arts training in hopes of getting young,
angry males off the street. Her purpose, she said, was to steer the
residents of East St. Louis “into something more constructive than
genocide.”
Government cuts and a lack of private funding forced her to scale
back
her programs in the 1980s. Despite a constant battle to pay bills,
Dunham
continued to operate a children’s dance workshop and a museum.
Plagued by arthritis and poverty in the latter part of her life,
Dunham
made headlines in 1992 when she went on a 47-day hunger strike to
protest
U.S. policy that repatriated Haitian refugees.
“It’s embarrassing to be an American,” Dunham said at the time.
Dunham’s New York studio attracted illustrious students like Marlon
Brando and James Dean who came to learn the “Dunham Technique,” which
Dunham herself explained as “more than just dance or bodily executions.
It
is about movement, forms, love, hate, death, life, all human emotions.”
In her later years, she depended on grants and the kindness of
celebrities, artists and former students to pay for her day-to-day
expenses. Will Smith and Harry Belafonte were among those who helped
her
catch up on bills, Ottley said.
“She didn’t end up on the street though she was one step from it,”
Ottley said. “She has been on the edge and survived it all with dignity
and
grace.”
Dunham was married to theater designer John Thomas Pratt for 49
years
before his death in 1986.
Posted at 1:34 AM · Comments (0)
Modern China’s founding legend: heavy on myth?
May 22, 2006 10:32 PM
Copyright The Christian Science Monitor
BEIJING - For China, it’s Paul Revere’s ride and Washington crossing the Delaware in one.
The Luding Bridge battle is the most famous moment in the Long March, itself the defining legend of modern China. The Red Army is hotly pursued in 1935. Soldiers hoof it 24/7 for 140 miles. They must cross the Dadu River, or be wiped out! But a 300-year-old chain-suspension bridge is closely guarded. So a suicide squad shimmies over the chains, under machine-gun fire, and wipes out the dreaded Nationalist enemy. The Red Army crosses! The China of Mao is saved!
Mao told the story to American chronicler Edgar Snow, who apotheosized it in his 1937 “Red Star over China.” Mao’s poem about the battle, “Gunfire licked the heavens/ Iron chains rocked,” is included in the book and became a Chinese Gettysburg Address, memorized by kids.
Just one problem: A “battle” never quite happened. A skirmish with guards of a local warlord might have occurred. But the machine guns, the Nationalists, the 140 miles, and the chain crawling - today is regarded as mythical. Most likely, no Red soldiers died at Luding. As Gen. Li Jukui wrote 50 years later in a memo never published until last month by author Sun Shuyan in her new book, “Long March:” “This matter was not as complicated as people made it out to be later.”
While China’s economy has matured rapidly, the official history of modern China remains unrevised. How the truth of the past emerges in China is a subject of great importance and invisible struggle here. Legends like the Long March, the epic two-year survival march around China by the fledgling communists, remain so crucial to the founding concepts of the party that archives on the march are unapproachable and no scholars who want a healthy career will study the area.
Yet Ms. Sun, an Oxford-educated daughter of China who tracked down 40 march survivors, found the real story of China’s defining myth to be “far more heroic, and far more tragic, than is known.” The endurance, the sacrifices, the heartbreak - especially for women - goes past any official accounting, she finds. But her account won’t be published in China, much like the recent tough history of Mao by Jung Chang and Jon Halliday.
Around the globe, history has been shaken, broadened, deconstructed, and reconstructed. But China’s triumphal version of its past, taught to 1.3 billion people, remains quaintly untouched. While China complains about Japan airbrushing its World War II brutality, and while China issues three-inch thick versions of its historical claims on Taiwan, huge chunks of China’s history over the past 75 years remain censored or unknown. June 1 marks the 40th anniversary of the start of the brutal Cultural Revolution, a spasm of insanity where hundreds of thousands died in nightmarish ideological campaigns. Yet no genuine accounting of that period is allowed. Rather, the policy appears one of hope that the tragedy will fade from memory.
“We are far from accepting the real truth. The most important base for the ruling party ideology is a favorable description of party history,” argues Li Datong, dismissed as editor of the magazine Freezing Point for running an essay challenging the tendency to glorify antiforeigner sentiments in China’s past. “You start questioning things, who knows where it will lead? You question the Qing Dynasty, modern China, the party history, the Cultural Revolution, 1989 [Tiananmen] … there is no end to the questioning.”
Some China experts say that as the nation rises and becomes more influential in the global arena, a lack of honest history has consequences beyond China’s borders. They argue that, just as health issues like SARS or the environment transcend national borders, a population weaned on a false or incomplete version of the past is not good for China or the world.
“Chinese youths don’t know that millions died in the 1950s, or that the CCP ordered a famine in Changchun [Jilin province] that caused hundreds of thousands of deaths, far more than died in Nanjing [a Japanese Army massacre],” says Wang Fei-ling, a Chinese-born historian now at the Georgia Institute of Technology. “To head off a repeat of the historical tragedies of many past rising powers … the Chinese people must not be misled about their own history any longer; there must be a marketplace for competing ideas, open discourse, and judicious reasoning.”
Most accepted history on China is conducted by foreign scholars. Yet some new shafts of light are seen in the dark corridors of China’s recent past, from the inside. A scattering of scholars are shifting away from a purely “party” view of history, to a “people’s view.” Independent writers have been moving carefully, talking with eyewitnesses of events like the Great Leap Forward where intellectuals were decimated and killed, and the great famine of the late 1950s - which may have claimed as many as 30 million. Such research is still rare. Still, authors from China can now cross into Hong Kong and purchase an ISBN number for $275 - and finance small press runs of 2,000 to 3,000 copies. Hong Kong, in some ways, has become the memory of mainland China. The papers of Mao’s Premier Zhou Enlai were recently published there.
In the early 1970s, as Cultural Revolution terror hit new highs, the infamous “gang of four” forced history to be written as a “class struggle” - as if 4,000 years of Chinese culture had culminated gloriously in the forming of the Communist Party. But today, “social history” of peasant life is under way. Scholars will look at land reform - regarded as the central problem of Chinese history - separately from the party verdict. Historian Yu Xiguang edited “Great Leap Forward, Bitter Days,” a sharp look at the crackdown on intellectuals. People’s University historian’s Gao Wangling study, “On the ‘Anti-behavior’ of Chinese Peasants,” is an unstinting look at how, in a reversal of the official story, peasants in pockets of China murdered landlords on party orders.
But for now, a stone is rolled across the official doorway to the past.
Take the Long March. As a founding narrative, it is rousing: Mao and his followers were forced out of their stronghold in south China by bad military decisions made by a German tactician named Otto Braun, who was foisted onto the Reds by Moscow. Some 200,000 soldiers in three armies wandered like the children of Israel over mountains and rivers, hungry and attacked, backtracking, until only 40,000 survivors arrived at Wuqi in the north two years later. This was the core of a new China.
Today, Long March is like apple pie. It’s the name for missiles, military hospitals, and schools. On “Red tourism” vacations, Chinese walk parts of the march. Chinese journalists retrace the footprints of the march, blogging all the way.
The March story was codified in “Red Star Over China,” which became a best-seller in London before being translated into Chinese. Of the 12 Long March books on sale today at the giant Wangfujing shop here all are variations of Snow’s version. (A publisher at the bookstore told the Monitor he estimated that 20 percent of the Long March volumes were true. Other historians in Beijing estimate about “50 percent” of party history is true.) Snow’s volume is an achievement for a young writer who went behind enemy lines. But it is Mao’s version. Author Robert Elegant, who knew both Mao and Snow, told the Monitor last month that much of Snow’s famous work was “dictated” by the future chairman at these sessions. Sun herself says Snow became Mao’s greatest propagandist, albeit unintentionally.
As with most new accounts, Sun relies on sources disallowed in China - a diary kept by a Protestant missionary named Rudolph Bosshardt, for example. Mr. Bosshardt marched with the Reds for 560 days after being kidnapped and held for $10,000 ransom. Kidnapping by the Reds was common, something that shocked Sun. (Bosshardt’s “The Restraining Hand,” written after his release, is the best day-by-day account, Sun finds, of the march: the lack of shoes, the hopes, the endurance, the execution of the kidnapped, the disease, the hunger, the meals of duck and goat. His account is not part of official history.)
Sun’s work is part an attempt to bring sense to her own family history, as well as China’s. Her grandfather was a landlord persecuted by the Reds; her grandmother drowned herself in a river, out of grief. Her father was an Army officer deeply committed to communist China, and who constantly tried to reverse the negative party verdict on his own family. He died a broken man, Sun says, who soured on the party.
Sun’s history, published in English by HarperCollins and unavailable in China, quietly stands the official Long March on its head. She shows that rates of desertion were high. Peasants didn’t want to join. Women were forced to give birth and leave the babies behind. She points out that Chinese never learn the real causes for the march: partly it was that three separate purges by Mao of more than 10,000 (predating Stalin’s purges, a little-known fact) caused locals to distrust and hate the Reds. The communists were forced to leave the Jiangxi stronghold. Once on the march, they were consistently cornered by the Nationalist Army, then let go. As Gao Wangling points out, “most serious historians today understand that Chiang Kai-shek could have annihilated the communists, but kept them alive as a bargaining chip with Moscow.”
Yet the idealism of the Reds, many of whom joined the march to be released from bad marriages and near slavery, inspired Sun. “I think the marchers accomplished so much more than we are told. The obstacles they overcame were so much greater. They could easily have run away, and they didn’t.”
Sun cites Bosshardt’s lifelong appreciation for the marchers, despite the fact that they kidnapped him and that, “Christianity is about love, and communism is about hate, in the sense that if you disagree, you are killed,” she says. “But Bosshardt recognized that we go through life and we want to feel something bigger than ourselves. He thought the communists had that in them. They and he were both young, both passionate about what they were doing. He was inspired by what the communists did.”
http://www.csmonitor.com/2006/0522/p01s02-woap.html
Posted at 10:32 PM · Comments (0)
Heard the One About the 600,000 Chinese Engineers?
May 22, 2006 1:12 AM
Copyright The Washington Post
Sunday, May 21, 2006
People and organizations create statistics for a purpose — to call attention to a problem, or to argue for a policy change. Americans consume vast quantities of statistics every day. Most zip in and out of our brains, but others somehow take root in the gray matter, then move about the culture as something that everyone just “knows.”
Among such recent attention-getting statistics are 600,000, 350,000 and 70,000. These are, allegedly, the number of engineers produced in 2004 in China, India and the United States, respectively. The numbers first drew major notice when they appeared in a Fortune magazine story on July 25, 2005. The cover showed a brawny China bullying a scrawny Uncle Sam on the beach, a parody of the old Charles Atlas comic book body-building ads. “Is the U.S. a 97-Pound Weakling?” the cover asked. We’re losing our competitive edge, the article stated, citing the numbers above.
These numbers attained seemingly impeccable credibility when they were featured in a press release last October about a new report from the Committee on Science, Engineering and Public Policy, a joint group from the National Academy of Sciences, National Academy of Engineering and Institute of Medicine (which, with the National Research Council, are collectively known as the National Academies). “Last year more than 600,000 engineers graduated from institutions of higher education in China,” the report stated. “In India the figure was 350,000. In America, it was about 70,000.” To dramatize the seriousness of the issue, the academies titled the 543-page report “Rising Above the Gathering Storm,” an allusion to Winston Churchill’s book “The Gathering Storm,” about events leading up to World War II.
Naturally, given this lofty pedigree, the statistics then materialized in the New York Times, Boston Globe, Chicago Tribune and on many Web sites. While Times columnist Thomas L. Friedman did not use these specific numbers in his 2005 bestseller, “The World Is Flat,” he did write that Asian universities currently produce eight times as many bachelor’s degrees in engineering as U.S. universities do.
Carl Bialik, who writes the “Numbers Guy” column in the Wall Street Journal, was suspicious. He had previously examined the Fortune numbers and concluded that they were inflated, so he sought to find their source. The most likely origin for the 600,000 Chinese engineers was a 2002 speech by Ray Bingham, then-chief executive of a semiconductor company. Bialik couldn’t find any obvious birthplace for the Indian figures, but National Science Foundation analysts told him the number was unlikely to be anywhere near 350,000. As for the academies’ report, Deborah Stine, who led the study, told Bialik that the committee had “assumed Fortune did fact-checking on their numbers” and so used them. Meanwhile, a McKinsey Global Institute report had cast doubt on the quality of the Chinese engineering graduates, so Bialik reasoned that removing unqualified candidates would obviously reduce the total.
The 2004 China Statistical Yearbook, issued by the Chinese government, reports 644,000 engineering graduates that year. But the yearbook merely assembled the numbers sent by provincial governments. The accuracy of these provincial reports is unknown, and it is unclear whether the provinces shared common definitions — the word “engineer” does not translate easily into many Chinese dialects.
In fact, about half of what China calls “engineers” would be called “technicians” at best in the United States, with the equivalent of a vocational certificate or an associate degree. In addition, the McKinsey study of nine occupations, including engineering, concluded that “fewer than 10 percent of Chinese job candidates, on average, would be suitable for work [in a multinational company] in the nine occupations we studied.”
After an exhaustive study, researchers at Duke University also pummeled the numbers. In a December 2005 analysis, “Framing the Engineering Outsourcing Debate,” they reported that the United States annually produces 137,437 engineers with at least a bachelor’s degree while India produces 112,000 and China 351,537. That’s more U.S. degrees per million residents than in either other nation.
Among major media outlets, thus far only the Christian Science Monitor has joined the Wall Street Journal in examining the competing statistics. (A few others have referenced the Duke study). In a December 2005 article, the Monitor quoted Rochester Institute of Technology professor Ron Hira as saying: “Business groups have been very smart about trying to change the subject from outsourcing and offshoring to the supposed shortfall of U.S. engineers. There’s really no serious shortage of engineers.” Yet, while the National Academies replaced the erroneous numbers with the numbers from Duke, Stine stood by her original conclusion, telling the Monitor that “the U.S. is well behind other countries.”
Statistics that end up as conventional wisdom even when they’re wrong usually become popular by being presented as fact in a highly visible and respected source — such as a cover story in Fortune or a National Academies report.
Once a statistic has attained the status of something we all “know,” it takes on a charmed life. It is hardly surprising that the National Academies report gave rise to many citations. Yet even after the Duke report and other demurrals, these spurious throngs of Chinese and Indian engineers remain alive and well, appearing, for example, in a Newsweek opinion piece last winter by Education Secretary Margaret Spellings. Commerce Secretary Carlos M. Gutierrez repeated the numbers in March to a meeting of the National Association of Manufacturers, and Sen. John W. Warner (R-Va.) cited them in April during an appearance at a Fredericksburg science expo for middle-school students.
We probably will not be done with the 600,000, 350,000 and 70,000 false comparison for a long time. If ever.
gbracey1@verizon.net
Gerald W. Bracey is author of “Reading Educational Research: How to Avoid Getting Statistically Snookered” (Heinemann).
Posted at 1:12 AM · Comments (0)
Darfur’s Fleeting Moment
May 21, 2006 3:21 PM
Copyright The New York Times
May 21, 2006
Washington
FOR three years, despite the official rhetoric and the growing public support for bold international action to end the first genocide of the 21st century, Darfur has largely remained a neglected tragedy.
Until now. With the signing of a peace agreement in Nigeria on May 5, Darfur, in western Sudan, faces a new and more hopeful prospect. Although two of the main rebel groups did not sign the accord, the Sudanese government and the largest insurgent faction did. President Bush’s support of the peace process deserves applause, as does Deputy Secretary of State Robert Zoellick’s leadership at the negotiating table.
But as recent fighting between the rebel factions makes painfully clear, this significant achievement is in reality a window of opportunity that could close soon, leaving Darfur still more gravely afflicted. If the piece of paper signed in Nigeria does not quickly produce tangible progress toward peace, including protection for Darfur’s people from both the government-backed janjaweed militia and the rebels, more than diplomatic momentum will be lost. Deepened anger and despair could defeat future efforts at peace and provide fertile ground for the seeds of military conflict and even terrorism, as demonstrated by Al Qaeda’s recent threat to take jihad to Sudan.
Last Tuesday, the United Nations Security Council unanimously passed a resolution supporting the peace agreement and created a team to prepare for a peacekeeping mission that will take over from the African Union force in Darfur.
To seize the moment, the Bush administration should go beyond calling for urgency at the United Nations in planning a peacekeeping force. It should also give the government of Sudan a brief time in which to accept such a force. Sudan has said it would do so once there was a peace agreement, but has waffled in recent statements. It must be held to its words.
Mr. Bush should also now get ready the logistics, intelligence and headquarters assistance that the United States could provide to such a force. Showing we are prepared to act quickly should help persuade the United Nations to move smartly itself.
President Bush could join President Olusegun Obasanjo of Nigeria, who was instrumental in pushing through the peace agreement, in personally soliciting pledges of troops for a United Nations force. While NATO itself will not be accepted by the Sudanese government, why not include alliance members in a United Nations operation?
And Washington should make it clear that if Sudan refuses to accept a United Nations force, we will press NATO to act even without the consent of the Sudanese government including a no-flight zone to ground the Sudanese aircraft that have provided support to the murderous janjaweed. And we would bring further sanctions to bear.
While recent sanctions by the United States and the United Nations against four Sudanese men involved in the genocide are a step in the right direction, far more expansive measures should be taken against the high-level propagators of genocide based in Sudan’s capital, Khartoum, if they block a United Nations force. Beyond multilateral sanctions, the United States could work with countries where Sudanese officials have assets or hope to travel to impose penalties on them.
Meanwhile, the humanitarian crisis grows more desperate. As the needs grow, money to meet them has dwindled. The World Food Program is halving daily rations to Darfurian refugees to a dangerous 1,050 calories a day. Unicef is being forced to scale back its operations, including its nutritional programs for children. The president has asked Congress to increase food aid to Sudan by $225 million. That request must be put on a fast track.
And the many Americans who have voiced their outrage at the dithering of the international community should and can act as well as speak by contributing to humanitarian organizations like Unicef, the International Rescue Committee and Doctors Without Borders.
At the United Nations World Summit meeting last September, the United States and other participating governments agreed that the international community has a responsibility to protect innocent civilians when a government is unwilling or unable to do so. In a letter organized by the Stanford chapter of Students Taking Action Now: Darfur and personally delivered to one of the president’s aides last month, we, along with 16 of our colleagues, called on President Bush and Secretary Rice to lead the international community in honoring this pledge.
A failure of international will has allowed Darfur to bleed into another year of rape, slaughter and starvation. Only strong leadership and urgent, resolute action can save lives before this moment of hope is lost.
Anthony Lake, a professor at Georgetown, was a national security adviser to President Bill Clinton. Francis Fukuyama, a professor of international political economy at Johns Hopkins, is the author of “America at the Crossroads.”
http://www.nytimes.com/2006/05/21/opinion/21lake.html?_r=1&oref=slogin
Posted at 3:21 PM · Comments (0)
The case for contamination
May 21, 2006 3:14 PM
Copyright The RSA Journal
Im seated, with my mother, on a palace veranda, cooled by a breeze from the royal garden. Before us, on a dais, is an empty throne, its arms and legs embossed with polished brass, the back and seat covered in black-and-gold silk. In front of the steps to the dais, there are two columns of people, mostly men, facing one another, seated on carved wooden stools, the cloths they wear wrapped around their chests, leaving their shoulders bare. There is a quiet buzz of conversation. Outside in the garden, peacocks screech. At last, the lowing of a rams horn announces the arrival of the king of Asante, its tones sounding his honorific kotokohene or porcupine chief. (Each quill of the porcupine, according to custom, signifies a warrior ready to kill and to die for the kingdom.) Everyone stands until the king has settled on the throne. Then, when we sit, a chorus sings songs in praise of him, which are interspersed with the playing of a flute. It is a Wednesday festival day in Kumasi, the town in Ghana where I grew up.
Unless youre one of a few million Ghanaians, this will probably seem a relatively unfamiliar world, perhaps even an exotic one. You might suppose that this festival belongs quaintly to an African past. But before the king arrived, people were taking calls on cellphones, and among those passing the time in quiet conversation were a dozen men in suits, representatives of an insurance company. And the meetings in the office next to the veranda are about contemporary issues: HIV/Aids, the educational needs of 21st-century children, the teaching of science and technology at the local university. When my turn comes to be presented, the king asks me about Princeton, where I teach. I ask him when hell next be in the States. In a few weeks, he says. Hes got a meeting with the head of the World Bank.
Anywhere you travel in the world today as always you can find ceremonies like these, many of them rooted in centuries-old traditions. But you will also find everywhere and this is something new many intimate connections with places far away: Washington, Moscow, Mexico City, Beijing. Across the street from us, when we were growing up, there was a large house occupied by a number of families, among them a vast family of boys; one, about my age, was a good friend. He lives in London. His brother lives in Japan, where his wife is from. They have another brother who has been in Spain for a while and a couple more brothers who, last I heard, were in the United States. Some of them still live in Kumasi, one or two in Accra, Ghanas capital. Eddie, who lives in Japan, speaks his wifes language now. He has to. But he was never very comfortable in English, the language of our government and our schools. When he phones me from time to time, he prefers to speak Asante-Twi.
Return to top
Centre of power
Over the years, the royal palace buildings in Kumasi have expanded. When I was a child, we used to visit the previous king, my great-uncle by marriage, in a small building that the British had allowed his predecessor to build when he returned from exile in the Seychelles to a restored but diminished Asante kingship. It is now a museum, dwarfed by the enormous house next door built by his successor, my uncle by marriage where the current king lives. Next to it is the suite of offices abutting the veranda where we were sitting, recently finished by the present king, my uncles successor. The British, my mothers people, conquered Asante at the turn of the 20th century; now, at the turn of the 21st, the palace feels as it must have felt in the 19th century: a centre of power. The president of Ghana comes from this world, too. He was born across the street from the palace to a member of the royal Oyoko clan. But he belongs to other worlds as well: he went to Oxford; hes a member of one of the Inns of Court in London; hes a Catholic, with a picture in his sitting room of himself greeting the pope.
What are we to make of this? On Kumasis Wednesday festival day, Ive seen visitors from England and the United States wince at what they regarded as the intrusion of modernity on timeless, traditional rituals more evidence, they think, of a pressure in the modern world towards uniformity. They react like the assistant on the film set whos supposed to check that the extras in a sword-and-sandals movie arent wearing wristwatches. And such pursuits are not alone. In the past couple of years, UNESCOs members have spent a great deal of time trying to hammer out a convention on the protection and promotion of cultural diversity. (It was finally approved at the UNESCO General Conference in October 2005.) The drafters worried that the processes of globalisation represent a challenge for cultural diversity, namely in view of risks of imbalances between rich and poor countries. The fear is that the values and images of western mass culture, like some invasive weed, are threatening to choke out the worlds native flora.
The contradictions in this argument arent hard to find. This same UNESCO document is careful to affirm the importance of the free flow of ideas, the freedom of thought and expression and human rights values that, we know, will become universal only if we make them so. Whats really important, then, cultures or people? In a world where Kumasi and New York and Cairo and Leeds and Istanbul are being drawn ever closer together, an ethics of globalisation has proved elusive.
The right approach, I think, starts by taking individuals not nations, tribes or people as the proper object of moral concern. It doesnt much matter what we call such a creed, but in homage to Diogenes, the fourth-century Greek Cynic and the first philosopher to call himself a citizen of the world, we could call it cosmopolitan. Cosmopolitans take cultural difference seriously, because they take choices individuals make seriously. But because difference is not the only thing that concerns them, they suspect that many of globalisations cultural critics are aiming at the wrong targets.
Yes, globalisation can produce homogeneity. But globalisation is also a threat to homogeneity. You can see this as clearly in Kumasi as anywhere. One thing Kumasi isnt simply because its a city is homogeneous. English, German, Chinese, Syrian, Lebanese, Burkinabe, Ivorian, Nigerian, Indian: I can find you families of each description. I can find you Asante people, whose ancestors have lived in this town for centuries, but also Hausa households that have been around for centuries, too. There are people there from every region of the country as well, speaking scores of languages.
But if you travel just a little way outside Kumasi 20 miles, say, in the right direction and if you drive off the main road down one of the many potholed side roads of red laterite, you wont have difficulty finding villages that are fairly monocultural. The people have mostly been to Kumasi and seen the big, polyglot, diverse world of the city. Where they live, though, there is one everyday language (aside from the English in the government schools) and an agrarian way of life based on some old crops, like yams, and some newer ones, like cocoa, which arrived late in the 19th century as a product for export. They may or may not have electricity. (This close to Kumasi, they probably do.)
Return to top
The long arm of commercialism
When people talk of the homogeneity produced by globalisation, what they are talking about is this: even here, the villagers will have radios (though the language will be local); you will be able to find a bottle of Guinness or Coca-Cola (as well as of Star or Club, Ghanas own fine lagers). But has access to these things made the place more homogeneous or less? And what can you tell about peoples souls from the fact that they drink Coca-Cola?
Its true that the enclaves of homogeneity you find these days in Asante as in Pennsylvania are less distinctive that they were a century ago, but mostly in good ways. More of them have access to effective medicines. More of them have access to clean drinking water, and more of them have schools. Where, as is still too common, they dont have these things, its something not to celebrate but to deplore. And whatever loss of difference there has been, they are constantly inventing new forms of difference: new hairstyles, new slang, even, from time to time, new religions. No one could say that the worlds villagers are becoming anything like the same.
So why do people in these places sometimes feel that their identities are threatened? Because the world, their world, is changing, and some of them dont like it. The pull of the global economy witness those cocoa trees, whose chocolate is eaten all around the world created some of the life they now live. If chocolate prices were to collapse again, as they did in the early 1990s, Asante farmers might have to find new crops or new forms of livelihood. That prospect is unsettling for some people (just as it is exciting for others). Missionaries came a while ago, so many of these villagers will be Christian, even if they have also kept some of the rites from earlier days. But new Pentecostal messengers are challenging the churches they know and condemning the old rites as idolatrous. Again, some like it; some dont.
Above all, relationships are changing. When my father was young, a man in a village would farm some land that a chief had granted him, and his maternal clan (including his younger brothers) would work it with him. When a new house needed building, he would organise it. He would also make sure his dependants were fed and clothed, the children educated, marriages and funerals arranged and paid for. He could expect to pass the farm and the responsibilities along to the next generation.
Return to top
Changing times
Nowadays, everything is different. Cocoa prices have not kept pace with the cost of living. Gas prices have made the transportation of the crop more expensive. And there are new possibilities for the young in the towns, in other parts of the country and in other parts of the world. Once, perhaps, you could have commanded the young ones to stay. Now they have the right to leave perhaps to seek work at one of the new data-processing centres down south in the nations capital and, anyway, you may not make enough to feed and clothe and educate them all. So the time of the successful farming family is passing, and those who were settled in that way of life are as sad to see it go as American family farmers whose lands are accumulated by giant agribusinesses. We can sympathise with them. But we cannot afford to subsidise indefinitely thousands of distinct islands of homogeneity that no longer make economic sense. Nor should we want to.
Human variety matters, cosmopolitans think, because people are entitled to options. What John Stuart Mill said over a century ago in On Liberty about diversity within a society serves just as well as an argument for variety across the globe: If it were only that people have diversities of taste, that is reason enough for not attempting to shape them all after one model. But different persons also require different conditions for their spiritual development; and can no more exist healthily in the same moral, than all the variety of plants can exist in the same physical, atmosphere and climate. The same things which are helps to one person towards the cultivation of his higher nature, are hindrances to another Unless there is a corresponding diversity in their modes of life, they neither obtain their fair share of happiness, nor grow up to the mental, moral and aesthetic stature of which their nature is capable. If we want to preserve a wide range of human conditions because it allows free people the best chance to make their own lives, we cant enforce diversity by trapping people within differences they long to escape.
Even if you grant that people shouldnt be compelled to sustain the older cultural practices, you might suppose that cosmopolitans should side with those who are busy around the world preserving culture and resisting cultural imperialism. Yet behind these slogans you often find some curious assumptions. Take preserving culture. Its one thing to help people sustain arts they want to sustain. I am all for festivals of Welsh bards in Llandudno financed by the Welsh arts council. Long live the Ghana National Cultural Centre in Kumasi, where you can go and learn traditional Akan dancing and drumming, especially since its classes are overflowing. Restore the deteriorating film stock of early Hollywood movies; continue the preservation of Old Norse and early Chinese and Ethiopian manuscripts; record, transcribe and analyse the oral narratives of Malay and Masai and Maori. All these are undeniably valuable.
Return to top
A question of authenticity
But preserving culture in the sense of such cultural artefacts is different from preserving cultures. And the cultural preservationists often pursue the latter, trying to ensure that the Huli of Papua New Guinea (or even Sikhs in Toronto) maintain their authentic ways. What makes a cultural expression authentic, though? Are we to stop the importation of baseball caps into Vietnam so that the Zao will continue to wear their colourful red headdresses? Why not ask the Zao? Shouldnt the choice be theirs?
They have no real choice, the cultural preservationists say. Weve dumped cheap Western clothes into their markets, and they can no longer afford the silk they used to wear. If they had what they really wanted, theyd still be dressed traditionally. But this is no longer an argument about authenticity. The claim is that they cant afford to do something that theyd really like to do, something that is expressive of an identity they care about and want to sustain. This is a genuine problem, one that afflicts people in many communities: theyre too poor to live the life they want to lead. But if they do get richer, and they still run around in T-shirts, thats their choice. Talk of authenticity now is just telling other people what they ought to value in their own traditions.
Not that this is likely to be a problem in the real world. People who can afford it mostly like to put on traditional garb at least from time to time. I was best man once at a Scottish wedding, at which the bridegroom wore a kilt and I wore kente cloth. Andrew Oransay, the islander who piped us up the aisle, whispered in my ear at one point, Here we all are then, in our tribal gear. In Kumasi, people who can afford them love to put on their kente cloths, especially the most traditional ones, woven in colourful silk strips in the town of Bonwire, as they have been for a couple of centuries. (The prices are high in part because demand outside Asante has risen. A fine kente for a man now costs more than the average Ghanaian earns in a year. Is that bad? Not for the people of Bonwire.) Besides, trying to find some primordially authentic culture can be like peeling an onion.
The textiles most people think of as traditional West African cloths are known as Java prints; they arrived in the 19th century with the Javanese batiks sold, and often milled, by the Dutch. The traditional garb of Herero women in Nambia derives from the attire of 19th-century German missionaries, though it is still unmistakably Herero, not least because the fabrics used have a distinctly un-Lutheran range of colours. And so with our kente cloth: the silk was always imported, traded by Europeans, produced in Asia. This tradition was once an innovation. Should we reject it for that reason as untraditional? How far back must one go? Should we condemn the young men and women of the University of Science and Technology, a few miles outside Kumasi, who wear European-style gowns for graduation, lined with strips? Cultures are made of continuities and changes, and the identity of a society can survive through these changes. Societies without change arent authentic; theyre just dead.
Kwame Anthony Appiah 2005. Cosmopolitanism by Kwame Anthony Appiah is published by Allen Lane and will be released in August 2006
Return to top
Project information
Arts & Ecology is a programme supporting the work of the arts in examining and addressing environmental concerns in an international arena. It explores the current practice of artists, writers, architects and film-makers through a series of conferences, publications and projects, which look at local and global projects that attempt to communicate, challenge and sometimes propose solutions to pollution, waste and loss of natural habitats.
For up-to-date information about RSA Arts & Ecology, please visit www.theRSA.org/arts
Would you like to have a personal stake in this project? To discuss
a financial contribution to RSA Arts & Ecology, please email investinthefuture@rsa.org.uk
http://www.rsa.org.uk/journal/article.asp?articleID=719
Posted at 3:14 PM · Comments (0)
CHINA: Warning to lawyers handling protest suits
May 20, 2006 12:24 PM
New rules from government-controlled All-China Lawyers Association demand
awyers to be wary of foreign media contact
Copyright The South China Morning Post
Friday, May 19, 2006
Beijing —- Mainland officials have announced curbs on lawyers who
represent protesters and warned them to beware of contact with foreign
organisations and media.
The All-China Lawyers Association, a government-controlled body that
regulates the profession, issued a “Guiding Opinion on Lawyers Handling
Mass Cases”.
The rules demand that lawyers who take on “mass” cases brought by
protesters and other groups of 10 or more should report the cases to
the
association and “accept the monitoring and guidance of the judicial
administration agencies”.
The association said the rules were needed to ensure that sensitive
disputes did not threaten social stability.
“Mass cases often involve complex social, economic and political causes
and have a varied impact on the state and society that cannot be
ignored,”
said the rules posted on the association’s website,
www.chineselawyer.com.cn.
“Therefore, there is a need to regulate and guide lawyers who handle
mass
cases.”
Early this year, the Ministry of Public Security said there had been
87,000 protests, demonstrations and other “public-order disturbances”
last
year, a rise of 6.6 per cent on 2004.
Growing numbers of aggrieved citizens had raised their claims in court,
helped by a small but growing band of full-time rights campaigners,
said
Xu Zhiyong , a Beijing law professor who often represents citizens
suing
government officials and police.
“This imposes a new obligation on lawyers to report these cases, and
that
may attract problems and pressure,” he said of the rules.
The new rules also warn lawyers not to help organise or participate in
mass petitions to government and Communist Party offices, and warn
against
contact with foreign organisations and media. They must show a “high
level
of social responsibility”.
Posted at 12:24 PM · Comments (0)
Howell Raines, Press Critic: A very fishy memoir.
May 19, 2006 7:23 PM
May 18, 2006 - Copyright Slate
How wretched a newspaper was the New York Times when Howell Raines assumed the executive editor job in September 2001?
In his new memoir, The One That Got Away, which combines fish stories with newspaper recollection, he claims that the Times had been stinking up the joint since March 13, 1978. That’s the first full day he spent in the Times newsroom, when he noticed its “habit of cruising through critical intersections on automatic pilot.”
The Times was a “newspaper that liked to wear its dullness like a merit badge” doing “much of its journalism by the numbers.” On some stories it revealed itself to be a “churning urn of underachievement.” It possessed a “collective, institutional willingness to stand around and get scooped.” It was “dull but worthy … slow, tedious and self-important.” Its “stolid pace” frustrated him; it was “selling an ossified product over and over again to the same people.”
Continue Article
Establishing himself as the Sen. Joseph McCarthy of press criticism, Raines names no underperforming reporters or dimwitted editors in his sweeping critique of the Times. He cites no specific dull, tedious, or ossified coverage in the underperforming paper. He scalds “brainless bloggers,” too, but doesn’t name any. He only gets specific about the various species of fish he’s stalked, tortured, slaughtered, and eaten on four continents and a few oceans: salmon, sailfish, snapper, bonefish, marlin, crappies, sunfish, striped bass, bluegill, pickerel, walleye, catfish, carp, shad, and brook, brown, and rainbow trout, among others.
Raines blames “militant traditionalists” and “lifers” inside the Timesalso unnamedfor preventing the paper from achieving its potential: They “didn’t want to see the old hulk change its heading by so much as a single degree.” A “heretic minority” of “subversives,” of whom Raines is the only one named, opposed the lifers and were “salted away on all the [Times] building’s fifteen floors, a kind of secret society.”
I haven’t observed this kind of self-service up close since the last time I pumped my own gas.
Raines is right to describe the Times of 1978 as full of itself. No broadsheet had competed with it on its home turf since the Herald Tribune had collapsed a decade before, and no Spy magazine had emerged to lampoon the bullying swagger of its Politburo, which by then included Raines. Under the leadership of Raines’ immediate predecessors Max Frankel and Joseph Lelyveld, and facing growing competitive pressure as it became more of a national publication, the Times would become much more lively and aggressive. But Raines won’t acknowledge these changes, because to do so would undermine his self-portrait as Times savior. Saving the Times required “courtship”his word, not mineof Times Publisher Arthur O. Sulzberger Jr., who was scheduled to pick a new executive editor for the paper in 2001. “What I had to make Arthur see was that the Times was like a eutrophic lake,” he writes. That’s Rainespeak for starved of oxygen, filling with silt, and degenerating into a wetland.
Although Raines compares the Times to a stagnant pond, he also finds it “the best newspaper in the country without really trying.” His desire was to close the “big gap between being a great newspaper and simply being the best in comparison with competing rags.” And he had a plan to reverse the Times’ sclerosis, or at least he claims to have had a plan. As with his reluctance to name the foes of excellence at the Times, he never charts his “vision”his word, not minefor the big muddy on West 43rd Street.
The Daily Howell would be “more vibrant and more stimulating intellectually” than the regular Times as it pursued the “quality-information audience.” He writes,
We would move from being a national to being an international news organization, riding the formidable, if time-limited revenues from printed papers in the United States and Europe to spread across broadcast, cable and digital “platforms” for the delivery of news and quality information.
He would leverage the “talented tenth” at the Times to lift the whole paper. “Then you would have a paper with the Times’ traditional steadiness, but it would also have the intellectual depth, vivacity, cultural acuity, wit and analytical assertiveness of its smartest journalists and its smartest readers.”
That’s a plan? If Sulzberger awarded Raines the executive editorship on the strength of this fish story, he’s a dunce.
Every paper can benefit from a shake-up from time to time, even the paper Raines inherited from Lelyveld. But the shallow paper Raines describes is a hallucination. The Times had just come off a very long news marchthe Clinton impeachment followed by the Florida recountas Raines prepared himself for the cockpit. Then, the dull and ossified and somewhat fatigued team that Lelyveld assembled distinguished itself by winning seven Pulitzer Prizes for its 9/11 coverage under Raines’ leadership. The prizes really belong to the institution and the individuals: As many Pulitzers would have been won if Sulzberger had elevated a hamster.
How did Raines distinguish himself in his 20 months as ex-ed? Everybody acknowledges that he improved photography, but the other tangibles from his tenureputting Britney Spears and Lisa “Left Eye” Lopes on Page One, turning the paper into a laughingstock by hounding the Augusta National Golf Club, advocating saturation college football as a means of resurrecting the sports sectiondon’t match the braggadocio contained in this book.
The biggest test of Raines’ 20 months was the going-to-war-in-Iraq story, which he botched and ignores in his book. Talk about the one that got away! Editor & Publisher’s Greg Mitchell pounds the Raines memoir for neglecting the Judith Miller and WMD controversies. Raines still imagines that the plagiarism and fabulisms of the “dwarf” Jayson Blair brought him down.
Raines would have his readers believe that the narrow window for his Times world-domination plan may have already closed. He writes:
We had a chance to stabilize and expand the literate, affluent minority that makes up the quality-information marketplace. Now we may be seeing a coarsening of our society’s information tastes that is reducing the audience for impartial news and acute analysis. Our strategy for growing and protecting the Times franchise was built around delivering high-quality, fact-based information and analysis, around news that is found out rather than imagined. Now, the United States is moving toward a journalism of assertion and allegation, if indeed we dare call it journalism. [Emphasis added.]
If we are moving toward a journalism of assertion and allegation, this slim book stands as a monument to the form.
How much of the crap sluicing through this book does Raines really believe? All, I’m afraid. In Chapter 33 he boasts of possessing a “high regard for factual and moral truth,” even in memos to the staff, the implied conclusion being that inferior forces at the newspaperthe dullards, lifers, and militant traditionalists whom he threatenedtoppled him for speaking straight.
That’s not even his biggest lie. Scarcely a chapter passes without Raines reminding readers that he’s a literary man trapped in a journalist’s body, and has been for four decades. There are two tribes in newsrooms, he states, those who regard newspapers as a life destination and those, like him, “who rose at dawn to work on the Book, a big-canvas novel or non-fiction epic with which we could buy our freedom.” He claims to have made “serious escape attempts” from the newsroom for the literary life in 1969, 1974, and 1977when he published his novel Whiskey Man to good noticesand again in 1984, but family responsibilities pulled him back.
Bosh. The genuine literary man will sacrifice his wife, children, nephews, cousins, and your husband, children, nephews, and cousins if he has a big book to write. While betraying them, the genuine literary man will gladly stick his fingers into his wounds and open them larger if need be to document his pain. Like the bore who goes on and on about the Great American Novel he’s writing at his 10th, 15th, and 20th college reunion, Raines is in it but not of it. If he were of it, The One That Got Away would tell us something we don’t already know about Howell Raines and the New York Times.
******
Raines writes, correctly, that William Safire’s Political Dictionary (1993) credits him with coining the now-hackneyed phrase “defining moment.” When The One That Got Away goes into paperbackand Safire’s publisher reprints Political Dictionaryboth books should correct the record. The online version of the Oxford English Dictionary now bestows coinage honors upon a 1978 article in the Journal of Modern History: “There has also been a quickening of interest in the ‘event’: the defining moment that reveals the complex interrelationships between ideas and institutions, structural constraints and intellectual possibilities.” Send news of your defining moment to slate.pressbox@gmail.com. (E-mail may be quoted by name unless the writer stipulates otherwise.)
Jack Shafer is Slate’s editor at large.
Photograph courtesy the author.
http://www.slate.com/id/2141967/
Posted at 7:23 PM · Comments (0)
China’s Symbol, and Source, of Power: Three Gorges Dam Nears Completion, at High Human Cost
May 19, 2006 1:54 AM
Copyright The Washington Post
THREE GORGES DAM, China, May 17 — After 13 years of breakneck
construction that displaced more than a million villagers, China is
about to pour the final concrete on an enormous dam across the mighty
Yangtze River, seeking to tame the flood-prone waterway that has
nurtured and tormented the Chinese people for 5,000 years.
Engineers, many of whom have spent their entire careers on the site,
will gather on Saturday for a ceremony to mark their achievement: The
dun-colored barrier at last has reached its full height of 606 feet and
stretches 7,575 feet across the Yangtze’s murky green waters in the
Three Gorges area of central China’s Hubei province, 600 miles
southwest
of Beijing.
The Three Gorges Project, with 25,000 workers and a budget of $24
billion, is China’s most ambitious engineering undertaking since the
Great Wall. It has replaced Brazil’s Itaipu Dam as the world’s largest
hydroelectric and flood-control installation, Chinese officials said,
with the strength to hold back more water than Lake Superior and power
26 generators to churn out 85 billion kilowatt-hours of electricity a
year when the final touches are completed in 2008. Hoover Dam on the
Nevada-Arizona border, by comparison, generates more than 4 billion
kilowatt-hours a year.
“This is the grandest project the Chinese people have undertaken in
thousands of years,” said Li Yong’an, general manager of the
government’s Three Gorges corporation, which runs the project under the
direct leadership of Premier Wen Jiabao.
In its scope and ambition — as well as its human costs — the Three
Gorges Project has become a symbol of China’s relentless energy and
determination to take its place among the world’s great economic
powers.
At the same time, the project has demonstrated the Communist Party’s
willingness to sacrifice individual rights for the country’s general
welfare and to take high-stake risks in the name of progress.
The Chinese have long dreamed of a dam across the Yangtze to alleviate
flooding and facilitate navigation. Sun Yat-sen, revered as the founder
of the Chinese republic, urged construction of a dam as early as 1918.
U.S. engineers suggested one right after World War II. Mao Zedong,
whose
Communist Party took over in 1949, wrote seven years later that “walls
of stone” should rise from the river.
It was left to the present-day Communist leadership, dominated by
engineers and driven to build, to put the project into motion. Li Peng,
a former waterworks official, got the project off the ground in the
late
1980s when he was premier. The first earth was turned in 1993 under the
president at the time, Jiang Zemin, a Soviet-educated engineer. The
dam’s completion is now being celebrated under President Hu Jintao, who
was trained as a hydraulic engineer and has adopted “scientific
development” as a mantra.
But critics of the project — they are many, in China and abroad —
have
questioned whether building a giant dam is really scientific in the
21st
century, when the United States and other nations are weighing the
wisdom of damming their rivers. Despite the $24 billion price tag, they
note, the Three Gorges Dam will produce only 2 percent of China’s
electricity by 2010. Moreover, environmentalists have warned that the
backup of water behind the dam could end up as a giant waste-collection
pool for Chongqing, China’s largest urban conglomeration about 250
miles
upstream.
“There are two sides to everything, and the Three Gorges Project is no
exception,” said Cao Guangjing, the building company’s deputy manager.
“But many studies, undertaken since the beginning, have shown that the
advantages outweigh the disadvantages.”
The government has set aside $5 billion to build sewage treatment
plants
around Chongqing and other upstream cities to prevent the river from
turning into a cesspool, officials pointed out. Tests so far show that
the water quality has not suffered, even though water has been backing
up for several years, they said.
“Look at that,” Feng Zhengpeng, head of hydroelectrics, told reporters
walking atop the dam Wednesday as he gestured toward the river far
below. “Do you think my water looks dirty?”
Li Yong’an, the dam-building company’s manager, said that despite its
difficulties, the project is running ahead of schedule and will solve
“one of the Chinese people’s most important afflictions,” the flooding
that has ravaged the Yangtze basin for centuries. Floods killed more
than 145,000 in 1931, according to Chinese records, and another 142,000
four years later. As late as 1998, with the dam under construction,
more
than 2,000 were reported killed by river waters that spilled over the
banks.
Now, said deputy director Cao, engineers will be able to control the
flow of water during the peak flooding months of summer, letting it
back
up in a huge basin that will reach as far as 385 miles upstream.
To make way for the impounded water, which has risen to more than 400
feet above its natural level, at least 1,200 villages and two towns had
to be moved. Displaced residents already total about 1.1 million,
according to a government count. Wen, who heads the government’s
Committee for Construction of the Three Gorges Project, last week
authorized a further rise to 470 feet next fall, which will displace
another 80,000.
Zigui, a community of 60,000 people, baked under a warm sun Wednesday
several thousand feet away from its former location — now underwater.
The village of Zhongbao, whose inhabitants once prospered growing
oranges by the riverside, also was submerged, reduced to a reflection
on
the river’s surface just under the dam. One city farther upstream,
Fengjie, was rebuilt about 10 miles inland from its traditional
riverside location, only to be moved again nearby when engineers
discovered the new site was unstable.
“The displaced people problem is a big one,” acknowledged Li, the
manager, “and ultimately our ability to deal with it will determine
whether the Three Gorges Project is successful or not.”
Li said Wen’s government had guaranteed that all those displaced would
be compensated and provided new houses and livelihoods. But many
displaced families have complained from the beginning that their
compensation was siphoned off by corrupt local officials and that they
cannot make a living in their new locations.
The state audit office reported as early as 1999 that millions of
dollars in compensation funds were being embezzled. Scores of officials
were investigated and many prosecuted, according to the official New
China News Agency. But the complaints have not stopped.
Chen Qun, a disgruntled Zhongbao villager, said Wednesday that his
community’s 2,000 residents were promised $450 each when they had to
pack and leave in 1993. So far, he said, they have received only a
third
of that amount and corrupt local officials have pocketed the rest.
When they heard that foreign reporters were about to visit the dam,
Chen
said, several villagers put up banners urging Beijing to “Punish the
corrupt officials” and “Give us back our space for survival.” But
police
jailed the activists for several hours Monday and tore down the
banners,
he said.
? 2006 The Washington Post Company
Posted at 1:54 AM · Comments (0)
Howell Raines: Life After the Times
May 19, 2006 1:45 AM
Copyright Forbes
05.17.06,
Howell Raines, veteran editor and correspondent for The New York Times, who served for 21 months as executive editor before losing his job in the wake of the Jayson Blair plagiarism scandal, has retired to rural Pennsylvania to resume his two beloved pastimes—writing and fly-fishing, both of which he chronicles in a new book, The One That Got Away: A Memoir. Recently, he sat down with the Forbes.com Video Network for a conversation about the media, life and fly-fishing. The following is a transcript of that interview.
Forbes.com: What’s your day like these days?
Raines: Well, as you know, I was hooked to the deadline of a daily newspaper for something like 40 years. My life is very different now. If I’m working on a book, I like to work from 8 a.m. to noon, or some four-hour window. If I’m finished with a project, my typical day now is my wife and I get up, make tea and coffee, sit overlooking the Pennsylvania mountains and read whatever comes to mind, and it is very seldom a newspaper or a newsmagazine—more typically novels, or, since I’m working on a Civil War novel, I read a lot of Civil War history these days.
The trout season has started. Aren’t you up at dawn and out on the river?
Actually, my brother from Alabama, my older brother, comes up for a month every spring, so we took the entire month of April and fished every day that the weather and our aching bodies would allow.
Why would a man who can write such an extraordinary book and catch such extraordinary fish all over the world want to be executive editor of The New York Times?
It took me about 300 pages to understand that myself, and I hope one of the things that comes through here is that I have had two great loves in my life in terms of career. The first was I wanted to be a novelist, like many people who grew up in the era of Hemingway and Fitzgerald and Faulkner. And then I was exposed to newspapering at the age of 21, and I found the world of the newsroom absolutely magical. So I think I love newspapering with the second chamber of my heart, let us say, and I developed a really strong feeling about the role of the press in a democracy, which I think is central to our system and our society.
What this book is about in a sense is that in getting fired from The New York Times, I had the rarest opportunity that could come to a person late in middle life, and that is to go back and take the road not taken. I had some offers to go back into journalism. The Washington Post and the L.A. Times both generously invited me to talk with them about doing a column, and I decided I had done newspapering and that I would try to return to my original ambition of being a literary writer.
Watch this interview with Howell Raines:
Part I: Swimming Upstream
Part II: Writing On The Wall
What does fly-fishing do for you that running a daily newspaper doesn’t?
I think all of the above, in a sense, and I liken it to other what I call nonessential passions that we have—golf, for example, horseback riding, neither of which are to my taste. But fly-fishing is, and I think I get from it what devotees of these other outdoor activities get: It is a way of being in emotional and physical contact with the natural world. And particularly those of us who have spent so much of our lives in cities, it is a deeply relaxing feeling.
So it gives you a feeling of equilibrium in a sense?
Yes, I think so.
So does that carry over to the rest of life? Into your dealings with your wife or friends or colleagues. Does it add a base inside you somewhere?
I hope so. It certainly has carried over into my marriage. My wife, Krystina, was not a fisherperson when we met, and she’s become quite expert. And having been a fencer in high school, she turns out to have this natural hand-eye coordination, which is quite magical.
But one of the nice things about retirement—it’s a working retirement, but I took to it like a duck to water. Because not only do I have time to read and write exactly what I want to, but I have time to be a husband, a fisherman, a doting grandfather and all those things that, by necessity when we’re pursuing active careers, you have to squeeze down.
Do you remember the first fish you ever caught?
My brother says I don’t because he says I started catching them at 3, but I definitely remember the 20 fish that changed my life. I caught a limit of crappies, or croppies as we call them down South, on the Tennessee River when I was age 7, playing hooky from school with my parents, and I was never fit for anything again.
It did shape your life?
How did it come to be such an important thing in my life? I think one thing is my father was an outdoorsman, both a hunter and a fisherman, and for a small boy to be taken into the world of men, and it was essentially a masculine world in those days, was very important. As it happened in my family also, my mother was an ardent fisherperson, so she and I fished quite a bit together when I was in high school and college. So initially it was a way of a family being together.
You mentioned your father. Some of the things about him in the book are quite moving. He was a businessman, but you said a life lived for business does not matter. Do you still believe there is a good reason for not being a businessman?
There is a transition in my life that is covered in the book. I grew up in a family business. My father and his two brothers started out as carpenters and became successful contractors, and I was around business all my life. I worked summers starting at age 15. I was in my 20s sometimes running construction crews. And I just had a feeling that business wouldn’t fulfill what I wanted, and I think it’s because I was early hooked on the writing thing.
That said, I did a very interesting thing for me. The Times sent me to Dartmouth to do one of those M.B.A. programs in a month, you know—I call it an M.B.A. in a nitroglycerin tablet. And I began reading economics and business news with quite a sophistication, frankly. And the other thing that happened: Because I was in an industry that clearly was in a business crisis, I came to feel very strongly that we needed to improve the Times in some specific ways in order to prolong its life as a viable business.
Do you think the time for the Times has passed? You look at the Times lately, it’s under attack by Wall Street for its stock price and everything else. You devised a strategy, though, “which worked at the time we devised it,” was one thing you said. Has it stopped working now?
I can’t say that. And I want to say one reason I became passionate on this issue is that I think the Times is an irreplaceable national institution, and I want to see it prosper in every way. At the time that I was there, Arthur Sulzberger and I and a core group of executives had a strategy for trying to use the revenues, considerable revenues but time-limited revenues from the print paper, to move into digital and broadcast and other areas of publishing, and we were going to go international.
Thats why Arthur bought the International Herald Tribune. That was the right strategy for that time. I assume these are serious, smart people there, but I haven’t been in the inner sanctum in three years, so I hope and assume they have a good strategy. I don’t think the one we had at that moment is right for this moment. You have to adjust.
Your attempt to evolve this newspaper seems to have come to a sort of stasis. Since you left, there have been none of the changes that occurred at the time you were there, or even when Abe Rosenthal was making his changes in the ’70s. Does this paper still need a makeover of the kind you completed?
I think what you have to look at in a business sense in a newspaper of the traditional sort are two sets of numbers that I think are important. If your circulation has been basically flat for 20 or 25 years and your stock price has decreased by 50% in the last two or three years, I think youve got to look at those numbers and see what they mean. And I think they mean you have to make significant changes in the quality of what you do in order to drive circulation and eventually follow that circulation into other media outlets.
I don’t want to say and I dont have the basis of saying that the Times is in a state of stasis, because frankly I don’t read it every day any more. I follow the news situationally now. I read the Journal, I read the Financial Times, I read USA Today, which I think is a very interesting publication in its own way. And I read the Times sort of interchangeably. But I think I would have to follow the paper every day and every way to really make a sweeping judgment.
More…
What about the economics of the media industry? When I started in the media industry, there were five TV stations in New York, there were six newspapers. Now there are three or three and a half, yet there is a plurality of media out there, all competing for an advertising pie that hasn’t gotten that much bigger. Given these parameters, is it possible to produce a really quality newspaper anymore?
I think so. But I think that I come to the question from an interesting perspective. I started going to journalism seminars in the 1970s where the theme was always you’re in an industry that won’t be around in another ten years, and now I’ve retired and the horse is still running. So that is an overstatement.
But I think we’re obviously in a watershed period for print journalism. And I think just from the outside, figuring out how to make money in this multifaceted environment is the real challenge the business sides are gong to take. Because the old advertising model seems to be falling apart in many ways, and I’m not sure we’ve seen the future yet.
Do you think there are constructive things being done by corporate America these days?
Yes, obviously. The business of America is business. One of the things I touch on in this book is I am very concerned about corporate influence, unrestrained corporate influence in government. For a very specific reason: The American corporation as it has developed is a marvelous mechanism for what it’s designed to do, which is to make money. It is not, in my judgment, a marvelous mechanism for setting social policy. And I think the balance in Washington right now is out of kilter.
What would it take to get back into kilter, and what should it get back into kilter? Is the media the mechanism that can help it get back into kilter?
I doubt it, at this moment. I think this changes at different times. I think earlier in my career the media on the issues like civil rights, war and the environment was the critical factor. Right now, I think we need two parties that are smarter and better in a variety of ways. Reagan must be spinning in his grave when he sees these deficits. By the same token, the Democrats seem to me to be very flat right now. I think what we need as a nation is another leader on Reagan’s scale.
Do you think the media the way it is structured now is speaking to the young generation, under the age of 30? Is the American establishment, is the media establishment, speaking to people under the age of 30 who are more interested in watching TRL on MTV?
You have touched on one of my favorite things when I was still in the business, which was that what we needed was a younger readership. When people pass 35 or 40, you’re going to get them with articles about the Social Security trust fund. But when they’re under 35, you have to speak the language of style, culture, entertainment, and there’s been a kind of snobbery I think at the Times and other places built around the wrong ideas that you can’t really have highly intellectual writing and reporting about popular subjects. And I just simply disagree about that. To me, for example, the rise of the rap music industry was one of the most important business stories of the last decade of my time in newspapering.
Was it covered adequately by the Times?
I don’t think so. And I don’t fault anyone but myself perhaps for that. But what I thought was interesting and what I think we began to come to grips with—the story of rap music was not two guys shooting one another in the street and insulting each other’s mothers. The story of rap music was Sony and other multinational entertainment corporations trying to adapt to a new audience environment. And that was the story.
They did because they could take the words and music of rap music and put it on discs or on TV. But the Times has a certain tone that’s the same from the beginning of Section A all the way to the end. So how do you have that rap music tone in one section of the paper and not have it permeate into other sections of the paper, destroying that overall tone?
That’s not quite what I mean to be saying, David. A journalistic style as distinctive as the Times or let’s say The Wall Street Journal, can be used, I think, to take on any subject matter, and it’s not a case because youre writing about rap music you’ve changed your own language or your own style. That’s not what I mean to be saying.
What I think is very important now for newspapers is a general rise in quality through the sections. I wish I thought there was this consistency of excellence through every section of the Times or any other paper. My mantra when I was there was, we need to make every section of the paper as good every day as our best sections, let’s say our foreign report, on our best days. That’s a tall order. It’s an idealistic one, but that was the method for that moment to grow our circulation, I think.
You succeeded then. Are they succeeding now?
Well, I don’t think I succeeded then, driving the circulation very much in 21 months. I’m very proud of the fact that in the 21 months I was there, the work published by the Times won nine Pulitzers, seven in one year, a record I’m very proud of. The Times won three Pulitzers this year, which means they had a very good year.
And you know I don’t want to be in a position of being a lifelong commentator on The New York Times. I am talking about it more freely with you, frankly, because the sophistication of the environment here, I think there are important business and journalistic issues, but I have to tell you my real bottom line is, these are problems for the next generation of journalists and the news executives to figure out. I’m on a different journey now, and frankly it’s a very pleasant one.
So what’s next for Howell Raines?
Im under a two-book contract with Scribner, of which this is the first. The second is a Civil War novel, which I’ve been planning since my 20s, saving string, both in terms of folk tales from my native South and in terms of serious scholarly histories of the war. And reading other historical fiction like The Killer Angels or Gone With the Wind still holds up pretty well. I always in the back of my mind said I don’t want to write this book until I’m writing my very best. And then at age 63 you’re as good as you’re going to get, so if you’re going to climb that mountain, you’d better start up it.
So its an intimidating project. I’ve heard the Civil War compared to elephants’ attraction for American writers, or Moby Dick. It’s a big subject. After that I want to write a book about the civil rights era in the South. And frankly after that I’m thinking of writing a political novel set in Pennsylvania. Because my friend Jim Carville says in describing Pennsylvania politics—you’ve got Philadelphia and Pittsburgh and Alabama in between. So in a very unusual way, I’ve gone home again.
With your roots in Alabama, you feel at home in Pennsylvania?
There is a reason for that feeling of continuity, because the Scotch Irish came into Philadelphia. The Quakers had the notion they could make good farmers out of them. Once they got into Pennsylvania, they hit the Appalachian Trail and went all the way to Alabama. There is a cultural continuity in the Appalachian people that many know about. I was stunned to find out that Philadelphia was the major point of entry for Scotch Irish immigrants. And my family was one of those who had people in both [Civil War] armies.
Watch this interview with Howell Raines:
Part I: Swimming Upstream
Part II: Writing On The Wall
Back to first page
http://www.forbes.com/2006/05/17/howell-raines-media-qanda-cx_daa_0517raines_print.html
Posted at 1:45 AM · Comments (0)
Letter from China: A growing power lets a growing crisis fester
May 18, 2006 8:26 PM
Copyright The International Herald Tribune
Howard W. French The New York Times
WEDNESDAY, MAY 17, 2006
SHANGHAI With people dying by the thousands, it is more than painful to watch as the world moves with all deliberate speed in resolving Sudan’s Darfur crisis.
The United States has been in the forefront of efforts to stop the ethnic cleansing - termed genocide by Washington - but that has mostly been as a matter of default. In a vacuum, every little bit of substance stands out.
There was a bit more of this substance last week. President George W. Bush gave a speech that resonated with an appropriate sense of gravity.
“Moving forward, we cannot keep people healthy and fed without other countries standing up and doing their part as well,” Bush said, announcing a large increase in American relief efforts. “The European Union, and nations like Canada, the United Kingdom, the Netherlands and Japan have taken the leadership on other humanitarian issues, and the people of Darfur urgently need more of their help now.”
Question to Bush and to the people of the world’s fastest-growing major economy: Where was China?
In this rich and proud civilization, there is an aphorism for every occasion. And with China buying roughly 60 percent of Sudan’s oil production, accounting for about 7 percent of the country’s imports, a great one comes to mind: The big tree catches the breeze.
Would only that the people of this country, and especially their leaders, embrace it. This country is becoming a big tree on the world scene in a hurry, growing roots to feed its rapid growth that stretch far and wide. Where the world’s crises are concerned, however, China’s diplomacy and just as lamentably its public discourse are stuck in sapling mode.
This is not, mind you, the result of an immature mind. Rather, China’s bobbing and weaving its way around the world’s crises seems both deeply cynical and carefully thought out.
First, credit China for not using its Security Council veto this week to prevent a ratcheting of international pressure on the Sudanese government to cooperate with the United Nations as it prepares to take over peacekeeping in Darfur from a badly under-funded and ill-equipped African Union force.
The bigger picture, though, is not encouraging. Chinese policy toward Darfur is one of opportunism hiding behind rickety, wooden principles, principles with a self-satisfying resonance that have been repeated so often as to get people here believing them. China respects all other cultures. China believes in the peaceful resolution of crises. And most sacrosanct of all, given China’s preoccupation with its own domestic stability, China is against all interference in the internal affairs of other nations.
The history of the past century shows that a thirst for oil consistently leads big powers into unsavory places. And the early years of this new century show no sign of being any different - only that the big and thirsty new power is China, a country that is now racing to compete with a West that has accumulated decades of experience getting its hands dirty in the dark and unsavory corners of the world.
Just as the United States today is reaping the consequences of cynical or manipulative behavior in the past, in places like Iran and in parts of Latin America, China will be judged in the future based on the actions of today.
Just as decades of American rhetoric in favor of democracy and human rights are rightfully measured against actual behavior, helping determine the stock of the United States around the world, so will China’s smug adherence to hollow principles come to affect its standing in the world.
Today, China proclaims its all-but- undifferentiated friendship for all peoples, and regimes of all kinds, especially those with some hot commodity to sell, are rushing to reciprocate. But the interests of regimes and of the people they govern can be strikingly different, nowhere more so than in the so-called developing world, where China’s roots are growing fastest.
The questions of what China stands for and where its growing power and influence are to be found in the midst of crises like the one unfolding today in Sudan will eventually be asked by those people, if not by the regimes themselves.
These questions will linger and they will haunt China’s rise unless the people of this country and their leaders can invent for themselves a new kind of global citizenship.
This strikes me as the most profound implication of the U.S. deputy secretary of state Robert Zoellick’s now famous turn of phrase urging China to become a “stakeholder” in the international system.
Many Chinese have skeptically interpreted the American’s language to mean that Beijing should simply align itself with Washington’s positions on the major issues of the day, and all will be well. The Chinese wariness is understandable. But the blend of intellectual passivity and narrow, self- serving pragmatism that ends the discussion there helps neither China nor the world well.
China is free to invent its own culture of global responsibility. And so long as it starts from a recognition that there are real-world consequences to this country’s rise - both good and bad - and that a one- size-fits-all diplomatic approach doesn’t suit a world of deep moral complexity and man-made catastrophe, we will all be better off.
The present mode of pretending that China’s actions, such as almost single-handedly rehabilitating Sudan’s oil industry, selling it arms, and discouraging forceful United Nations measures - all amidst a bloodbath - won’t cut it.
Search as you might online, though, and you will be hard pressed to find any Chinese discussion of the moral, ethical or political implications of China’s involvement in Sudan.
The closest one comes to more than routine news on Sudan are essays saying that the policy of the West is driven by oil interests, and speculating that the United States seeks to take over the country by force.
Similarly, a week of digging around looking for Chinese analysts who could articulate a position even subtly different from the government’s on Sudan turned up nothing.
“I think that any suggestion that China takes its position because of economic considerations is wrong,” said Wang Hongyi, an Africa specialist in Beijing. “In its relationships, and not just with Sudan, but with all countries, China follows the Five Principles” of Peaceful Coexistence. “Even before the Darfur crisis, China took the same attitude toward Sudan, and encouraged active talks.”
Wang didn’t know it, but he stated the problem very well. The same policy is not required before and during a genocide. The urgent question, as China fills Sudanese coffers, is what China should be doing differently today.
Posted at 8:26 PM · Comments (0)
Next Wave of Camera-Wielding Tourists Is From China
May 18, 2006 1:23 AM
Copyright The New York Times
By HOWARD W. FRENCH
Published: May 17, 2006
BANGKOK The way it began, with a buffet laid out on deck and “Moon River” oozing from the loudspeakers, it could have been just about any Bangkok sundown cruise.
But this one was unmistakably different. Before the boat even left the dock the food disappeared, right down to the last slice of watermelon a Chinese favorite. Then the Western musical standards were quickly replaced with recent Chinese hits. And within minutes the passengers, all of whom were Chinese, were singing along.
Any doubts that this was a new day in Thai tourism were put aside as the ship set off down the Chao Phraya River under an exploding sunset. Every few minutes, when it encountered another boat laden with Chinese tourists and there were many the passengers hailed one another back and forth cheerfully, in their own language, of course.
For the first time in history, large numbers of Chinese are leaving their country as tourists, resulting in an unparalleled explosion in Chinese travel. If current projections are met, the global tourism industry will be undergoing a crash course in everything Chinese to accommodate the needs of what promises to be the greatest wave of international travelers ever.
As usual when something goes over big in China, the numbers are staggering. In 1995, only 4.5 million Chinese traveled overseas. By 2005 that figure had increased to 31 million, and if expectations for future growth are met or approached, even that gargantuan growth will be quickly dwarfed. Chinese and international travel industry experts forecast that at least 50 million Chinese tourists will travel overseas annually by 2010, and 100 million by 2020.
In 2004, the last year for which there is complete information, 61.7 million Americans traveled abroad.
“They are latecomers on the tourism scene, but they have come on in a big way,” said Xu Jing, the Madrid-based director of Asia and Pacific affairs at the World Tourism Organization, an agency of the United Nations. “The growth in Chinese outbound travel in the last five years has been the highest in the world in the range of 37 or 38 percent a year.”
The last nation to burst on the world travel scene with similar speed and force was Japan, which was enjoying an explosion of prosperity in the 1980’s. Suddenly Japanese could be seen everywhere, especially groups of middle-aged tourists wearing caps and brandishing the latest camera gear, and led, inevitably, by a Japanese tour guide hoisting a flag so that people would not get lost.
The industry responded by placing Japanese-style slippers and bathrobes in hotel rooms, along with Japanese-language television channels. Japanese-speaking staff members also became de rigueur at hotels and fashionable shops. All that for roughly 17 million overseas visits.
As recently as the late 1980’s, all but a select few Chinese were expressly forbidden to travel overseas. But by 2003, China’s overseas travelers had already surpassed Japan’s, placing the country squarely among the world’s leaders. Ultimately, travel experts say, the Chinese impact on world tourism stands to be even bigger.
The six most popular destinations for the Chinese are Japan, Vietnam, South Korea, Russia, Thailand and the United States. Already, patterns that took years to develop during the Japanese wave are falling rapidly into place in many of those countries, with hotels, restaurants, airports and shops beginning to cater to their needs with special Chinese-language services, bank A.T.M.’s and menus adapted to Chinese tastes.
As fast as this growth is, though, some in the Chinese travel industry warn that the world is not adapting fast enough. “China is the latest and greatest market, but if other countries don’t take cultural differences into account it will hinder our joint efforts to develop it,” said Wang Ping, president of the Chinese Chamber of Tourism Commerce.
Ms. Wang said that while Europe was adjusting rapidly to Chinese needs, North America was not, and hotels and other places frequented by tourists failed to provide Chinese-language aids, or food or something so simple as hot water in rooms for tea.
By no means is all of the adjustment on the side of the receiving nations. Chinese tourists have been fined heavily in France recently for arriving with counterfeit luxury goods, like fake Louis-Vuitton handbags.
In Shanghai and other cities, travel agencies post people at airports warning Chinese travelers about penalties for importing fakes and imparting advice on etiquette in the West. “Don’t pick teeth, touch your belt, pull at your pants or take off your shoes in public,” reads one common brochure. “Don’t point fingers at people you’re talking to, and don’t put your hands on others’ shoulders.”
The travel publishing industry, too, is racing to cater to the needs of huge waves of novice Chinese travelers, translating existing guides into the language or producing original material.
Next month Lonely Planet, a leader in the effort so far, will produce the first four of what it expects to be many Chinese-language guidebooks. The initial titles cover Germany, Britain, Europe and Australia, with guides covering the United States, Canada and Southeast Asia due soon afterward.
“In 1998, there wasn’t one travel guidebook,” said Cai Jinghui, the China representative for Lonely Planet. “Nowadays traveling abroad is very common, especially to Southeast Asia. For Chinese, going to Thailand is no different from going to Yunnan.”
More than a simple reflection of commercial opportunity, the appearance of Chinese-language guides from companies like Lonely Planet and Michelin reflects a shift in the makeup of the Chinese tourist population, which includes growing numbers of people of modest incomes who are going abroad for the first time.
Such travelers predominated on the Bangkok sundown cruise, where Zhou Jingjian, 51, a power company employee from Shandong Province on a company trip, confidently but misleadingly lectured his traveling colleagues on geography. “This river divides Thailand and Vietnam,” Mr. Zhou was heard to say. “That side is Vietnam. This side is Thailand.” The two countries are not adjacent.
Posted at 1:23 AM · Comments (0)
Portrait of Chirac as a great glutton who has lost his appetite for the fight
May 18, 2006 1:12 AM
May 05, 2006
Copyright The Times
President Chirac is beginning his last year in office beset by scandal, the collapse of his labour reforms and deepening Euroscepticism. The bestseller The President’s Tragedy breaks a taboo by exposing M Chirac’s private life, revealing the self-indulgence and physical decline that mark his 11 years in office. Here, we publish an extract
ON MAY 7, 1995, when Jacques Chirac was elected President of France, a wave of joy spread across Paris as the victor drove through the city in his old Citron CX.
M Chiracs supporters held a party in the Place de la Concorde, although the man himself went off on his own. He visited his friends, the millionaire businessman Franois Pinault and his wife, Mayvonne, and then he disappeared with his latest female conquest.
However, he emerged from the election a changed man. There was no jubilation on his face or in his voice as the 22nd President of the French Republic, in his first official speech, called for a vigorous, impartial, self-disciplined state that is careful about the use of public money a state that does not isolate those who govern from those who have elected them.
It is almost cruel to recall those words, given that Chirac has left the state exactly where he found it not vigorous, impartial or self-disciplined.
As he has aged he has turned into the personification of the decline of France and the powerlessness of the countrys authorities. His is a very French story, set against a background of bluster and U-turns.
M Chirac has never put his calls for a modest state into practice, at the Elyse Palace, where he lives and works, or anywhere else. He believes that one has to do what is right. For him, that means always consuming the best wine and the finest champagne. In the 11 years of his reign the budget of the Presidents office has increased from 3.3 million to 31.9 million (22 million).
He has lived for too long in a virtual world, far removed from reality. Since 1977, when he became Mayor of Paris, he has always been fed and housed like royalty although, with him, housed is a relative concept.
For years Jean-Claude Laumond, his chauffeur, would wait almost every evening to take him off in the Citron CX. From 8pm onwards you could contact M Chirac only through M Laumond, a cheerful character with a great, open laugh; an ace behind the steering wheel as he drove at breakneck speed through the capital.
The Presidents wife, Bernadette, hated M Laumond, and it is easy to understand why. The chauffeur and her husband made an odd couple and their conspiratorial ways left no doubt that they were off for a good time on their nocturnal rounds.
As soon as her husband became President, Mme Chirac launched a campaign to get rid of M Laumond. For two years she was unsuccessful. Then, in 1997, on the night that Diana, Princess of Wales, was killed in a car crash in the Alma tunnel in Paris, the Minister of the Interior could not reach the President on the telephone.
Mme Chirac blamed M Laumond. After this and other similar incidents, Mme Chirac won the backing of her daughter, Claude, and claimed the head of the man nicknamed the chauffeur of pleasures. M Laumond was banished.
Mme Chirac has hinted that she thought about leaving her husband at one stage. But she stayed with him because, she said, she had a good dose of determination, tenacity and perseverance.
Regarding her marriage to M Chirac, she said: My father told me, You are his centre point, and events have proved him right. My husband has always come back to his centre point. Anyway, Ive always warned him: the day that Napoleon left Josephine, he lost everything.
M Chirac is happy to confirm her thesis. We men are like the Cro-Magnon people of prehistoric times, he once told me. Were always hunting and wenching. But, at the end of the day, we always go back to our caves. For my part I need this cave to feel at ease with myself. Without it I would be as unhappy as could be. He cannot do without his wife. He calls her often, five or six times a day, sometimes more.
When he cannot reach her immediately, he wants her news from the secretary, the chauffeur or the attending police officer. Then he tells someone to fetch her. Wherever she is, she must answer him. M Chirac is an ogre who swallows everything gluttonously: men, women, ideas, kilometres, romances, defeats, scrapes and, of course, food.
He eats enough to feed the Indian Army, starting with a breakfast fit for a siege. But by 10.30am, he requires more sustenance.
So he has a snack of pt or cold meat sandwiches, complete with pickled gherkins. A four-course lunch follows, then more sandwiches for tea before, finally, a four-course dinner.
I have to feel full up, this great gullet said. That is why he particularly likes old-fashioned dishes, such as calfshead with ravigote sauce.
This is all washed down with five or six beers a day. As he does not mind punch, either, he sometimes has one too many. But he always sleeps it off with great dignity.
M Chirac believes that he is condemned to eat without stopping. When Im hungry, which happens several times a day, I become aggressive and even belligerent.
The tragedy of his presidency is that the brave hussar of the 1970s and the 1980s has developed into a placid character with no ambition other than to be liked. The head of state has adopted a policy of paternalistic, social conservatism and has never wavered from it. He wants to be the father of the nation and is determined not to cause anyone any trouble.
A few days after M Chiracs centre-right supporters had suffered an historic defeat in the 2004 regional elections, Franois Fillon, the Minister for Social Affairs, told him: If we were beaten … it is because we dont have a clear line and we seem to be making up policies from day to day.
M Chirac gave the minister an icy stare before delivering his traditional speech on the social fragility of France. Dont forget, he said. The unions can block everything at the drop of a hat.
It is impossible to persuade him otherwise, and that, perhaps, is M Chiracs greatest failing. The man who used to change with the wind is now stuck in a rut. When he has an idea, he cannot get it out of his head.
His rigidity can even be comical, as demonstrated by a story told by M Fillon about the aircraft carrier Charles de Gaulle, the pride of the French Navy.
Theres a problem, Jacques, M Fillon once said to M Chirac. The Charles de Gaulle was built on the cheap. It has a cruising speed of 27 knots, when our other aircraft carriers can reach 32 knots.
Thats wrong, M Chirac said. I ordered the Charles de Gaulle myself and I know it can go at 32 knots. M Fillon checked with the commander-in-chief of the Navy, who confirmed the maximum speed of 27 knots. He then informed the President.
We could have left it there, M Fillon said. But thats not like M Chirac. When we met, he grabbed my arm and said to me, Listen, the Charles de Gaulle will go at 32 knots … Theres no doubt about it. I know what commanders-in-chief are like. Theyre all liars.
After years of listening to discordant voices and retreating into his own clan, Chirac hears only what he wants to hear. The result is that he does not hear anything about anything.
He should have reformed the French social model, but he was happy to put it into deep freeze on the fallacious pretext that the whole world dreamt of having the same thing.
But why would the world be jealous of a system in which one person in ten has no work and one in five no training, where job insecurity runs alongside one of the highest unemployment rates of any developed country?
It is a social, economic and moral failure, but apparently it does not trouble the conscience or the digestion of the President. Through cowardice as much as blindness, he persists in following policies that have led the country to ruin over the past 20 years.
As his reign nears its end, M Chirac has few people around him. You can count his friends on one hand, as the number of guests invited to the birthday party his daughter organises for him demonstrates each year. You only ever find celebrities that he has bumped into at cocktails, with glass in hand, such as the singer Johnny Hallyday, the comic Muriel Robin, the entertainer Patrick Sbastien or the actress Michle Laroque.
If it were not for his grandson, Martin, whose drawings the President piles up on his desk at the Elyse, he would be devoid of family and friendship.
The Elyse is nothing more than a great empty palace, where the President is cut off from everything. Each meeting is a torture, and so is each outing.
M Chirac knows that he is scrutinised by everyone and, despite his attempts to camouflage his troubles, he cannot hide the mixture of lethargy and sadness that invaded his brain after he suffered a minor stroke last September. He struggles to find his words, so he is never separated from his crib sheets.
The President has finally realised that he is not immortal. For a long time he thought that he could always master the elements. He even claimed to have supernatural healing powers. One day, for example, he learnt that the wife of Xavier Darcos, who went on to become Overseas Co-operation Minister, had cancer. The President asked to see her alone for a quarter of an hour with her baby. After the meeting he told Darcos: I acquired from my father a gift that enables me to know whether people are in good health merely by shaking their hands. Your wife is saved.
That is M Chirac through and through: a believer, fatalistic and rustic. He is superstitious as well. He has spent his life doing everything in his power to help the sick, rushing to be by the bedside of the dying, kissing the dead on the forehead.
His own turn has come. He is waiting for it sadly, with legs that are shaking, not out of fear but out of tiredness at the end of such a long journey.
La Tragdie du Prsident: Scnes de la Vie Politique, 1986-2006, by Franz-Olivier Giesbert, is published by Flammarion
UPS AND DOWNS
1932 born November 29
1956 marries the blue-blooded Bernadette Chodron de Courcel
1956-1957 fights in the Algerian war of independence
1967 first ministerial post, Secretary of State for Employment
1974-76 and 1986-88 Prime Minister
1981 and 1988 beaten by Franois Mitterrand in presidential elections
1995 defeats the socialist Lionel Jospin to be elected President
1996 forced into humiliating U-turn over welfare reform
1997 loses much of his power after his centre-right camp is beaten when he calls a snap election
2002 overwhelmingly defeats Jean-Marie Le Pen, the National Front candidate, to be re-elected President
2003 popularity reaches record levels as he opposes the US and Britain over the war in Iraq
2004 powerless to stop Nicolas Sarkozy, his arch enemy, from gaining control of the political party that he had created, the Union for a Popular Movement
2005 suffers an embarrassing defeat in the French referendum on the European constitution and appoints Dominique de Villepin as Prime Minister
2006 ratings plummet after riots in the suburbs, demonstrations that force a U-turn over labour reform for young people, and M de Villepins alleged involvement in a spy scandal
HIGH JINKS IN OFFICE
1879 Jules Grvy resigned as President after scandal of his son-in-law charging for the Lgion d Honneur
1899 Flix Faure, left, died in the Elyse Palace in the arms of his mistress. The Presidents cause of death was recorded as overwork
1920 Paul Deschanel suffered behavioural difficulties. He signed legislation Napoleon and climbed out of the presidential train in his pyjamas
1979 President Giscard dEstaing was revealed to have received diamonds worth one million francs from Jean-Bedel Bokassa, the bloodthirsty dictator of the Central African Republic
1981-1995 Franois Mitterrand hid his long-term relationship with his mistress, Anne Pingeot, and their daughter, Mazarine, while maintaing the pretence of a happy marriage to his wife, Danielle
1994 Franois de Grossouvre, a Mitterrand associate, committed suicide at the Elyse Palace
http://www.timesonline.co.uk/printFriendly/0,,1-8807-2165698-13090,00.html
Posted at 1:12 AM · Comments (0)
Bob Marley Is Still Catching Fire
May 16, 2006 1:11 AM
[11 May 2006]
May 11 is the 25th anniversary of the passing of the king of reggae, the day when Bob Marley succumbed to cancer in Miami in 1981 at the age of 36. Today his music is more popular respected than ever. Christopher John Farley, author of the new book, Before the Legend: The Rise of Bob Marley, looks back.
by Christopher John Farley
:. e-mail this article
:. print this article
:. comment on this article
Bob Marley didn’t believe in death. It is part of Rastafari teaching that there is no dying, only living, and Marley held that to be true. For Marley, at least, death was just the beginning.
It may seem, to the casual top-40 listener, that reggae music is a limited genre, a sidestream to the mainstream, a musical form that saw its glory days, its better days, in the days of Bob Marley.
Listen closer.
The sound of reggae is everywhere. Bob Marley’s greatest hits album, Legend is still on the Billboard charts, more than 20 years after its release. Artists that he influenced are all over MTV, in various forms and in various genres. There are too many to list them all.
Before the Legend: The Rise of Bob Marley
by Christopher John Farley
Armistad/HarperCollins
May 2006, 224 pages, $21.95
[Amazon]
Some draw from his sound: Hasidic roots-reggae rapper Matisyahu. The Fugees — Wyclef has covered Marley songs, and fellow Fugee Lauryn Hill has covered Marley songs and given birth to Marley grandkids. Dancehall star Sean Paul has produced two best-selling CDs. And Marley’s son Damian scored a recent chart hit with his song “Welcome to Jamrock.” Others draw from his general spirit: Gwen Stefani; Julian Casablancas, the lead singer of the Strokes, a band that sometimes borrows reggae rhythms, is an avowed Marley fan. U2 has covered Marley’s songs in concert and lead singer Bono inducted him into the Rock and Roll Hall of Fame.
In the past other musicians have been influenced by Marley, including Eric Clapton, who covered his song “I Shot the Sheriff”; Stevie Wonder, who wrote “Master Blaster” as a tribute to the reggae king; and the now-defunct ska-reggae-punk band Sublime, who re-recorded Marley’s song “Jailhouse”. In the future there will no doubt be more Marley acolytes.
To be sure, reggae is not what it was. It has been hijacked by a seemingly rougher musical cousin: dancehall. Many of the new crop of musicians who come out of Jamaica seek to emulate Marley’s sales but fail to comprehend his spirit. Their songs are devoid of social content and their lyrics often lack resonance. Some newer Jamaican singers, such as Luciano and Sizzla, stand up and stand out. Others simply bow down, lay down and follow commercial trends. Marley’s music has also been co-opted by some listeners. You can hear it at corporate picnics, on romantic comedy film soundtracks, at frat parties.
But make no mistake: Reggae, Marley’s kind of reggae, is rootsier, ruder, more revolutionary than many people take it for. Marley grew up on the streets of Trench Town in Jamaica, a ghetto that was tougher than the hometown of any American rapper. In fact, the streets that gave birth to reggae also helped create rap. The tradition of DJs talking or “toasting” over records started in Kingston, Jamaica, and was later turned into rapping in the Bronx. DJ Kool Herc, “the godfather of rap”, hailed from Jamaica. One of Run-DMC’s earliest songs was titled “Roots Rock Reggae”, a tribute to the shared heritage of rap and reggae. Biggie Smalls’s family has roots in Jamaica.
Today, the music of the African Diaspora has a worldwide stage. Marley helped build that stage, touring Africa, Europe, Asia and elsewhere. Today, we see groups like Three 6 Mafia winning Oscars for songs like “It’s Hard Out Here for a Pimp” and we wonder: Is the world stage being used for the right reasons?
Marley sang songs about being freed from prison. He also sang about freeing one’s mind. He wrote songs about confronting cops. He also sang about facing Jah. He didn’t caricature street life and turn it into a commodity for entertainment. He transformed the hardship he saw around him for purposes of revolution and revelation.
Listen closer.
On one of his most famous compositions, “Redemption Song,” Marley asks for help to sing his “songs of freedom.” He’s still not getting all the help he should. But his song is still being sung.
Christopher John Farley is the author of the forthcoming biography, Before the Legend: The Rise of Bob Marley (Amistad/HarperCollins).
Bob Marley bass player loses royalty lawsuit
Mon May 15, 2006 1:02 PM BST
Email This Article | Print This Article | RSS
By Adam Pasick
LONDON (Reuters) - Aston “Familyman” Barrett, the bass player for Bob Marley and the Wailers, has lost a 60 million pound lawsuit over royalties and song-writing credits that pitted him against Island Records and the Marley family.
Barrett, who received his nickname for fathering 52 children, testified that he and his brother Carlton “Carly” Barrett, a drummer for the reggae band who was murdered in 1985, did not receive the money they were due following Marley’s death from cancer in 1981.
But Mr Justice Kim Lewison dismissed the suit in a ruling at London’s High Court on Monday, a move welcomed by Marley’s widow Rita and her family.
“We always felt this would be the outcome, and it was hard to listen to Aston Barrett reduce his friend Bob to someone who was more interested in playing football than making music,” the family said in a statement.
Barrett will be liable for court costs and may be forced to sell two properties in Jamaica as a result of the ruling.
The Barrett brothers played on numerous albums by Bob Marley and the Wailers, including “Natty Dread”, “Rastaman Vibration” and “Babylon by Bus”. The judge dismissed their claim to have written several of the band’s songs including “War” and “Them Belly Full.”
During the trial, Rita Marley and Island Records founder Chris Blackwell played down the contributions of the brothers and said Aston Barrett surrendered his right to further royalties in a 1994 agreement that paid him several hundred thousand dollars.
“There is, in my judgement, no reason to decline to enforce the settlement agreement against Mr Aston Barrett,” Mr Justice Lewison said in his ruling.
Island Records is part of Universal Music Group, the world’s biggest music company, and a unit of France’s Vivendi.
http://www.popmatters.com/books/features/060511-bobmarley.shtml
Posted at 1:11 AM · Comments (0)
Portrait of Chirac as a great glutton who has lost his appetite for the fight
May 14, 2006 11:07 PM
Copyright The Times
President Chirac is beginning his last year in office beset by scandal, the collapse of his labour reforms and deepening Euroscepticism. The bestseller The President’s Tragedy breaks a taboo by exposing M Chirac’s private life, revealing the self-indulgence and physical decline that mark his 11 years in office. Here, we publish an extract
ON MAY 7, 1995, when Jacques Chirac was elected President of France, a wave of joy spread across Paris as the victor drove through the city in his old Citron CX.
M Chiracs supporters held a party in the Place de la Concorde, although the man himself went off on his own. He visited his friends, the millionaire businessman Franois Pinault and his wife, Mayvonne, and then he disappeared with his latest female conquest.
However, he emerged from the election a changed man. There was no jubilation on his face or in his voice as the 22nd President of the French Republic, in his first official speech, called for a vigorous, impartial, self-disciplined state that is careful about the use of public money a state that does not isolate those who govern from those who have elected them.
It is almost cruel to recall those words, given that Chirac has left the state exactly where he found it not vigorous, impartial or self-disciplined.
As he has aged he has turned into the personification of the decline of France and the powerlessness of the countrys authorities. His is a very French story, set against a background of bluster and U-turns.
M Chirac has never put his calls for a modest state into practice, at the Elyse Palace, where he lives and works, or anywhere else. He believes that one has to do what is right. For him, that means always consuming the best wine and the finest champagne. In the 11 years of his reign the budget of the Presidents office has increased from 3.3 million to 31.9 million (22 million).
He has lived for too long in a virtual world, far removed from reality. Since 1977, when he became Mayor of Paris, he has always been fed and housed like royalty although, with him, housed is a relative concept.
For years Jean-Claude Laumond, his chauffeur, would wait almost every evening to take him off in the Citron CX. From 8pm onwards you could contact M Chirac only through M Laumond, a cheerful character with a great, open laugh; an ace behind the steering wheel as he drove at breakneck speed through the capital.
The Presidents wife, Bernadette, hated M Laumond, and it is easy to understand why. The chauffeur and her husband made an odd couple and their conspiratorial ways left no doubt that they were off for a good time on their nocturnal rounds.
As soon as her husband became President, Mme Chirac launched a campaign to get rid of M Laumond. For two years she was unsuccessful. Then, in 1997, on the night that Diana, Princess of Wales, was killed in a car crash in the Alma tunnel in Paris, the Minister of the Interior could not reach the President on the telephone.
Mme Chirac blamed M Laumond. After this and other similar incidents, Mme Chirac won the backing of her daughter, Claude, and claimed the head of the man nicknamed the chauffeur of pleasures. M Laumond was banished.
Mme Chirac has hinted that she thought about leaving her husband at one stage. But she stayed with him because, she said, she had a good dose of determination, tenacity and perseverance.
Regarding her marriage to M Chirac, she said: My father told me, You are his centre point, and events have proved him right. My husband has always come back to his centre point. Anyway, Ive always warned him: the day that Napoleon left Josephine, he lost everything.
M Chirac is happy to confirm her thesis. We men are like the Cro-Magnon people of prehistoric times, he once told me. Were always hunting and wenching. But, at the end of the day, we always go back to our caves. For my part I need this cave to feel at ease with myself. Without it I would be as unhappy as could be. He cannot do without his wife. He calls her often, five or six times a day, sometimes more.
When he cannot reach her immediately, he wants her news from the secretary, the chauffeur or the attending police officer. Then he tells someone to fetch her. Wherever she is, she must answer him. M Chirac is an ogre who swallows everything gluttonously: men, women, ideas, kilometres, romances, defeats, scrapes and, of course, food.
He eats enough to feed the Indian Army, starting with a breakfast fit for a siege. But by 10.30am, he requires more sustenance.
So he has a snack of pt or cold meat sandwiches, complete with pickled gherkins. A four-course lunch follows, then more sandwiches for tea before, finally, a four-course dinner.
I have to feel full up, this great gullet said. That is why he particularly likes old-fashioned dishes, such as calfshead with ravigote sauce.
This is all washed down with five or six beers a day. As he does not mind punch, either, he sometimes has one too many. But he always sleeps it off with great dignity.
M Chirac believes that he is condemned to eat without stopping. When Im hungry, which happens several times a day, I become aggressive and even belligerent.
The tragedy of his presidency is that the brave hussar of the 1970s and the 1980s has developed into a placid character with no ambition other than to be liked. The head of state has adopted a policy of paternalistic, social conservatism and has never wavered from it. He wants to be the father of the nation and is determined not to cause anyone any trouble.
A few days after M Chiracs centre-right supporters had suffered an historic defeat in the 2004 regional elections, Franois Fillon, the Minister for Social Affairs, told him: If we were beaten … it is because we dont have a clear line and we seem to be making up policies from day to day.
M Chirac gave the minister an icy stare before delivering his traditional speech on the social fragility of France. Dont forget, he said. The unions can block everything at the drop of a hat.
It is impossible to persuade him otherwise, and that, perhaps, is M Chiracs greatest failing. The man who used to change with the wind is now stuck in a rut. When he has an idea, he cannot get it out of his head.
His rigidity can even be comical, as demonstrated by a story told by M Fillon about the aircraft carrier Charles de Gaulle, the pride of the French Navy.
Theres a problem, Jacques, M Fillon once said to M Chirac. The Charles de Gaulle was built on the cheap. It has a cruising speed of 27 knots, when our other aircraft carriers can reach 32 knots.
Thats wrong, M Chirac said. I ordered the Charles de Gaulle myself and I know it can go at 32 knots. M Fillon checked with the commander-in-chief of the Navy, who confirmed the maximum speed of 27 knots. He then informed the President.
We could have left it there, M Fillon said. But thats not like M Chirac. When we met, he grabbed my arm and said to me, Listen, the Charles de Gaulle will go at 32 knots … Theres no doubt about it. I know what commanders-in-chief are like. Theyre all liars.
After years of listening to discordant voices and retreating into his own clan, Chirac hears only what he wants to hear. The result is that he does not hear anything about anything.
He should have reformed the French social model, but he was happy to put it into deep freeze on the fallacious pretext that the whole world dreamt of having the same thing.
But why would the world be jealous of a system in which one person in ten has no work and one in five no training, where job insecurity runs alongside one of the highest unemployment rates of any developed country?
It is a social, economic and moral failure, but apparently it does not trouble the conscience or the digestion of the President. Through cowardice as much as blindness, he persists in following policies that have led the country to ruin over the past 20 years.
As his reign nears its end, M Chirac has few people around him. You can count his friends on one hand, as the number of guests invited to the birthday party his daughter organises for him demonstrates each year. You only ever find celebrities that he has bumped into at cocktails, with glass in hand, such as the singer Johnny Hallyday, the comic Muriel Robin, the entertainer Patrick Sbastien or the actress Michle Laroque.
If it were not for his grandson, Martin, whose drawings the President piles up on his desk at the Elyse, he would be devoid of family and friendship.
The Elyse is nothing more than a great empty palace, where the President is cut off from everything. Each meeting is a torture, and so is each outing.
M Chirac knows that he is scrutinised by everyone and, despite his attempts to camouflage his troubles, he cannot hide the mixture of lethargy and sadness that invaded his brain after he suffered a minor stroke last September. He struggles to find his words, so he is never separated from his crib sheets.
The President has finally realised that he is not immortal. For a long time he thought that he could always master the elements. He even claimed to have supernatural healing powers. One day, for example, he learnt that the wife of Xavier Darcos, who went on to become Overseas Co-operation Minister, had cancer. The President asked to see her alone for a quarter of an hour with her baby. After the meeting he told Darcos: I acquired from my father a gift that enables me to know whether people are in good health merely by shaking their hands. Your wife is saved.
That is M Chirac through and through: a believer, fatalistic and rustic. He is superstitious as well. He has spent his life doing everything in his power to help the sick, rushing to be by the bedside of the dying, kissing the dead on the forehead.
His own turn has come. He is waiting for it sadly, with legs that are shaking, not out of fear but out of tiredness at the end of such a long journey.
La Tragdie du Prsident: Scnes de la Vie Politique, 1986-2006, by Franz-Olivier Giesbert, is published by Flammarion
UPS AND DOWNS
1932 born November 29
1956 marries the blue-blooded Bernadette Chodron de Courcel
1956-1957 fights in the Algerian war of independence
1967 first ministerial post, Secretary of State for Employment
1974-76 and 1986-88 Prime Minister
1981 and 1988 beaten by Franois Mitterrand in presidential elections
1995 defeats the socialist Lionel Jospin to be elected President
1996 forced into humiliating U-turn over welfare reform
1997 loses much of his power after his centre-right camp is beaten when he calls a snap election
2002 overwhelmingly defeats Jean-Marie Le Pen, the National Front candidate, to be re-elected President
2003 popularity reaches record levels as he opposes the US and Britain over the war in Iraq
2004 powerless to stop Nicolas Sarkozy, his arch enemy, from gaining control of the political party that he had created, the Union for a Popular Movement
2005 suffers an embarrassing defeat in the French referendum on the European constitution and appoints Dominique de Villepin as Prime Minister
2006 ratings plummet after riots in the suburbs, demonstrations that force a U-turn over labour reform for young people, and M de Villepins alleged involvement in a spy scandal
HIGH JINKS IN OFFICE
1879 Jules Grvy resigned as President after scandal of his son-in-law charging for the Lgion d Honneur
1899 Flix Faure, left, died in the Elyse Palace in the arms of his mistress. The Presidents cause of death was recorded as overwork
1920 Paul Deschanel suffered behavioural difficulties. He signed legislation Napoleon and climbed out of the presidential train in his pyjamas
1979 President Giscard dEstaing was revealed to have received diamonds worth one million francs from Jean-Bedel Bokassa, the bloodthirsty dictator of the Central African Republic
1981-1995 Franois Mitterrand hid his long-term relationship with his mistress, Anne Pingeot, and their daughter, Mazarine, while maintaing the pretence of a happy marriage to his wife, Danielle
1994 Franois de Grossouvre, a Mitterrand associate, committed suicide at the Elyse Palace
http://www.timesonline.co.uk/printFriendly/0,,1-8807-2165698-13090,00.html
Posted at 11:07 PM · Comments (0)
Larry Summers at Harvard: Out of his league
May 14, 2006 2:52 PM
Copyright The Financial Times
May 12 2006
At 4pm on a February afternoon this year, 200 professors from the faculty of arts and sciences at Harvard University filed into the 190-year-old University Hall in the middle of Harvard Yard and settled down on the plastic folding chairs beneath the oil paintings and chandeliers. It was supposed to be a regular meeting of the teaching faculty. But some of the academics were about to launch what one of them would later describe as a surprise attack on Larry Summers, Harvard president.
ADVERTISEMENT
Twelve months earlier, Summers, leader since October 2001 of Americas oldest university, had survived a tumultuous no-confidence vote by the professors after suggesting in an off-the-record speech that intrinsic physiological differences might be a big reason why there were more men than women in top jobs in science and engineering. The unrest had died down but today, suddenly, as the afternoon turned to dusk, he faced new criticisms about his abrasive management style and his personal links to an economics professor at the centre of a fraud scandal.
About half an hour into the meeting, after the president and senior deans had dealt with routine matters on the agenda and the meeting had moved on to questions, a round-faced man in his fifties who was not known for speaking at the faculty meetings, stood up and strode to the microphone. James Engell, the stern-voiced chair of the English department, looked across at the president who was sitting at a table at the front of the room, and went straight to the point: The faculty, he said, was divided, demoralised and dispirited, and that hard as we work, and hard as the administration works, this university shows the signs of being paralysed, and of entering a new period of yet deeper paralysis.
Summers looked taken aback, according to people at the meeting, as one by one the professors rose in sombre succession to denounce him. Farish Jenkins, a 65-year-old professor of evolutionary biology, followed Engell to the microphone. Jenkins rarely attended the faculty meetings and had never spoken out publicly against Summers before. But now, clutching his notes in his right hand and looking around at the crowded room, he put into words what many of his distinguished colleagues were thinking - that Summers should go.
Is it not time to reverse this tide of chaos and dysfunction, he said, in a low measured tone, to appoint an acting president and to allow a new presidential search to be initiated?
As the professors stinging criticisms mounted, it became clear that this meeting on February 7 was a turning point in what had become a long-running struggle between the president and the Harvard academics. Just 14 days later the battle would reach its dramatic conclusion.
For Summers critics, the fight was about ousting a barbarian president, a philistine and bully foisted on them from outside. He had hijacked their precious university, was using it as a pulpit for his odious views and was pushing Harvard without consultation in a disastrously wrong direction.
But Summers had set out to tackle what he believed was a dangerous complacency, in the new era of globalisation, among Harvards brilliant but self-satisfied professors. He would later compare central parts of the university to a Yugoslav workers co-operative - they had no incentives to adapt or modernise, until it was too late. In addition, some had allowed themselves to be dragged down by leftwing political correctness. For him there was so much at stake: the quality of undergraduate teaching; students knowledge of the world outside America; whether Harvard could compete with US rivals such as Stanford or match the engineers and scientists that would soon be emerging from the vast campuses growing in China or India. If he failed now, Harvards position was at stake. If Harvard lost its way, then the future governance of America, or even the world, was at risk, because Harvards job was to train future leaders of the worlds only superpower.
At a time of pressing new questions in fields such as biology, technology and public health, universities in the US and Europe, including Oxford and Cambridge, face increasing rivalry, not only from each other but also from the private sector. Market pressures that were once felt only in blue-collar sectors of the economy are now being felt in the knowledge economy, causing similar stresses and strains. This is the story of what happened when these pressures reached into the rarefied heart of Americas oldest university.
To understand Summers struggle, it is important to understand what had happened since he was appointed to raise Harvards competitive metabolism four and a half years earlier. Then, in many ways, Harvard didnt seem to need changing. All Americans want their kids to go there. It is shorthand for establishment and excellence and success. The students who clamour to get through its doors (more than 22,000 applications this year for 1,650 places) go on to positions of leadership and power, channelling their wealth back into their alma maters $26bn endowment fund, the richest in the world. Its prestige and wealth attract the worlds most ambitious teachers and researchers - 45 Nobel prize winners have crouched over the desks in the offices and laboratories clustered around the halls, libraries and churches of 300-year-old Harvard Yard.
All seemed well in the autumn of 2001, but Summers thought differently. Harvards 27th president believed that Harvards mission had become blurred. His particular ire fell on the faculty of arts and sciences. FAS is only one of 10 independent parts that make up Harvards whole - the others are the graduate schools of law, medicine, education, government, public health, business, divinity, design and advanced study - but it is the heart of the university, its oldest part, and the faculty responsible for teaching undergraduates and awarding PhDs. Here, Summers felt, there were reasons to worry. A survey of students at Americas top universities showed Harvards undergraduates were among the least satisfied with their education. This survey showed, Summers thought, that Harvard was failing in one of its key missions: to teach its undergraduates well. Another troubling trend was grade inflation: about half the grades the professors awarded their students were As or A-minuses.
Within the faculty, Summers singled out for special vilification a small section of teachers in the humanities and some areas of what he called the softer social sciences. He felt that these academics held inordinate sway and had hogged resources over the past decade when FAS had been the fastest growing part of the university. He attacked what he called their entrenched sense of entitlement and prerogative. Despite FASs overall growth, science was not expanding nearly fast enough, he felt. Americas brightest science graduates, he found, avoided Harvards moribund labs and chose fizzier departments on Americas west coast for research. Yet the big changes in society, breakthroughs that would affect humanity for centuries, were happening in science, which he also knew was attracting the biggest pools of money from government, research agencies and alumni.
Summers repeatedly said that one problem was that Harvards big-name professors spent too much time focusing on their research or outside consulting and not enough on teaching. On average, he said, Harvard professors spent only 50 hours a year in class. They could take one in every four years off for personal research. When undergraduates did see their professors it was in packed lecture halls, while smaller seminars were delegated to less qualified teaching assistants. The president warned the faculty that although Harvard might be the best, it couldnt count on always being the best. When we looked at what the agenda of the new president should be, it was about, how do we continue to reinvent ourselves? a member of the search committee to appoint Summers told me.
Summers, 46 when he became president, also insisted that the university hire younger professors. The median age was nearly 60. He wanted younger less-established scholars who still had their best work ahead of them.
At his installation ceremony, Summers said the 21st century was the century of biology and life sciences. He wanted Harvard to address the burning issues of the present-day and avoid a preoccupation with the past. He asked why students rarely admitted never having read a Shakespeare play but found it acceptable not to know a gene from a chromosome or the meaning of exponential growth. As his programme got up and running, new funding included $40m in a stem-cell institute.
Summers recognised that the scientific method, theories and data are the organising principles of our society, said a Harvard economics professor who was a supporter of Summers. This is the way of economics and the natural sciences, it is not the way of the humanities, and it is truly threatening to a lot of schools.
Summers felt that it was up to the president to lead the university in its transformation. Past presidents had taken a back seat to the professors, focusing on non-controversial areas such as fundraising. He used the analogy of a basketball game: the professors thought they were Michael Jordan and the presidents role was to cheer from the sidelines. But from now on, Summers would say privately, he was Michael Jordan.
Harvards grandees, when they hired Summers, knew they were getting someone who wanted to be much more than a passive administrator. He had an impressive pedigree. Two of his uncles, Kenneth Arrow and Paul Samuelson, had won Nobel prizes in economics. Summers, who grew up in suburban Pennsylvania where both his mother and father were economics professors, was something of an academic wunderkind. He went to Massachusetts Institute of Technology, not Harvard, as an undergraduate. But later, at 28, he became Harvards then youngest tenured professor and went on to win the biannual John Bates Clark medal for the most outstanding American economist under 40. In 1991 he went to Washington to become chief economist at the World Bank. In 1999, at 44, he succeeded Robert Rubin as the Clinton administrations Treasury Secretary, a job that ended with the coming of the Bush White House.
At Harvard, the first sign of resistance to Summers new regime came almost immediately when he questioned the work of Cornel West, a black superstar professor in Harvards department of African and African American studies. Summers told West in a private conversation, which West quickly made public in the press, that the latter was spending too much time on Democratic party politics outside the university, accused him of grade inflation, and raised doubts about the scholarly value of his popular books and his contributions to a rap CD. Summers refused to comment publicly on this. The alleged remarks, however, caused uproar among Wests supporters, who regarded him as an innovator who was reaching younger audiences. But Summers felt that for too long the African American department - and other departments - had been allowed to expand and prosper for reasons other than academic excellence, such as under-representation of blacks in top jobs. Summers was no longer going to tolerate this. West left for Princeton, one of Harvards main rivals.
Other conflicts centred on attempts to redirect resources to pay for Summers new priorities. FAS objected fiercely when Summers tried to encourage alumni to give money more widely to other parts of the university - to the poorer schools of education, public health and government, or for special science projects - rather than solely to the relatively wealthy FAS. On top of this, Summers day-to-day activist role was provoking resentment. In the crucial committee meetings where decisions were taken about whom to admit as new professors, Summers spoke up more loudly than previous presidents, asking the assembled professors and outside guest experts whether they were sure about candidates contributions to their fields and to explain their reasoning more carefully. Many of the distinguished professors, world authorities in their subjects, felt the president, as outstanding an economist as he might well be, was overstepping the mark by passing judgment on issues he knew little about.
He himself is not widely educated, said Judith Ryan, a professor of German literature. I met Ryan, a 63-year-old Australian who speaks with a mid-Atlantic drawl, in her office near Harvard Square. On her walls were pictures of Rilke and Kafka, watching as Ryan ate a late, rushed lunch of yoghurt and Starbucks coffee. She attended the faculty meeting in University Hall on February 7 and was one of the academics who stepped up to the microphone to criticise Summers.
He is a brilliant economist but not really very curious about how other disciplines function and what is at stake today in those disciplines, she said. Ryan regularly sat in on tenure meetings with Summers. He really tends to translate things into economic models and he would start to talk about his impressions of the field. Our visitors were astonished. He would ask the meaning of words that I thought were part of most peoples vocabulary. Syntax was one example, she said.
In Ryans critique of Summers, there is something of a whiff of snobbery, or at least unease, that Harvard was being led by an economics nerd who disdained literature for cheap thrillers (or, at a push, The Economist), who was often badly dressed, who looked jowly, and around whom swirled countless stories about how he ate with his mouth open or fell asleep at dinners. The students liked his slight geekiness, she said. One could see that at the freshman barbecue when they flocked around him. They may have seen something of themselves in him whereas we expected someone of mature judgment and wisdom.
But Ryan, who when I talked to her had just returned from teaching a course on Lives Ruined By Literature to a class of 90 undergraduates, also defended her faculty against Summers claims of poor teaching. Of course there is always a need to update your courses but we were doing that, she said. The real problem was not that professors chose to spend less time with students but that class sizes are simply too large - FAS in fact has too few resources. Does grade inflation really matter if everyone understands this is what is happening?
Ryan also expressed misgivings shared by some of the other professors I spoke to about the pro-science direction Summers was taking the university. He had a very present-day notion of the aims of education, she said with a shrug. He didnt see the point of studying ancient Greece.
Despite the objections to what many saw as his meddling, Summers could perhaps have won over critics such as Ryan and got away with his agenda if he had been more diplomatic. But it was not part of his character to be emollient, which is something you realise straight away when you meet the president of Harvard and dare to shake his hand. Summers is fantastically direct. He jumps on people, engaging their ideas, provocatively ripping apart their arguments. He has strong views and gives them.
His family was one of constant debate, said one economist who collaborated with Summers early in his career. Getting airtime in the Summers household was tough. Bob Summers - his father - was known as But Bob and it was hard for Larry to get a word in edgeways. In some ways Larry is unfortunately a victim of his background.
His defenders - mainly economists and people who worked with him in Washington - say Summers style is simply the rough and tumble of the economics department. If he engages you, you should be pleased because he respects you. He is actually incredibly open to different views and he relishes being challenged, Tim Geithner, president of the New York Federal Reserve Bank, who worked with Summers at the US Treasury, told me. He uses that process of pushing back to think through issues more deeply.
Other people who worked closely with Summers in Harvards administration say he was simply blind to the effects of his blunt opinions. He has a gene missing, said one former senior administrator. We would be in meetings together and afterwards I would say, For Gods sake, do you know what you did to that man? He would pause and run the tape back through his mind - he has a formidable memory - and say, Really? I would say You had better call him or drop him a note.
But others saw a darker side. For many who had run up against his harsher judgments and manoeuvrings, he viewed life in brutish survival-of-the-fittest terms and was ready to humiliate rivals to get his own way. He got into pissing matches with other academics about who was the best, and thats not what the president should be doing, said one former Harvard academic.
In some of his public pronouncements, Summers was beginning to stray into Americas broader ideological battles that had polarised the nation since the election of George W. Bush, the September 11 attacks on New York and Washington and the Afghan and Iraq wars. Harvards faculty, especially those on the left, saw no role for their president in this and were appalled when he began to enunciate what they saw as rightwing opinions. In a series of early speeches, he frowned on a pervasive distrust of the military and said that Harvard people had a duty to be more patriotic after September 11.
In autumn 2002, during an address at Harvards Memorial Church, he warned about a worldwide rise in anti-Semitism. He criticised a campaign by some professors to force Harvard to stop its investments in Israel, mentioning it in the same speech as synagogue burnings in Europe. Serious and thoughtful people, he said, are advocating and taking actions that are anti-Semitic in their effect, if not in their intent.
Marne Levine, his then chief-of-staff, spoke to him before he made the comments: He thought long and hard, and knew there was potential for a mixed reaction and some backlash that could create complications. But he said, This is something that needs to be said.
Summers was to cause the biggest furore at Harvard on January 14 2005, a date that some professors still refer to ominously as 1/14. After sandwiches during a private conference held at the National Bureau of Economic Research in Cambridge, Massachusetts, on Diversifying the Science and Engineering Workforce, Summers waded into the heart of feminist politics when he tried to explain why more of the top jobs in science and engineering were held by men than women. He told the invited
audience of about 40 people that he discounted traditional explanations, according to the transcript of the talk that Summers office finally released, reluctantly, four weeks later. It wasnt primarily because society channelled girls towards softer subjects such as nursing, nor was it chiefly discrimination - that the people who appointed candidates were white males and preferred people just like themselves. He said girls tastes had something to do with it - I guess my experience with my two-and-a-half-year-old twin daughters who were not given dolls and who were given trucks, and found themselves saying to each other, Look, daddy truck is carrying the baby truck, tells me something.
But apart from this, there were two main reasons why more women werent in senior jobs. He said he would like nothing better than to be proved wrong, but he thought that one reason was that women preferred not to work the long and punishing hours required by high-powered jobs. The second reason - the one that would cause most of the fuss - centred on what he called the greater intrinsic aptitude of men over women. As demonstrated by variability of test scores in statistical distributions, a simple observable fact was that the brightest young scientists tended to be male, not female.
So my best guess, to provoke you, of whats behind all of this is that the largest phenomenon, by far, is the general clash between peoples legitimate family desires and employers current desire for high power and high intensity, Summers said. That in the special case of science and engineering there are issues of intrinsic aptitude, and particularly of the variability of aptitude, and that those considerations are reinforced by what are in fact lesser factors involving socialisation and continuing discrimination.
The speech was supposed to be off the record but when one academic, an MIT biologist, ran from the hall saying she felt physically sick, the shockwave soon ran around the world. One person to feel the blast was Samantha Power, a young Harvard academic who had become close to Summers. I was in East Timor in a malaria-infested internet cafe and the crackling TV said Harvard says women inferior to men in science, said Power when I tracked her down by phone in Washington. I e-mailed him, You didnt? He wrote back immediately, Alas, I did. Some percentage of him was upset that he couldnt ask these questions in the spirit of free inquiry. But the vast majority of his being was mortified at his own lack of political radar and at his intellectual imprecision. I was surprised by the speech, but I was unsurprised by the unmediated candour. Larry had told me I was full of shit on several occasions, but I never had the impression it was because I was a woman; usually it was because I was making a sloppy argument, and his challenges made me get my game up.
Summers record is not anti-female in any way. He has a history of helping women advance their careers. In Washington especially, he gathered around him a group of clever and adoring young female advisers. He told them that he got good value for money by hiring them because they were undervalued by society. His first wife, Victoria, was a high-achieving tax expert at the IMF. At the World Bank he had famously argued that the best way for rich nations to spend their aid was to invest in womens education in the developing world. Yet Summers was adamant that no area of inquiry should be off limits just because it caused offence. He believed there were observable differences between the aptitude of men and women in tests of science and mathematics ability that could not be ignored. His critics said he had misread the literature - or not read it at all. Summers thought they were using the speech as an opportunity to further their own careers.
In the ensuing firestorm Summers reluctantly backed down, at least in public. He set up two task forces to study the representation of women in the university and gave an extra $50m to put their recommendations into effect. My January hypothesis substantially understated the impact of socialisation and discrimination, including implicit attitudes - patterns of thought to which all of us are unconsciously subject, he said in a statement. The issue of gender difference is far more complex than comes through in my comments, and my remarks about variability went beyond what the research has established.
The apology, however, didnt quell the revolt. Instead, the speech had unlocked the broader frustrations about Summers policies and managerial style. FAS academics now freely aired their complaints on the campus and at the regular faculty meetings.
I thought to myself: Cornel West, that could have been me, J. Lorand Matory, a professor of anthropology in the African and African American studies department, told me. Matory was upset by Summers treatment of West and became one of the presidents most vociferous critics. He interpreted Summers behaviour in brutal social anthropological terms of the strong preying on the weak, and felt he needed to speak out. The Palestinians, that could have been me, he said. Women, that could have been me. They came for my neighbour yesterday. I was still at risk. I stepped forward.
Matory acted. He proposed that a no-confidence motion be put on the agenda of the next faculty meeting, and on March 15 2005, eight weeks after the comments about women, FAS academics packed into the Loeb Drama Centre, a modernist concrete-wooden theatre in Cambridge and, according to the student newspaper The Harvard Crimson, they sat in the aisles or stood against the wall once all 556 seats were taken.
The motion was without precedent in modern-day Harvard and the first hour of the meeting was consumed by a debate about whether the vote should take place at all. As Summers sat on the stage, his supporters read aloud from the pages of John Stuart Mills On Liberty and warned about a new McCarthyism. The vote was symbolic since only the Harvard Corporation, the universitys governing council, has the power to sack a president, but the academics wanted to send a message to Summers. In a secret ballot the motion was passed by 218 to 185 votes, with 18 abstentions. As the result was announced, Summers put his hand to his mouth and his expression changed to one of surprise and deep disappointment, according to the Crimson. Despite the vote of no-confidence, the corporation backed Summers. He survived into the next academic year. But the terms of trade had changed and fresh problems began to emerge concerning Summers treatment of William Kirby, dean of FAS.
Kirby, an admired China scholar, was well liked in the university, professors say, but was not generally considered to be a successful administrator. Progress on a review of the undergraduate curriculum, entrusted to him, had been slow and Summers didnt think he was tough enough. On January 27 this year, while Summers was in Davos and Kirby was en route from New York, the Crimson published a leak that the dean was planning to step down after less than four years in office. The story, citing unnamed sources close to the central administration, said Kirby was leaving because Summers had told him to go.
Kirby had intended to make his announcement in February. But as a result of the story the dean brought forward his resignation. To some, the leak looked planned and there was speculation that it had come from Summers office. Summers office denies this strenuously and some professors agree that the leak may have come from elsewhere. Nevertheless it was read as a show of strength by the president and another instance of heavy-handed presidential manipulation. It was especially surprising, many in FAS say, since Kirby was widely viewed as being loyal to Summers and, in the words of one professor, often did Summers dirty work for him. Summers had betrayed his kindly lieutenant. That perception set the backdrop for the attack on the president amid University Halls oil paintings and chandeliers on February 7.
It was meant to be a routine FAS meeting to discuss the curriculum review. But the academics had turned out in double the usual number, and they gave Kirby a standing ovation. The first two speakers at the microphone - preceding Engell and Jenkins - listed the qualities they wanted to see in the person Summers chose as Kirbys successor. But then Engell and Jenkins delivered their harsher criticisms aimed more directly at the president and after them the pointed blows fell thick and fast.
Suzanne Preston Blier, a 56-year-old professor of art and architecture who came to the meeting even though she was on leave, said the turbulence caused by Summers was hurting fundraising. The proportion of alumni who were donating money to Harvard had fallen, she told the meeting. In addition, named sponsors were not coming forward for some of the big new projects. This was a sensitive area for Summers. Jack Meyer, the fund manager who had built up Harvards endowment over the past 15 years, had abruptly left a year earlier amid criticism of the million-dollar salaries paid to some of his team. His loss was considered by some in Americas university system as a black mark on the presidents record.
Fundraising and Kirby were subjects that Summers probably expected. But then, near the end of the meeting, Frederick Abernathy, an elderly, soft-spoken professor of engineering who had not talked publicly at a faculty meeting since Summers took office, stood up and asked what the president knew about the Andrei Shleifer affair.
Shleifer and his wife, Nancy Zimmerman, a former Goldman Sachs bond options trader, had invested in Russia in the 1990s, taking advantage of Shleifers position as director of a Harvard project that oversaw the US governments aid programme in Russia helping with post-communist privatisation and establishing functioning capital markets. The whole story was told in the latest edition of Institutional Investor, a leading investment magazine, and many of the professors in the room had read it. (Many had received photocopies of the story in unmarked envelopes in their faculty mailboxes.) In 2004, a judge in a federal district court in Boston found that Shleifer was liable for conspiring to defraud the US government by violating federal conflict-of- interest rules, and in August 2005 Harvard agreed to pay $26.5m after a long legal battle. (In the settlement, Shleifer himself paid a further $2m, although neither he nor Harvard admitted wrongdoing.) Despite the ruling, Shleifer was still a Harvard professor. Shleifer was a close friend of Summers. The implication was that Summers was protecting his friend.
I really think that Harvard was defending the indefensible, Abernathy told me later by e-mail. It offended my sense of values and what I hope are the values of the institution. In fact, Harvard had not been able to start its own investigation until the governments case was settled, and since August a Harvard ethics committee had been looking into Shleifers conduct but Summers was bound by faculty rules not to disclose this. In answer to Abernathy, Summers told the academics gathered in University Hall that because of his personal links he had disqualified himself from any of Harvards dealings with Shleifer.
We all saw that as a Washington lawyers non-answer, a professor told me afterwards.
When pressed by Abernathy about whether he had any personal opinion about the case, Summers said he didnt know the facts.
A gasp went around, said one person who was there. The provost rolled his eyes. Afterwards, people were saying, Does he think we are children that he would lie to us? It was the moment the presidency disappeared.
After Abernathy, Judith Ryan stepped up and publicly asked Summers why FAS shouldnt hold another presidential vote of no-confidence, and finally Daniel Fisher, a physics professor, ended the questioning when, according to Harvard Magazine, he asked why the corporation could collectively fail to conclude that the future of Harvard would be far better with a new president. In all, 15 people spoke against Summers during the course of the meeting. None defended him.
Within the university, the students had probably been his most vocal supporters. They had appreciated his global outlook and his focus on undergraduate teaching, flocking to his lectures and mobbing him on the campus, asking him to sign dollar bills. But among the professors, Summers had built few real alliances beyond the economics department. Now even his closest allies, including those in the professional schools, hesitated to defend a character they saw as flawed.
The corporation was also beginning to waver. It was not made up of the same people who had appointed Summers five years earlier. Conrad Harper, the only African-American member, had resigned in protest following the women in science comments and after Summers was given a $17,000 pay rise, and said Summers should resign too. There had been other changes. Some of the new members were sympathetic to the facultys complaints. In their private meetings, Summers defenders on the corporation still referred to FASs most implacable presidential critics as Hizbollah and their campaign as a jihad. But as the rebellion mounted, the corporation concluded that Harvard was becoming ungovernable as long as Summers remained president.
Late in the afternoon of Thursday February 9, Judith Ryan left her desk and walked to the university offices, where she handed in a motion for a second vote of no confidence. The administrative assistants said they were relieved that finally something was happening, Ryan told me. Daniel Fisher put in a separate motion, calling on the corporation to reassert effective governance and leadership of Harvard.
A faculty meeting was scheduled for February 28 but the vote never took place. On Wednesday February 15, Summers decided to quit. He told the corporation and left on Thursday afternoon for a long-planned skiing trip with his children in Utah.
He was going to lose the second no-confidence vote, said David Laibson, a Harvard economics professor and Summers supporter. The professional schools were not in the fray, but if they went on to hold their own meetings I would have forecast that the business school would be for him, the Kennedy School of Government for him, the law school weakly in support. The medical school was hard to predict, but the others would have been tied or against him.
Back in Harvard the following Tuesday, at around quarter past one, Summers sent an e-mail to the entire Harvard community saying that after considerable reflection he would step down at the end of June. I have reluctantly concluded that the rifts between me and segments of the arts and sciences faculty make it infeasible for me to advance the agenda of renewal that I see as crucial to Harvards future, he wrote. It was the shortest term served by a Harvard president for 144 years. Later, after a brief conference call with reporters, he walked outside Massachusetts Hall, his redbrick office in Harvard Yard, where a large group of students had gathered. Some chanted Five more years and Larry, Larry, Larry, and held placards reading Stay, Summers, Stay.
I just would ask all of you to remember as I do, Summers told them, that Harvards greatest days are in the future, and that we all, working together, can build that future.
After taking a years sabbatical, Summers plans to return to Harvard in 2007 as a University Professor, Harvards highest-ranking scholarly post, to teach and do research in economic policy. It is perhaps surprising he wants to remain at the scene of such rancour and division. There have been hints of a lucrative job at Citigroup, where his former mentor Robert Rubin is a director, or other consulting. But in December Summers, who is now divorced from his first wife, married Elisa New, a professor of English at Harvard, who is as bright and airy a figure, it seems, as Summers is robust and looming.
Harvard, meanwhile, is searching for Summers successor. The corporation, for its part, is trying to rebuild its reputation and authority, which were battered by the events of the past 12 months. Several people intimately involved in the universitys fundraising say that some important donors who supported Summers agenda have withdrawn promises of millions of dollars since Summers fall and are waiting to see which direction Harvard will now take. The search committee could select a woman, a first for Harvard. It could pick a president with a humanities background who would be more acceptable to parts of FAS. It is most likely to try to select a leader who will embrace Summers policies for change, or at least some of them, but will have the smoother persuasive skills and tact needed to put them into effect. Summers believes there is a danger of a second option - a president who will abandon his attempts at modernisation to make peace with his enemies in FAS. That, he believes, would be a tragedy.
Additional reporting by Rebecca Knight.
Posted at 2:52 PM · Comments (0)
A nation’s interests? Google tells all
May 14, 2006 2:29 PM
Copyright The International Herald Tribune
SATURDAY, MAY 13, 2006
MUMBAI, India Google lifted the veil this week on one of its best-kept secrets: which nations search for what.
Who looks up democracy most avidly? Who seeks out Allah or Christ most faithfully? Who types in “drugs” or “sex” most frequently?
No country’s secrets are spared.
Pakistanis look up “Danish cartoons” more avidly than anyone, according to Google. They also lead the rankings for “sex” - with their neighbor and nuclear rival India seldom far behind.
“In Pakistani society, sex is a taboo,” said Fatima Idrees, a project manager at the Pakistani affiliate of the Gallup International polling agency, adding that “curiosity and availability of the Internet may cause such behavior.”
The site introduced Thursday, Google Trends, measures how often particular phrases are searched for from computers in individual countries and cities. It short-lists the places with the highest absolute number of searches for, say, “cat food.” Then it picks the top 10 or so based on which places look up “cat food” much more than they do other things - for instance, “dog food.”
The Google Trends site is likely to generate a mix of consternation, embarrassment and laughter around the world. While Google emphasizes that its efforts to protect individuals’ privacy, the new site does nothing to protect the collective privacy of nations, if such a thing exists - the right of the British to conceal that they look up “handcuffs” most often, or the right of China’s leaders to hide that Mandarin ranks second only to English as the language used to look up “democracy,” or the right of other officials to hide that Arabic-speaking users rarely look up “democracy.”
“This is a fascinating project, effortlessly offering a glimpse into regional and cultural habits and differences that is otherwise nearly impossible to reproduce,” said Jonathan Zittrain, professor of Internet governance and regulation at Oxford University.
“This sort of feature reminds us that the Internet is global, yet not one undifferentiated mass,” he added. “Such measurement may help us understand the origin and movement of ideas as they sweep regions and the world.”
The Google rankings also generate a new kind of interest-level rating for politicians - as for countries, brands or anything else people look up. Now, the most vain (and most regularly searched) among us can check how many people are looking us up, where they are from - and, most important, whether they search more for us or for our rivals.
In India, suspicions that Sonia Gandhi is the power behind the throne of Prime Minister Manmohan Singh appear to be buttressed by search results. As the leader of India’s governing Congress Party, Gandhi gets about 50 percent more searches from Indian users than Singh does.
French users, meanwhile, shed light on France’s power struggles. Interior Minister Nicolas Sarkozy draws as many searches on his own as his rivals, President Jacques Chirac and Prime Minister Dominique de Villepin, combined.
For politicians with sagging poll numbers, Google’s index might be some consolation: it records how often people look you up, not whether they love you. To bring Machiavelli’s famous formulation into the age of Web surfing, it may be better for a prince - or president or prime minister - to be searched than loved, if he cannot be both.
President George W. Bush commands at least seven times as many searches in Russia as its own leader, Vladimir Putin. Among the French, Bush generates about 50 percent more look-ups than Chirac; among Iranians, Bush is searched twice as often as the Iranian president, Mahmoud Ahmadinejad.
Not everything on the site is a surprise. People in Boston and Minneapolis and in Halifax, Nova Scotia, lead the search for “mittens.” Dubliners top the list in “Guinness” searches. When it comes to looking up “dowry,” surfers in Pakistan and India are clear leaders.
Other findings are quirkier, and at times to difficult to explain.
Even though homosexuality is punishable by death in Saudi Arabia, the kingdom ranks No. 2 for searches for “gay sex,” behind the Philippines.
And consider the list of cities that most frequently look up “amour,” the French word for love. Paris, allegedly a romantic haven, is absent from the top 10. The top three berths went to Rabat, Morocco; Algiers and Tunis.
Other findings suggest the stirrings of a trend. Searchers for “Allah” come overwhelmingly from the Islamic world. But, in a sign of shifting social realities, the word is searched from the Dutch-language version of Google more avidly than from the Arabic-language one. Norwegian, French, Danish, Swedish and German sites also featured in the top 10 for “Allah” inquiries.
“Guns” is a word easy to associate with the United States. But the rising incidence of violent kidnappings and murders in Latin America has perhaps driven searchers to the Web for answers. Buenos Aires leads the cities index for “guns” searches, and Argentina as a whole outranks the United States, with Chile, Colombia, Mexico and Peru also in the top 10.
The Google system can also be queried one country at a time, to determine, for example, how frequently people in Afghanistan, Iran, Iraq and Saudi Arabia are looking up “democracy.” The Bush administration is unlikely to be pleased by Google’s reply for each of those countries: “Your terms - democracy - do not have enough search volume to show graphs.”
http://www.iht.com/articles/2006/05/12/business/google.php
Posted at 2:29 PM · Comments (0)
The woman who sparked years of death and terror: Nie Yuanzi says the anniversary of the Cultural Revolution must not be ignored
May 13, 2006 1:58 PM
Copyright The Times
May 12, 2006
NIE YUANZI is a frail, slightly stooped 85-year-old woman who lives with her two Persian cats in a tiny borrowed Beijing bedsit.
It is hard to imagine that this was the person who sparked the Cultural Revolution, which cost tens of thousands of lives and destroyed the livelihoods of millions. But she did. And while China’s leaders are suppressing any commemoration of the revolution’s 40th anniversary this month, Ms Nie has used her first interview with a Western journalist to argue that China must learn the lessons of that disaster to ensure that it never happens again.
“The Cultural Revolution was a disaster so huge that we can understand it only if we study it,” she told The Times
.
On May 16, 1966, the People’s Daily, the Communist Party mouthpiece, published a coded attack on Chairman Mao’s political rivals.
Ms Nie, then Communist Party secretary of Peking University’s philosophy department, said the attack inspired her to put up a poster charging that the elite school was under the control of the bourgeoisie. Mao then had the poster read out over national radio, effectively giving his blessing to attacks on those in authority and triggering a decade of chaos.
Students rose up to oppose “revisionists” — bureaucrats, academics, officials, leaders. Radical students calling themselves Red Guards paraded their teachers and professors though the streets in dunce caps. Government ministers were forced to kneel as they were beaten.
Many committed suicide to escape persecution. As the turmoil gained momentum, student factions turned on each other. Hundreds of thousands of Red Guards gathered beneath the Tiananmen rostrum in Beijing, waving the Little Red Book of Mao’s quotations and chanting “Long Live Mao” in slavish adulation.
Mao used the movement to regain the political initiative and supreme power that he had lost in the early 1960s after the disastrous famine caused by the Great Leap Forward.
His cry for permanent revolution, class struggle and the elimination of bourgeois culture pitted the radicals against “capitalist running dogs”. With virtual civil war raging in many provinces, the army was finally called in to restore order. Ms Nie was drawn into the circle of Chairman Mao, his wife, Jiang Qing, and the Gang of Four. But she was herself detained in 1968 as Mao moved to regain control over the Red Guards and she spent the next 17 years in jail.
She now inhabits a bizarre limbo, with no pension, deprived of her political rights, banned from publishing or speaking and relying on the kindness of friends for food and lodging.
She lives in a tiny flat lent to her by a former foe from Peking University. Her bed sits in a corner of a neat little room that serves as sitting room and study. Her cats curl up under the covers.
It is a far cry from the Cultural Revolution when to keep a pet was condemned as bourgeois.
“Chairman Mao used what I wrote to set alight the Cultural Revolution, but I never knew it would play such a huge role,” she said. “I was very happy at the time, but I did not understand the deeper significance.” She does now, and in the last years of her life the woman known to history as one of the notorious Five Leading Red Guards is consumed by a determination to ensure that later generations really understand what are officially known as “the ten years of chaos”.
She says she tried to curb the violence and now regards the turmoil as a terrible mistake that must not be repeated. Of her incarceration, she says: “I could have committed suicide but I felt I must stay alive so that people understand the Cultural Revolution.” China’s leaders, a generation just entering adulthood in 1966, disagree.
With the gap between China’s rich and poor growing steadily wider, and anger rising among tens of millions of impoverished peasants, they are acutely aware of the danger of another extremist movement. Thus they have ordered a complete news blackout on the anniversary next Tuesday.
Beijing has ignored calls for ceremonies to mark the anniversary and for a reassessment of Mao’s role. In closed-door meetings Zeng Qinghong, the Vice-President, has said that commemorations could upset stability and set back economic reform, and that reassessing Mao’s role is simply too difficult. Mandarins have banned all mention of the Cultural Revolution in the media.
Elderly Red Guards gathering for private commemorative meetings in Beijing are followed by the police. Ms Nie and other figures from those days are under surveillance.
The few courageous Chinese academics who quietly study the Cultural Revolution in the face of official disapproval share Ms Nie’s anxiety at the Government’s decision to draw a veil over those years.
They fear that China could be convulsed by something similar again, and that Beijing’s attempts to prevent it by suppressing discussion of the Cultural Revolution is misguided.
Xu Youyu, Professor of Philosophy at the Chinese Academy of Social Sciences, has long
argued that only by confronting its past can China hope to avoid a repetition of such a mass movement. He sees a rising nostalgia for an age that many Chinese, especially farmers and workers, remember now as a golden time when life was simple, jobs were secure, everyone was poor together and Mao was a godlike leader.
He said: “People think of the Cultural Revolution as a time of mass mobilisation and not as a disaster. If China does not review its past, then the Cultural Revolution — in a different guise — could happen again.”
China has been affected for centuries by movements that spiralled out of control: the Boxer Rebellion of 1900 when missionaries were massacred and the embassies in Beijing besieged by extremists who believed themselves immune to bullets; the 19th-century Taiping rebellion; even the 1989 student movement that culminated in the Tiananmen Square massacre.
Today anger simmers among Chinese at the widening gap between rich and poor, and at rising corruption. Last year more than four million people took part in 87,000 protests to voice discontent at such grievances as appropriation of land, corruption, taxes, lack of pensions and jobs.
Many remember the Cultural Revolution as an effective means to eliminate such inequities. Professor Xu said: “Mao appears as a banner for people who are discontented.”
The trouble is that young Chinese have no memory of the horrors of the Cultural Revolution. Nor are they allowed to remember.
History textbooks contain a scant chapter that refers briefly to Mao’s mistakes in attacking “capitalist roaders” but heaps most blame on the Gang of Four. No explanation is given for the deadly fanaticism that gripped ordinary Chinese during those years.
Yin Hongbiao, Professor of History at Beijing University, said: “If younger people lack education about this then such extreme behaviour could reappear.”
To review Mao’s part as instigator of the chaos, in which a generation lost their education, families waged war within the home and countless historical treasures were smashed, is a challenge too far for his successors. Establishing where the blame really lay would force a reassessment of the Communist Party that Mao brought to power in 1949. One academic said: “The credibility of the party relies on the legend of Mao.” Indeed, Mao reigned supreme with the Gang of Four — led by his wife — at his side until his death in 1976 brought the Cultural Revolution to a close. The official posthumous verdict is that Mao’s contribution was 70 per cent positive and 30 per cent negative.
Li Dongmin, the leader of all Beijing’s high-school Red Guards who stood with Mao to wave to the adoring masses from the gold-roofed Tiananmen rostrum, worries about that verdict. He said: “The truth must be told. If people cannot speak out then one day China could explode again.”
Mr Li’s life mirrors the evolution of China under Communist rule. A decade after shaking hands with Mao, he was jailed as an enemy of the revolution. Mr Li has evolved from Red Guard to counter-revolutionary, from revolutionary to sociology student, and now director of the Social Survey Institute of China.
Ms Nie has little left to lose and lays the blame for the Cultural Revolution at the feet of Mao and the Communist Party. “I thought we would build a democratic China, but today we are still ruled by a dictatorship,” she said.
THE REVOLUTION
1958 Chairman Mao started the Great Leap Forward, forming communes in the countryside to prove China’s self-reliance. About 30 million people died in the three years of famine that followed
1960 Mao retired from the front line of power while other leaders tried to put the economy back on its feet
1965 Mao began to reassert his authority. Newspaper articles placed at his behest started to hint that a resurgent bourgeoisie was trying to replace Marxism-Leninism — a thinly veiled hint that he was preparing to purge his enemies
1966-1976 Mao used the Cultural Revolution to reassert control, consolidating the personality cult surrounding him. Tens of thousands died, many committed suicide and the lives of millions were ruined. Students were sent into the countryside to work, creating the “lost generation” whose education was disrupted.
1971 Lin Biao, Mao’s chosen successor and head of the army, died in a mysterious plane crash in Mongolia after an attempted coup. Mao’s star began to wane
1976 The radical ultra-leftist chaos ended with Mao’s death on September 9 and the arrest of the Gang of Four on October 6
Posted at 1:58 PM · Comments (0)
A.M. Rosenthal (1922-2006): Ugly genius.
May 13, 2006 1:54 PM
Copyright Slate - May 11, 2006, at 7:50 PM ET
Given the richness of the material, would the life of Abe Rosenthal make a better sitcom or a tragedy? Think of casting Tim Allen to play his apish fits of newsroom fury for laughs in Oh, That’s Just Abe! Or of hiring George Clooney to trace Rosenthal’s heroic rise from sickly immigrant son of a Bronx house-painter to architect of the modern New York Times, and onward to his unhappy decline.
Justice demands both.
“A weird bastard, but a whiz of a newspaperman,” the Washington Post’s Ben Bradlee is quoted in Joseph C. Goulden’s 1988 book Fit To Print: A.M. Rosenthal and His Times.
Goulden continues where Bradlee begins:
Rosenthal is a shouter, a curser, a whiner; he keeps a “shitlist” in his head and can hold grudges for years. He is a small man physically but his rages are so violent that he intimidates persons half again his size.
Goulden’s bile goes on for 486 pages as he describes Rosenthal as weeper and egomaniac, womanizer and homophobe, chauvinist and tyrant. Other Times historians and memoirists avoid Goulden’s malice but confirm his portrait of Rosenthal as an insecure ranter who terrorized his staff and centralized all news judgment into his office.
Rosenthal joined the paper while still a college student, so the New York Times was the only adult life he had ever known as he approached the company’s mandatory retirement age of 65 in the mid-1980s. “Rosenthal gave every indication that he would not go willingly, nor would he seriously consider grooming a successor,” Susan E. Tifft and Alex S. Jones report in their history The Trust: The Private and Powerful Family Behind the New York Times. Some staffers speculated that he thought himself the paper’s “editor-for-life,” write Tifft and Jones. “People began comparing Rosenthal to King Lear.”
When finally pastured out to the Times op-ed page by Publisher Arthur Ochs Sulzberger at age 64, Rosenthal embarrassed the institution he worshipped with a frenetic, lampoonable column, “On My Mind,” which dragged on for a dozen years.
Yet the ranter rescued the Times from extinction, as today’s obituaries in the New York Times, Washington Post, and Los Angeles Times confirm. He published the Pentagon Papers and established investigative work as part of the Times mix. He “sectioned” the paper so he could expand arts, business, science, regional, and ad-friendly service sections. And he took the franchise national. As you opened your New York Times this morning or clicked to it on the Web, Abe Rosenthal’s mind reached out to greet yours.
As difficult as it may be for readers of Rosenthal’s column to believe, he possessed a literary gift. No less a stylist than Gay Talese paid homage to him in a 1980 interview, saying:
When I was on the Times, I thought there was only one man who could outwrite meA.M. Rosenthal. Rosenthal was better than me as a writer and as a reporter. I read everything he ever wrote, from his days as a correspondent in India and Poland and Japan, until he became metropolitan editor. A few years later I reread his clips to see if he was really as good as I thought he was. He was.
That quotation comes from City Room, Arthur Gelb’s 2003 Times memoir. When Rosenthal became metropolitan editor in 1963, he appointed Gelb his deputy, and Gelb complains of how stodgy, hidebound, and inhibited Times coverage was. To fully appreciate its blandness, go to a library and crank through a few reels of ancient Times microfilm.
Gelb writes:
Abe and I made it our first priority to free reporters of their perceived writing restrictions, encouraging them to try new approaches, to experiment with their own styles the way we both had tried to do. We pressed them to use similes, imagery, vivid descriptions and lively quotes, assuring them we would protect their stories against the itchy pencils of literal-minded copy editors.
Later, sensing progress, Rosenthal memoed his troops:
We do have quite a number of reporters who can write attractively, but some of them seem to have a kind of schizophrenia. When they’re writing a feature story, their typewriters come alive. But when they’re handling a straight news story, they seem to forget everything they ever knew about writing. I am not talking about turning news stories into feature stories but simply about giving news events some writing attention and the sense of immediacy that really is a part of the story.
The tragedyor comedyof Rosenthal’s teaching moment would soon come as he became the paper’s top editor in 1968. Having encouraged reporters to use their voice on local stories when he edited the metro section, he was quickly dismayed to find independent thinking, i.e., rank examples of editorializing and attitude, nearly everywhere he looked in the paper. A 1969 Rosenthal memo reproduced in Ed Diamond’s 1993 book Behind the Times: Inside the New New York Times states:
I get the impression, reading the Times, that the image we give of America is largely of demonstrations, discrimination, anti-war movements, rallies, protests, etc.
As someone who lived through that tumultuous year, America was largely a place of demonstrations, discrimination, anti-war movements, rallies, protests, etc. Imagining otherwise was fantasy.
Again and again, Rosenthal would say he was making crooked Times coverage “straight.” But some reporters sensed that Rosenthal and company weren’t promoting accuracy as much as they were imposing their political views on the paper’s stories, writes Diamond. For most of his 17 years at the helm, Rosenthal battled what he considered the left-liberal tendencies of many of his reporters. He growls about his Washington bureau reporters quoting congressional liberals more often or more favorably than conservatives. Reading a 1979 piece about the 10th anniversary of Woodstock, he recoiled at its description of the event as a symbol of “national, cultural, and political awakening.” He distrusted as partisan the reporting of Raymond Bonner and pulled him out of Central America. He gave an extraordinary mandate to freelancer Claire Sterling to connect the Soviets to organized terrorism, presumably because nobody inside the paper couldor wouldpursue the angle. “It was said, on the record and off the record, by the staff and by outside critics that Abe Rosenthal was a homophobe. Supposedly, the newsroom explicitly understood this, and as a result, the Times initially ‘ignored’ the AIDS epidemic,” Diamond writes.
Was Rosenthal a beast? When Sulzberger yanked him in 1986 and sent Max Frankel in, he offered this prayer: “Make the newsroom a happy place again.”
As a former boss of mine loves to say, journalism isn’t a Montessori school: Reporters should expect to get their heads cracked from time to time, and if they don’t like it they should build up calluses or wear protective headgear. But nothing in that maxim states that an editor hasn’t done his job unless he’s swung on a couple of dozen of his employees each day. Rosenthal somehow confused discipline with punishment, and as I read his obits today and thumbed through the Times histories I didn’t know whether to laugh or cry.
******
If you wear protective headgear, make sure to tip the helmet forward to cover your temples. Too many reporters wear their helmets on the back of their skulls like a halo or yarmulke. Send your cranial self-defense tips via e-mail to slate.pressbox@gmail.com.
Jack Shafer is Slate’s editor at large.
http://www.slate.com/id/2141630/?nav=tap3
Posted at 1:54 PM · Comments (0)
What Is the Best Work of American Fiction of the Last 25 Years?
May 12, 2006 5:19 PM
Copyright The New York Times
See the link below for the original article, along with links to the original reviews.
Early this year, the Book Review’s editor, Sam Tanenhaus, sent out a short letter to a couple of hundred prominent writers, critics, editors and other literary sages, asking them to please identify “the single best work of American fiction published in the last 25 years.” [Read A. O. Scott’s essay. See a list of the judges.] Following are the results.
THE WINNER:
Beloved
Toni Morrison
(1987)
* Review
THE RUNNERS-UP:
Underworld
Don DeLillo
(1997)
* Review
Blood Meridian
Cormac McCarthy
(1985)
* Review
Rabbit Angstrom: The Four Novels
John Updike
(1995)
* Review: ‘Rabbit at Rest’
(1990)
* Review: ‘Rabbit Is Rich’
(1981)
* Review: ‘Rabbit Redux’
(1971)
* Review: ‘Rabbit, Run’
(1960)
American Pastoral
Philip Roth
(1997)
* Review
THE FOLLOWING BOOKS ALSO RECEIVED MULTIPLE VOTES:
A Confederacy of Dunces
John Kennedy Toole
(1980)
* Review
Housekeeping
Marilynne Robinson
(1980)
(This book was not reviewed by The Times.)
Winter’s Tale
Mark Helprin
(1983)
* Review
White Noise
Don DeLillo
(1985)
* Review
The Counterlife
Philip Roth
(1986)
* Review
Libra
Don DeLillo
(1988)
* Review
Where I’m Calling From
Raymond Carver
(1988)
* Review
The Things They Carried
Tim O’Brien
(1990)
* Review
Mating
Norman Rush
(1991)
* Review
Jesus’ Son
Denis Johnson
(1992)
* Review
Operation Shylock
Philip Roth
(1993)
* Review
Independence Day
Richard Ford
(1995)
* Review
Sabbath’s Theater
Philip Roth
(1995)
* Review
Border Trilogy
Cormac McCarthy
(1999)
* Review: ‘Cities of the Plain’
(1998)
* Review: ‘The Crossing’
(1994)
* Review: ‘All the Pretty Horses’
(1992)
The Human Stain
Philip Roth
(2000)
* Review
The Known World
Edward P. Jones
(2003)
* Review
The Plot Against America
Philip Roth
(2004)
* Review
http://www.nytimes.com/2006/05/21/books/fiction-25-years.html?ei=5070&en=67e0f95810dcff14&ex=1147579200&pagewanted=print
Posted at 5:19 PM · Comments (0)
Photos from Ghana’s independence ceremony in 1957
May 12, 2006 11:02 AM
http://todayspictures.slate.com/20060511/2.html
http://todayspictures.slate.com/20060511/2.html
Posted at 11:02 AM · Comments (0)
Decline and fall of the Roman myth: We were �barbarians�, but early British civilisation outshone the Roman version, says ex-Python Terry Jones. We just lost the propaganda war
May 11, 2006 11:46 PM
Copyright The Sunday Times
Nobody ever called themselves barbarians. Its not that sort of word. Its a word used about other people. It was used by the ancient Greeks to describe non-Greek people whose language they could not understand and who therefore seemed to babble unintelligibly: ba ba ba. The Romans adopted the Greek word and used it to label (and usually libel) the peoples who surrounded their own world.
The Roman interpretation became the only one that counted, and the peoples whom they called Barbarians became for ever branded be they Spaniards, Britons, Gauls, Germans, Scythians, Persians or Syrians. And, of course, barbarian has become a byword for the very opposite of everything that we consider civilised.
The Romans kept the Barbarians at bay for as long as they could, but finally they were engulfed and the savage hordes overran the empire, destroying the cultural achievements of centuries. The light of reason and civilisation was almost snuffed out by the Barbarians, who annihilated everything that the Romans had put in place, sacking Rome itself and consigning Europe to the Dark Ages. The Barbarians brought only chaos and ignorance, until the renaissance rekindled the fires of Roman learning and art.
It is a familiar story, and its codswallop.
The unique feature of Rome was not its arts or its science or its philosophical culture, not its attachment to law. The unique feature of Rome was that it had the worlds first professional army. Normal societies consisted of farmers, hunters, craftsmen and traders. When they needed to fight they relied not on training or on standardised weapons, but on psyching themselves up to acts of individual heroism.
Seen through the eyes of people who possessed trained soldiers to fight for them, they were easily portrayed as simple savages. But that was far from the truth.
The fact that we still think of the Celts, the Huns, the Vandals, the Goths and so on as barbarians means that we have all fallen hook, line and sinker for Roman propaganda. We actually owe far more to the so-called barbarians than we do to the men in togas.
In the past 30 years, however, the story has begun to change. Archeological discoveries have shed new light on the ancient texts that have survived and this has led to new interpretations of the past. In Roman eyes the Celts may have lacked battle strategy, but their arms and equipment were in no way inferior to the Roman armys. In fact the Celts had better helmets and better shields.
When the Romans got to Britain they found another technological advance: chariots. It may seem odd to those of us brought up on Ben Hur that the Romans should have been surprised by chariots on the battlefield, but that was the case.
The Romans had chariots, but the Britons made significant design improvements and, as Julius Caesar noted, had thoroughly mastered the art of using them. So how come the Romans built roads and the Celts did not? The answer is simple. The Celts did build roads. The Romans-were-greatest version of history made the earlier roads invisible until recently. One of the best preserved iron age roads is at Corlea in Ireland, but it was not until the 1980s that people realised how old it is. It was known locally as the Danes road and generally assumed to be of the Viking period or later. It was not until the timbers were submitted for tree-ring dating that the truth emerged: they were cut in 148BC.
However, the really startling thing is that wooden roads built the same way and at the same time have been found across Europe, as far away as northern Germany. The Celts, it seems, were sophisticated road builders and the construction of these wooden roads was no mean feat of engineering.
Oak planks were laid on birch runners and they were built broad enough for two carts to pass each other. Whats more, Celtic road building is not necessarily predated by that of the Romans. The first important Roman road was the Appian Way, built in 312BC, but the so-called Upton Track in south Wales, a wooden road laid across the mudflats along the Severn estuary, dates back to the 5th century BC.
It is only now that historians are beginning to reassess the sophistication of Celtic science and engineering. From early times the Celts were the iron masters of Europe. A Celtic smith was regarded as a magician, a man who could take a lump of rock and transform it into a magical new substance a cunningly worked steel blade sharp enough to cut through bronze or ordinary iron.
The Celts mastery of metal technology also enabled them to develop sophisticated arable farms. We know they had iron ploughshares in Britain from about the 4th century BC because in a shrine at Frilford on the River Ock, near Abingdon in Oxfordshire a site that was occupied from about 350BC an iron ploughshare was found under one of the central pillars where it had been buried, perhaps as a votive offering. It is a fair guess that the temple was one of the first buildings to be erected there and that the iron ploughshare was offered at the time that its foundations were laid.
The Celts use of metal even allowed them to invent a harvesting machine. Historians did not believe that it could be true until bas-relief sculptures were discovered that apparently show just such a contraption. It was a sort of comb on wheels that beat off the ears of corn and deposited them in a container rather like the grass box of a lawnmower. A replica was built and tested in the 1980s.
It has been easy to underestimate Celtic technological achievements because so much has vanished or been misunderstood. Of course, it was thoughtless of the Celts not to leave us anything much in the way of written records they should have known that the lack of books putting forward their own propaganda would weight the evidence firmly in favour of the Romans.
Western societys enthusiasm since the renaissance for all things Roman has persuaded us to see much of the past through Roman eyes, even when contrary evidence stares us in the face. Once we turn the picture upside-down and look at history from a non-Roman point of view, things start to look very, very different.
Fegg Features Ltd and Sunstone Films 2006
From Terry Jones Barbarians by Terry Jones and Alan Ereira to be published by BBC Books on May 18 at 18.99. The book is available for 17.09 including postage from The Sunday Times BooksFirst on 0870 165 8585. Terry Jones Barbarians begins on BBC2 on Friday May 26
http://www.timesonline.co.uk/newspaper/0,,176-2168328,00.html
Posted at 11:46 PM · Comments (0)
Electrocuted, gassed, frozen, boiled alive: Christopher Silvester reviews Prisoners of the Japanese by Gavan Daws.
May 11, 2006 12:22 AM
Copyright The Telegraph
(Filed: 30/04/2006)
Perhaps the most shocking statistic of the Pacific war is that, of all the PoWs who died in captivity, “one in every three was killed on the water by friendly fire”. Japanese transport ships, known to the PoWs as “hellships”, were bombed and torpedoed in greater numbers towards the end of the war, just when they were ferrying large numbers of prisoners back to Japan - though, of course, many of the PoWs died of disease, starvation and thirst during or soon after such journeys.
Sometimes, the journeys lasted for months, interrupted by stop-overs in ports or transfers to other ships. Gavan Daws is puzzled by the obliviousness of American policy in this regard: “at every level up to and including [Gen Douglas] MacArthur himself, it was known that the Japanese were transporting PoWs in unmarked ships” yet “the US Navy went on sinking PoW transports until there were no more to sink”.
This is not the only charge he levels against MacArthur, much resented by American PoWs from the Philippines for his egotism: “MacArthur issued 142 communiqus, more than one a day, all vividly written and making wonderful reading, and in 109 the only man in uniform identified by name was MacArthur It was always MacArthur’s men, MacArthur’s flank, MacArthur. On Bataan they choked on the sound of the name.”
Daws describes the tactical errors that led the bulk of the US army in the Philippines to retreat into the Bataan peninsula (“One of the Japanese generals said it was like watching a cat go into a sack”) and remain there, under MacArthur’s orders to fight to the death, until starvation and disease caused their field commander to surrender. Had they surrendered sooner, many more might have been in better shape to survive the Bataan death march, during which collapsing or stumbling prisoners were shot or bayoneted - not that life beyond that was guaranteed.
MacArthur comes into the story again towards the end, when he grants immunity from prosecution for war crimes to the staff of Unit 731, based in Manchuria, which performed medical tests on PoWs and Asian civilians. Apart from being deliberately infected with disease and having healthy organs removed for medical practice, their victims were “burned with flame-throwers, blown up with shrapnel and left to develop gas gangrene, bombarded with lethal doses of X-rays, whirled to death in giant centrifuges, subjected to high pressure in sealed chambers until their eyes popped from their sockets, electrocuted, dehydrated, frozen, boiled alive”. Yet many of those scientists were able to pursue profitable post-war business careers.
Acutely aware of the power of race-hate, both from and towards the Japanese, Daws is equally fascinated by the tribalism among the PoWs. One source of puzzlement to him is that, in the holds of the hellships, “Americans - and only Americans - killed each other”. The worst of all these ships, Oryoku Maru, had “the highest number of officers in the holds, more than 1,000, more than one in four of them field-grade, and by far the highest proportion of officers to enlisted men, two to one”.
In the moral economy of the camps, it was only enterprising Americans who traded and lent rice to fellow prisoners (at interest) against future rations, thus luring them into nutritional bankruptcy. The Australians and the British wouldn’t permit it. Smokers were particularly vulnerable, as they would trade what little protein they had for nicotine.
An Australian academic, Daws has spent 10 years doggedly interviewing former PoWs and reading written testimonies. The result is a triumph, a masterpiece of combined storytelling and analysis, “the reverse side of official history”. Daws focuses on American PoWs because they were captured in almost every area invaded and occupied by the Japanese, but he also highlights the experience of the Dutch, who have been neglected in other studies. At the end of the war, Dutch colonial troops returned to the East Indies to fight Indonesian nationalists, lost, and were forced to resettle elsewhere: “It took them (and the Dutch civilian internees) the better part of 40 years to squeeze a token payment out of the country they had suffered for.”
How to remember, when others were too ready to forget, the PoWs? One group from the Philippines’ camps met yearly for a meal of “prisoners’ sukiyaki: rice, millet, maize, dried fish, grasshoppers”. Another group “had an old khaki undershirt from prison camp that they mailed round and round among themselves for years”. Daws deserves a campaign medal of his own. As well as offering sharp insights in admirably restrained prose, his every page packs an emotional wallop. Unforgettable.
http://www.telegraph.co.uk/arts/main.jhtml?xml=/arts/2006/04/30/bodaw22.xml&sSheet=/arts/2006/04/30/bomain.html
Posted at 12:22 AM · Comments (0)
THE PERFECT MARK: How a Massachusetts psychotherapist fell for a Nigerian e-mail scam.
May 11, 2006 12:15 AM
Copyright The New Yorker 2006-05-15
Late one afternoon in June, 2001, John W Worley sat in a burgundy leather desk chai reading his e-mail. He was fifty-seven an burly, with glasses, a fringe of salt-and-peppe hair, and a bushy gray beard. A decorate Vietnam veteran and an ordained minister, h had a busy practice as a Christia psychotherapist, and, with his wife, Barbara was the caretaker of a mansion on a histori estate in Groton, Massachusetts. He lived in comfortable three-bedroom suite in th mansion, and saw patients in a ground-floo office with walls adorned with images of Jesu and framed military medals. Barbara had bee his high-school sweethearthe was th president of his class, and she was th homecoming queenand they had fou daughters and seven grandchildren, whos photos surrounded Worley at his desk
Worley scrolled through his in-box and opened an e-mail, addressed to CEO/Owner. The writer said that his name was Captain Joshua Mbote, and he offered an awkwardly phrased proposition: With regards to your trustworthiness and reliability, I decided to seek your assistance in transferring some money out of South Africa into your country, for onward dispatch and investment. Mbote explained that he had been chief of security for the Congolese President Laurent Kabila, who had secretly sent him to South Africa to buy weapons for a force of lite bodyguards. But Kabila had been assassinated before Mbote could complete the mission. I quickly decided to stop all negotiations and divert the funds to my personal use, as it was a golden opportunity, and I could not return to my country due to my loyalty to the government of Laurent Kabila, Mbote wrote. Now Mbote had fifty-five million American dollars, in cash, and he needed a discreet partner with an overseas bank account. That partner, of course, would be richly rewarded.
Mbotes offer had the hallmarks of an advance-fee fraud, a swindle whose victims are asked to provide money, information, or services in exchange for a share of a promised fortune. Countless such e-mails, letters, and faxes are sent every year, with a broad variety of stories about how the money supposedly became available (unclaimed estate, corrupt executive, and dying Samaritan being only a few of the most popular). Worley, who had spent his adult life advocating self-knowledge and introspection, seemed particularly unlikely to be fooled. He had developed a psychological profiling tool designed to reveal a persons unique needs, desires and probable behavioral responses. He promised users of the test, The individuals understanding of self will be greatly enhanced, increasing the potential for a fulfilled and balanced life. And Worley was vigilant against temptation. Two weeks before the e-mail arrived, he had been the keynote speaker at his eldest granddaughters graduation from the First Assembly Christian Academy in Worcester, Massachusetts. He cautioned the students about Satan, telling them, Hes going to be trying to destroy you every inch of the way.
Still, Worley, faced with an e-mail that would, according to federal authorities, eventually lead him to join a gang of Nigerian criminals seeking to defraud U.S. banks, didnt hesitate. A few minutes after receiving Mbotes entreaty, he replied, I can help and I am interested. His only question was how Mbote had found him, and he seemed satisfied with the explanation: that the South African Department of Home Affairs had supplied his name. When Worley attributed this improbable event to Gods will, Mbote elaborated on the story to say that Worleys name was one of ten that he had been given, and that it had been pulled from a hat after much prayer by someone named Pastor Mark. (A more likely possibility is that his e-mail address was plucked from an Internet chain letter, which he received and passed on, that promised a cash reward from Microsoft to anyone who forwarded the letter to others.) In e-mails, phone calls, faxes, and letters during the ensuing weeks, Mbote laid out the plan: If Worley would pay up-front costs, such as fees to a storage facility where the cash was being kept, and possibly travel to South Africa to collect the money, he would receive thirty per cent, or more than sixteen million dollars.
Worley told Mbote that he lived his life with the utmost integrity and didnt want to jeopardize that. He also said that he couldnt fund the operation. (Though he would report nearly a hundred and forty thousand dollars in income in 2001, he had declared personal bankruptcy in the early nineties, had relatively little saved for retirement, and wanted to help his grandchildren through college.) No problem, Mbote answered; investors would provide up to a hundred and fifty thousand dollars for airfare and other expenses needed to move the money to the United States, while Worley would act as middleman and curator of the funds.
As promised, in late August, 2001, Worley received a check for forty-seven thousand five hundred dollars, purportedly from one such investor. It was from an account belonging to the Syms Corporation, the discount-clothing chain whose slogan is An Educated Consumer Is Our Best Customer. Worley was wary. He called the Fleet Bank in Portland, Maine, where the check had been drawn. The bank told him it was an altered duplicate of a check that Syms had paid to the Maryland office of an international luggage manufacturer.
Every swindle is driven by a desire for eas money; its the one thing the swindler and th swindled have in common. Advance-fee frau is an especially durable con. In an earl variation, the Spanish Prisoner Letter, whic dates to the sixteenth century, scammers wrot to English gentry and pleaded for help i freeing a fictitious wealthy countryman wh was imprisoned in Spain. Today, the co usually relies on e-mail and is often called a 41 scheme, after the anti-fraud section of th criminal code in Nigeria, where it flourishes (Last year, a Nigerian comic released a son that taunted Westerners with the lyrics I g chop your dollar. I go take your money an disappear. Four-one-nine is just a game. Yo are the loser and I am the winner.) Th scammers, who often operate in crime rings, ar known as yahoo-yahoo boys, because the frequently use free Yahoo accounts. Many o them live in a suburb of Lagos called Festa Town. Last year, one scammer in Festac Tow told the Associated Press, Now I have thre cars, I have two houses, and Im not looking fo a job anymore.
According to a statement posted on the Internet by the U.S. State Department, 419 schemes began to proliferate in the mid-nineteen-eighties, when a collapse in oil prices caused severe economic upheaval in Nigeria. The populationliterate, English-speaking, and living with widespread government corruptionfaced poverty and rising unemployment. These conditions created a culture of scammers, some of them violent. Marks are often encouraged to travel to Nigeria or to other countries, where they fall victim to kidnapping, extortion, and, in rare cases, murder. In the nineteen-nineties, at least fifteen foreign businessmen, including one American, were killed after being lured to Nigeria by 419 scammers. Until recently, Nigerian officials tended to blame the marks. There would be no 419 scam if there are no greedy, credulous and criminally-minded victims ready to reap where they did not sow, the Nigerian Embassy in Washington said in a 2003 statement. The following year, Nuhu Ribadu, the chairman of Nigerias Economic & Financial Crimes Commission, noted that not one scammer was behind bars. Last November, however, Ribadus commission convicted two crime bosses who had enticed a Brazilian banker to spend two hundred and forty-two million dollars of his employers money on a fictitious airport-development deal. (Prosecutions by U.S. authorities are rare; most victims dont know the real names of their partners, and 419 swindlers are adept at covering their tracks.)
Despite Nigerias efforts, the schemes have reached epidemic proportions, according to a publication by the U.S. Federal Trade Commission. The agency received more than fifty-five thousand complaints about them last year, nearly six times as many as in 2001. The increase is due in part to the Internet, which makes it easy for scammers to reach potential marks in wealthier countries. If we educate the public to the point where nobody falls for it, then theyll go out of business, Eric Zahren, a spokesman for the Secret Service, the lead U.S. agency in investigating advance-fee frauds, says. The agency estimates that 419 swindlers gross hundreds of millions of dollars a year, not including losses by victims too embarrassed to complain. In February, the son of a prominent California psychiatrist named Louis A. Gottschalkhe identified what turned out to be early signs of Alzheimers in Ronald Reagan after analyzing his speechfiled suit seeking to remove his father from control over a family partnership, claiming that Gottschalk had lost more than a million dollars to Nigerian scammers. Some victims try to pass along their losses. The former Iowa congressman Edward Mezvinsky, who had refashioned himself as an international businessman, was caught up in a 419 scam, and during the nineteen-nineties stole from his law clients, friends, and even his mother-in-law to cover his losses. He is serving more than six years in prison after pleading guilty to thirty-one counts of fraud.
Robert B. Reich, the former Labor Secretary, who has studied the psychology of market behavior, says, American culture is uniquely prone to the too good to miss fallacy. Opportunity is our favorite word. What may seem reckless and feckless and hapless to people in many parts of the world seems a justifiable risk to Americans. But appetite for risk is only part of it. A mark must be willing to pursue a fortune of questionable origin. The mind-set was best explained by the linguist David W. Maurer in his classic 1940 book, The Big Con: As the lust for large and easy profits is fanned into a hot flame, the mark puts all his scruples behind him. He closes out his bank account, liquidates his property, borrows from his friends, embezzles from his employer or his clients. In the mad frenzy of cheating someone else, he is unaware of the fact that he is the real victim, carefully selected and fatted for the kill. Thus arises the trite but none the less sage maxim: You cant cheat an honest man.
To see the complete article, please see the link below.
http://www.newyorker.com/fact/content/articles/060515fa_fact
Posted at 12:15 AM · Comments (0)
Vying to lead Japan into the post-Koizumi era
May 10, 2006 11:16 PM
Copyright The Financial Times - May 9, 2006
A sure way to stump a quiz fanatic is to ask the names of the
Japanese prime ministers who shuffled in and out of office in the 1990s. For the
record, there were seven of them, including Tsutomu Hata, a former bus
company employee who lasted all of two months. Yet not so many would
struggle to name Junichiro Koizumi, whose maverick style and
distinctive policy agenda have kept him at the helm of the world’s second largest
economy for five years. That makes him Japan’s third longest-serving
prime
minister since the second world war and one of the few to command a
genuine
presence on the world stage.
In that time, he has transformed the political landscape.
Eschewing
the sake-lubricated backroom deals of old, he has pursued his sometimes
quirky policy agenda on the floor of parliament and on the television
screens of Japanese homes.
By disregarding the usually accepted wish to form a consensus, he
has
privatised the gargantuan post office, sent troops to Iraq in the face
of
Japan’s pacifist constitution and articulated a market-led economic
agenda.
If he has had the luck to be prime minister when the economy finally
racked
up four years of growth, he has given the impression of making his own
good
fortune as well as riding it.
Now Mr Koizumi’s ride is almost over. In another act that
defies
convention, he has pledged – in spite of continuing high popularity
after a
landslide election victory last autumn – to make way for his
successor in
September. The problem is, no one knows who that will be.
The question of who comes after Mr Koizumi is important for the
world
as well as Japan. Economically, his successor must build on the
recovery to
tackle the problems of towering debt and an ageing population. Even
more
important, Japan’s next leader will have to seek a way out of the
diplomatic
dead end into which Mr Koizumi has led it. In the past five years,
relations
with China – now Japan’s biggest trading partner – as well as
those with
South Korea have almost broken down.
Those countries, former victims of Japan’s imperial
adventurism, have
ostracised Mr Koizumi largely because of his annual pilgrimage to
Yasukuni
shrine, a symbol of Japanese nationalism where millions of soldiers,
and
some convicted war criminals, are honoured. Few believe that Japan’s
next
leader would be wise simply to allow such bad feelings to fester.
With months to go, it is rash to predict who will run for head of
the
ruling Liberal Democratic party, and hence prime minister, let alone
who
will win. No one has officially declared a candidacy. Yet even at this
early
stage, the issues of how Japan should manage its economy and diplomatic
relations are shaping the contest. Kaoru Yosano, economy minister and
an
astute political observer, says: “I want to hear from all the
candidates
about their thinking first on diplomatic policy, including Asia, and
second
on fiscal discipline.”
For months, the frontrunner has been Shinzo Abe, at 51 considered
dashingly young for a would-be leader. With high popular appeal, Mr Abe
looks like a natural heir to Mr Koizumi. In opinion polls on prime
ministerial quality, Mr Abe, chief cabinet secretary, consistently
scores
above 40 per cent – until recently streaks ahead of rivals wallowing
in the
low single digits.
If this were a popular vote, Mr Abe would be almost home and dry.
But
it is the Liberal Democrats, not the people, who will pick Japan’s
next
prime minister.
In recent weeks, another potential candidate – Yasuo Fukuda,
from one
of the ruling party’s most famous families – has been climbing the
polls. In
one survey, the 69-year-old former chief cabinet secretary scored 14
per
cent, a respectable showing for a non-cabinet minister.
Other expected contenders, including Sadakazu Tanigaki, the
technocratic finance minister, and Taro Aso, the aristocratic foreign
minister, are still far behind. But they, or other dark-horse
candidates,
have ample time to make up distance.
Of the two issues on which the contest is likely to hinge,
diplomacy
is the more unpredictable. Mr Abe owes his popularity to his reputation
for
standing up for Japan’s national interest, particularly in dealings
with
North Korea. Until recently Mr Abe had stated firmly that the next
Japanese
leader had every right to follow in Mr Koizumi’s footsteps by paying
homage
at Yasukuni.
On one level, this sentiment taps into the national mood,
especially
among many younger Japanese who believe the country has apologised
enough
for events of 60 years ago. The time has come, they say, for Tokyo to
resist
Chinese bullying in, for example, the incursion of Chinese submarines
into
Japanese waters and a dispute over gas reserves in the East China Sea.
Yet what had appeared to be Mr Abe’s trump card could yet
become a
liability. Opinion polls show that, despite distrust of China, many
Japanese
are nervous about antagonising Beijing – a sentiment that has grown
since
last year, when anti-Japanese protests erupted in several Chinese
cities.
Tsuneo Watanabe, Japan’s most powerful media baron, is pressing
for a
more honest account of his country’s wartime history. And some
business
leaders have quietly begun lobbying against Mr Abe, whom they fear
could
worsen relations – and business opportunities – with China. Even
Washington,
which has refrained from criticising Mr Koizumi publicly, has started
to
express quiet concern about having a reputed hawk as Japan’s next
leader.
“We have to improve our relations with China and South
Korea,” says Mr
Yosano, the economy minister. “There are many difficulties but China
is a
reality, China is rising, and we have to face that.”
This change of mood plays into the hands of Mr Fukuda, a party
elder
who is believed to have better relations with Beijing and who has vowed
to
shun Yasukuni. In a recent speech calculated to polish his diplomatic
credentials, he called for updating the Fukuda Doctrine, a policy of
conciliation towards the rest of east Asia formulated 30 years ago by
his
late father Takeo, who was then prime minister.
In spite of an insistence from Mr Abe’s camp that Beijing
should not
be allowed to influence a domestic election, the China question is
already
having an impact. In a recent interview with the Financial Times, Mr
Abe
rowed back from his previous strong line on Yasukuni, saying: “I have
no
intention whatsoever to make a declaration that I will go to the
shrine.”
Akihiko Tanaka, a professor at Tokyo University, says China could
be
decisive in determining Mr Koizumi’s successor. Yet he argues that,
tone
aside, whoever comes next will need to move in broadly the same
direction.
“Part of the reason for the current abnormal relations stems from the
peculiar behaviour of Mr Koizumi, which in my opinion doesn’t reflect
Japan’
s broad national interest,” he says. “Whoever takes over, the
relationship
will become more normal.”
Prof Tanaka says Mr Abe has some juggling to do. “His challenge
is, on
the one hand, to keep his image of a disciplined conservative for his
original supporters, while assuring the many people in the middle of
the
road that he will not destroy Japan’s relationship with China or
South
Korea. The opponents of Abe will, of course, emphasise the latter
danger.”
Economic management is a less obviously explosive issue but is
just as
important. The main point of debate is how to repair Japan’s
finances, which
deteriorated badly in the 1990s as successive governments tried to
stimulate
recovery through massive borrowing. Even after five years of attempted
austerity from Mr Koizumi, the fiscal deficit runs at about 6 per cent
of
gross domestic product, while gross outstanding debt has swollen to 160
per
cent of GDP, the highest among industrialised nations.
Supporters of Mr Abe have tried to polarise the debate. They have
successfully cast potential opponents, particularly the earnest Mr
Tanigaki,
as fiscal hawks, in too much of a hurry to raise consumption tax.
Mr Abe’s followers have suggested Japan should pursue policies
to
maximise nominal growth – they estimate that 4 per cent a year is
attainable – and to cut spending, particularly within government.
Only after
that, they say, should the next administration resort to tax increases.
Mr Abe’s implied delay of a tax rise for several years enjoys
backing
from some economists, who say lifting consumption tax from its current
level
of 5 per cent could smother a nascent recovery in household spending. A
delay also looks astute ahead of the upper-house elections, in which
the LDP
must defend a thin majority.
Mr Tanigaki is shunning expedience. He recently dismissed a
suggestion
from people in the Abe camp that a tax rise of 3 percentage points
would be
sufficient, saying spending on social security to support the ageing
population would require more of an increase.
Mr Fukuda, a former oil executive, has yet to be drawn on the tax
issue but is a seasoned enough politician to avoid making unpopular tax
increases central to his campaign. Many business people also regard Mr
Fukuda as a more capable economic steward than Mr Abe, whom they tend
to
dismiss as economically illiterate – a charge that has also been
levelled at
Mr Koizumi, despite his strong economic record.
Apart from diplomacy and economics, an additional factor could
swing
events: generational politics. Mr Abe has begun to suffer from a
whispering
campaign that he is too young to become prime minister.
This stems partly from a fear among older politicians that their
generation could be passed over. But even supporters of Mr Abe suggest
he
might be wiser to wait, allowing a caretaker prime minister to guide
the
party through next year’s tricky elections and prepare the ground for
a tax
increase.
Ichiro Ozawa, the recently elected leader of the main opposition
Democratic Party of Japan, is a wily veteran whom some fear could run
rings
around the relatively inexperienced Mr Abe. Yet there is an equally
strong
argument that the Liberal Democrats would be more electable with a
charismatic leader rather than the fusty Mr Fukuda.
Mr Abe insists such talk is irrelevant. “I believe seniority
means
much less,” he says, emulating Mr Koizumi’s habit of attacking
Japan’s
sacred cows. “What matters is whether a person can bring results.”
The final twist in the leadership contest is that both Mr Abe and
Mr
Fukuda come from the same faction within the Liberal Democrats, which
would
normally preclude them from running against each other. One of them may
yet
bow out gracefully.
But Mr Koizumi, one of whose missions has been to smash what he
regards as the party’s corrosive factions, last week declared
factional
discipline dead. “If both men wish to run, nothing can stop them,”
he
opined.
If that happens, the spirit of Mr Koizumi’s iconoclasm will
have
outlasted him – by helping to determine the identity of his
successor.
Posted at 11:16 PM · Comments (0)
Smearing a Hero: Sad Revisionism Over ‘Hotel Rwanda’
May 10, 2006 6:14 PM
Copyright The Washington Post
Wednesday, May 10, 2006; A25
Paul Rusesabagina, the real-life hero of the movie “Hotel Rwanda,” is being denounced by some in his country as a traitor and a criminal. Perhaps he helped bring some of this abuse on himself, but none of it is deserved. As director and producer of the film, I’d like to explain.
To make a film of a true story you must compress timelines, create composite characters and dramatize emotions. When it came to making “Hotel Rwanda” — the story of how Paul Rusesabagina saved the lives of hundreds of people who took shelter from the 1994 genocide in the hotel he managed — I was obsessed with getting it right. The Rwandan episode was a slaughter of unimaginable horror and magnitude, yet I firmly believed I had found a story that showed that even in the midst of such horror the human capacity for good can triumph.
Before making the film, I grilled Rusesabagina and read all I could about his experience. I traveled to Brussels and Rwanda, and I met survivors from his hotel, some of whom still worked there. No one contradicted his story.
When the film was released, Rusesabagina was acknowledged as a hero not just by ordinary people across the United States and Europe but also by diplomats, politicians, journalists and Rwandan officials in diplomatic posts here. Rwandan expatriates gave testimony to the veracity of the film, as did people who had been in the hotel and who tearfully acknowledged Rusesabagina’s role.
Last May I had the chance to meet Rwandan Pesident Paul Kagame in Rwanda. I sat beside him as he and his wife and most of Rwanda’s parliament watched the movie. Afterward he leaned over to me and said the film had done much good around the world in exposing the horrors of the genocide. The next evening, I screened the film at Amahoro Stadium for some 10,000 people. It was the most emotional screening I have ever been at. I spent close to an hour afterward accepting thanks and congratulations.
But there was one empty seat at both screenings — the one reserved for Paul Rusesabagina. Two days before, as I waited for him to join me at the boarding gate in Brussels for the flight to Kigali, he called to say he had decided not to travel to Rwanda. On his speaking tours around the United States and Europe, he had begun to criticize Kagame’s government, saying that the last election in Rwanda, in which Kagame received 90.5 percent of the vote, was not democratic and that true peace would come to Rwanda only when it had an inclusive government. Because of his criticism, Rusesabagina said, he had been advised that it would not be safe for him. I could not persuade him to come.
Last fall his fears were borne out when Rwandan journalists and politicians began a smear campaign against him. On Oct. 28 a reporter for the Rwandan daily newspaper the New Times ran a long story on the “tru nature” of Rusesabagina, which quoted a former receptionist at the hotel as saying that he had saved only his few friends, and that he had charged people to stay in the rooms (a fact we had highlighted and explained in the film). Buried at the end of the piece was probably the true fear of the Rwandan authorities: that Rusesabagina planned to form a political party.
The newspaper attacks on Rusesabagina have steadily escalated. In November he received the Presidential Medal of Freedom from President Bush. Six days later a New Times editorial said he would “go down in the annals of history as a man who sold the soul of the Rwandan Genocide to amass medals.”
In February Kagame joined the campaign — cryptically at first. In a speech at Amahoro Stadium to mark National Heroes Day, Kagame said Rwanda’s heroes are not made in America, Europe or in Asia; cinema or film stars have no place on the list of national heroes. He went on to make several veiled comments about “a manufactured hero.”
A few days later Rwandan Radio ran a two-hour live talk show about Rusesabagina. The speakers included genocide survivors and, sadly, some old friends of Rusesabagina’s. Francois Xavier Ngarambe, the president of Ibuka, the umbrella body of genocide survivors’ associations, ended the show by claiming: “He has hijacked heroism. He is trading with the genocide. He should be charged.”
I called Rusesabagina in Brussels to discuss what was going on. He said he saw the smear campaign as confirmation of his previous fears and of his reservations about the Kagame regime. His new autobiography, “An Ordinary Man,” will only make things worse, as in his last chapter he writes, “Rwanda is today a nation governed by and for the benefit of a small group of elite Tutsis… . Those few Hutus who have been elevated to high-ranking posts are usually empty suits without any real authority of their own. They are known locally as Hutus de service or Hutus for hire.”
On April 6, the 12th anniversary of the genocide, Kagame launched his first attack on Rusesabagina, saying, “He should try his talents elsewhere and not climb on the falsehood of being a hero, because it’s totally false.” I pray that this situation can be resolved. The millions who saw “Hotel Rwanda” and received its message of hope ought to know that they were not duped.
I understand Paul Rusesabagina’s desire to foster inclusiveness in Rwanda. I understand, as well, Kagame’s legitimate fear that the country has suffered too much, too recently, to allow divisions to be fostered. There are many politicians here and abroad who could mediate this clash “Hotel Rwanda 2” is a sequel I never want to make.
Terry George was co-writer, director and producer of the film “Hotel Rwanda.”
2006 The Washington Post Company
Posted at 6:14 PM · Comments (0)
Why Freud Matters
May 9, 2006 11:21 PM
Copyright The Wall Street Journal
May 5, 2006; Page A16
Sigmund Freud, one of the crucial authors and thinkers of the 20th century, was born in Moravia in 1856, and taken to Vienna as a child by his Jewish father and mother. Only a few professions were open to Jews in 19th-century Vienna, one of them being medicine. Freud consequently received a medical degree in 1881, and then wrote on hysteria. He would become the founder of modern psychoanalysis, among his many other achievements.
Freud died in England in 1939, after being ransomed from the Gestapo subsequent to the Nazi takeover in Austria. It is now exactly 150 years since his birth and two-thirds of a century since his death, and there is still no general agreement on the nature of his achievement. Yet 20th-century literature truly begins with Freud.
* * *
Freud was so prolific that any choice of his most significant books is somewhat arbitrary, but certainly they would include “The Interpretation of Dreams” (1900), “The Psychopathology of Everyday Life” (1901) and “Three Contributions to the Theology of Sexuality” (1905), in his earlier phase. As he developed and refined his theories, Freud composed a series of “cultural” studies including “Totem and Taboo” (1912), “Civilization and Its Discontents” (1930) and “Moses and Monotheism” (1939). Though these continue to be influential, they are not as vital as what seems to me his strongest works: “Beyond the Pleasure Principle” (1920), “Inhibitions, Symptoms, Anxiety” (1926), and the posthumously published, misleadingly titled “An Outline of Psychoanalysis” (1940).
Freud argued that psychoanalysis was a science, which in time would make a substantial contribution to biology. Almost no one now agrees with that hope, which was aptly dismissed by the brilliant Viennese Jewish satirist Karl Kraus, who observed that only the most fantastic elements in psychoanalysis were true. Even more memorably, Kraus wounded Freud by asserting that psychoanalysis was itself the disease of which it purported to be the cure.
Increasingly we have come to see that Freud has more in common with the moral essayist Michel de Montaigne than he does with the scientist Charles Darwin. To be, as Freud was, the Montaigne of the 20th century, was to be equal to the other major writers of that era: James Joyce, Marcel Proust, Franz Kafka, just as Montaigne himself was the peer of Cervantes and of Shakespeare. I find the phrase, “the literary Freud,” to be a redundancy, just as it would sound odd to speak of “the literary Joyce” or “the literary Proust.”
Freud maps our minds by mapping his own, which was Montaigne’s procedure. The philosopher Ludwig Wittgenstein, who disliked both Freud and Shakespeare, sought to dismiss Freudian thought as “a powerful mythology,” but that was accurate discernment, and not dismissal. Montaigne’s art of telling the truth about the self is akin to Freud’s artful mythology of the self, which he intended as truth. But is it? Yes and no, no and yes. Wittgenstein emphasized the “no” while nevertheless admiring Freud as a writer who had “something to say.” One could change that to: “everything to say.” Freud is interested in virtually everything, and teaches his reader very nearly all that can be taught.
That a supposed scientist should become a universal author is a strange fate, but then Freud, writing to a friend, described himself as a conquistador. He also identified himself, rather darkly, with Macbeth, and with Hannibal of Carthage, nemesis of Rome. These are rather aggressive personae and reflect Freud’s agonistic ambitions more than his extraordinary dignity of being. For years, I have meditated upon Freud’s self-revelation in a thought he added to an interleaved copy of “The Psychopathology of Everyday Life”:
“Rage, anger, and consequently a murderous impulse is the source of superstition in obsessional neurotics: a sadistic component, which is attached to love and is therefore directed against the loved person and repressed precisely because of this link and because of its intensity. — My own superstition has its roots in suppressed ambition (immortality) and in my case takes the place of that anxiety about death which springs from the normal uncertainty of life.”
The second use of “superstition” here is a complex irony. Freud insists he does not fear dying, because his quest is to become a memorial inscription never to be effaced. The undersong is Freud’s moral injunction that each of us needs to accept “reality-testing,” by making friends with the necessity of dying.
As a secular moralist, Freud rejected all transcendentalisms, but his worship of the reality principle might be interpreted as a rather skewed vestige of Platonism. Essentially, Freud’s ambition was to become a comprehensive influence upon futurity, while insisting that he himself had evaded all influence. He went so far as to deny that he ever had read Schopenhauer and Nietzsche, which manifestly is unlikely. But his influence upon the 20th century was extraordinary, though it begins to wane now in the 21st, when organized superstitions are at war throughout the world.
Freud’s triumph was that millions of people who never read him nevertheless internalized his categories, a phenomenon still prevalent among us. We unthinkingly think we are governed by the psychic agencies he invented: id, ego, superego, which necessarily are merely useful fictions, and not components of the self. Again, we tend to believe we possess libido, a particular energy that fuels sexual desire, but libido is another fiction or Freudian metaphor. My favorite speculation on Freud’s influence is to wonder what would have happened had he decided we had “destrudo” as well as libido. He briefly entertained the idea of destrudo as fuel for the Death Drive, just as libido energized Eros, but then rejected the notion. Had he settled upon destrudo, would we not now go about, on our more self-destructive days, muttering that our destrudo was raging within us?
Freud was unhappy that psychoanalysis was captured by the American medical profession, since he loathed both the United States (which he visited once, briefly) and most physicians. He favored lay analysis, to be carried on by persons of profound learning and culture. In every way, Freud was an elitist, who feared the anti-Semitic violence always latent in the lower classes of Europe. A professed atheist, Freud saw himself as another Moses, one who would found a new Judaism in psychoanalysis.
Freud today seems both archaic and persistent. His art of therapy ebbs away, replaced by psychic chemistry; and psychoanalysis is a conceptual concern largely to social scientists and to whatever few humanists still huddle among us. Freud liked to joke that he had invented psychoanalysis because it had no literature, but literature itself clearly informed Freud. He owed Shakespeare so much that he fiercely adopted the lunatic thesis that the Earl of Oxford had written all of Shakespeare. Only a great nobleman could have conceived Hamlet and Macbeth, who haunt all of Freud’s work. It was unacceptable that the son of a Stratford glovemaker should have been Freud’s authentic forerunner. Prestige, both social and professional, mattered immensely to Freud.
Sigmund Freud persists today, but not as a scientist or even as a healer. The late Francis Crick observed that Freud was a Viennese physician who wrote a very good prose style, but while funny enough that is hardly adequate. Freud matters because he shares in the qualities of Proust and Joyce: cognitive insight, stylistic splendor, wisdom. That remains all on earth we can hope to study and to know.
Mr. Bloom’s most recent book is “Jesus and Yahweh: The Names Divine” (Riverhead, 2005).
http://online.wsj.com/article/SB114679816691644646.html
Posted at 11:21 PM · Comments (0)
A novel approach: David Mitchell on Fiction
May 9, 2006 12:23 PM
Booker Prize-nominated author David Mitchell has established a career on writing genre-blending, postmodern fiction. His latest work, however, takes him into territory that is even more challenging - his own childhood.
By 2004, when Cloud Atlas earned David Mitchell a measure of international celebrity, he’d established himself as an uncompromising maverick, adept at leapfrogging between eras, continents, narrators and genres in the space of a single book. While many tyro novelists cut their teeth by writing closet autobiography, Mitchell’s head-spinning 1999 debut, Ghostwritten, inhabited the minds of a nuclear expert, a Hong Kong-based investment banker, a Japanese cult member, a disembodied consciousness in Mongolia and a St Petersburg art thief.
His equally rumbustious, Man Booker Prize-nominated follow up, number9dream, was a science-fiction romp through Tokyo’s mafia underbelly. Cloud Atlas was another composite of interlocking episodes, taking in a 19th-century sea journal, a pulp thriller, a vanity publisher’s memoir and the interview-confession of a clone. Mitchell, who studied a master’s degree in postmodern fiction, seemed dedicated to the proposition that - at least as a source of autobiographical energy - the author is dead.
Which is why Mitchell’s fourth novel will surprise even those well accustomed to his chameleonism. Black Swan Green spans only 13 months, has one narrator and barely travels beyond the eponymous town. Set in 1982, it’s told by Jason Taylor, a 13-year-old poetry fiend and stammerer who, the 37-year-old Mitchell happily admits, is loosely based on his younger self.
Mitchell concedes it’s as if he’s finally written his first novel. ‘I really didn’t want to start out with an autobiographical novel, especially one with themes fairly under the skin, like the stammer.’ But the preoccupations of his youth - his stammer, his fear of being a social pariah and his secret awakening to the thrill of poetry - continued to niggle away. ‘I really was beating around the bush for the first three books.’
His high-concept extravaganzas were not, he insists, postmodern attempts to toy with novelistic conventions. ‘It’s not that I see myself as a guerilla novelist. It’s simply that I want to write the kinds of things I like reading and I tend not to enjoy reading a book that’s like many others I’ve read.’
Even with Black Swan Green, Mitchell resists thinking in genre terms, flinching at a description of it as a coming-of-age novel. ‘It’s a year before the coming-of-age novel. The real shifts in Jason’s personality will be in the year after Black Swan Green.’
Jason is an inconspicuous family member, his home life dominated by the slugging matches of his self-regarding parents. At school, he takes pains to avoid ‘S’ and ‘N’ words, which provoke his stammer, while attempting - often futilely - to negotiate the cutthroat politics of the schoolyard. Mitchell wasn’t as severely bullied as Jason.
‘I was more diplomatically skilled and managed to survive better than Jason did, by being a bit more able than he is to project the right image at the right times.’ But, like Jason, he never outed himself as a poet. ‘It was very much a guilty pleasure,’ he says.
He published poems in the local parish magazine under the pen-name James Bolivar, after Venezuelan firebrand Simon Bolivar. (Jason writes as Eliot Bolivar, after poet T.S. Eliot.) Mitchell’s stammer is now barely discernable, but he insists it’s still there and doubts it will ever go away. ‘I’ve read somewhere, about an alcoholic, that you never become an ex-alcoholic - you only become a teetotal alcoholic. It’s the same with stammering.’ But at Jason’s age, Mitchell’s stammer was ‘absolutely mortifying. You have no idea how totally it effects the way you interact, or fail to interact, with the world. If someone offers you tea or coffee and you want coffee, you may well have to ask for tea because you’re afraid in advance you won’t be able to say coffee.’
Mitchell looked to writing as a way of compen-sating for his fractured speech, seeking a voice unimpeded by stammering. ‘My speech impediment was my route to interiorisation. It leads to the hopeful conclusion that the things we feel inhibit and bind us are actually our signposts.’
For Black Swan Green, he zeroed in on age 13 because it’s a time when ‘you’re not a child but you’re not a teenager yet. The strategies you have access to as a child are obsolete. They’re politically unwise to employ. Yet you don’t yet have the embryonic adult strategies to fall back on to negotiate the world you have as a later teenager.’
Quiet and unassuming, Black Swan Green is arguably Mitchell’s most mature work. ‘I perhaps know a little bit more now about keeping your eye on the ball of what’s good for the book, rather than what’s experimental for its own sake. As a young writer, it’s one of the traps you fall into. I think I might have come perilously close.’
But Black Swan Green is no less architecturally solid than its more ambitiously plotted precursors. Asked about structure, Mitchell draws an analogy to escapology: the firmer the straightjacket, the more ingenious the feat required to get loose. He wanted every chapter to qualify as a self-contained short story. ‘Short stories have a background white noise that makes you believe the world is a lot larger than the 10, 15, 20 pages of the story. My aspiration was to sink the white noise in the background of each chapter, so they would form a background to the novel.’ Mitchell obliquely wrote
his mission statement into the book by gifting his hero a set of 13 dinosaur postcards. Each postcard shows a different habitat but lined up together, they form a continuous landscape.
Occupying various habitats has also been a part of Mitchell’s life, having lived in England, Japan, Ireland and now the Netherlands. After graduating from university, England was undergoing a recession and he struggled to find work. Turned down by McDonald’s, Mitchell worked in a bookshop for a year.
Then his Japanese girlfriend’s visa expired and he moved to Japan, passing the next eight years teaching English in Hiroshima. There, at 25, he started taking the business of words seriously. He sold his television and began turning down invitations to parties.
‘I’d seen people 10, even 20 years older than me, still there and still drifting. I realised if I was serious about trying to make writing my life, I had to get focused.’ Without the money for a laptop, Mitchell wrote his first novel on file cards. ‘I read that’s how [Vladimir] Nabokov did it.’ His first manuscript didn’t see the light of day,
but his next effort, Ghostwritten, won him a three-book deal with Sceptre and was trumpeted by lauded English writer A.S. Byatt as ‘the best first novel I have ever read’. When the yen rose to prohibitive heights, Mitchell packed in his teaching job and settled on the Irish coast with his Japanese wife, lured by Ireland’s generous tax regime for writers.
Late last year, he relocated his family to the Netherlands to research a novel about a Dutch trading outpost in turn-of-the-19th-century Japan. Had he won the Booker Prize for Cloud Atlas in 2004 - Booker-watchers claimed he enjoyed better odds than any other contender in the prize’s history - Mitchell would only now be wrapping up the winner’s obligatory ‘year or two on a publicity treadmill’. He saw it as a camouflaged blessing when Alan Hollinghurst’s The Line of Beauty scooped the prize, allowing him to return to work on Black Swan Green. ‘While the Booker is very good for the book, it’s not necessarily good for the author.’
Even at its most difficult, Mitchell never finds writing gruelling. ‘I’m by nature a fairly lazy and ill-motivated person, and if I didn’t believe the lows were merely foothills to future highs, I don’t think I could motivate myself to stick at it. The lows aren’t really lows. The lows are when you’ve spent about three weeks on a passage and actually you’ve been going down a blind alley, except that through that pile of crap, you’ve got to a starting point for the next time, when you get it right.’
On David Mitchell’s bookshelf:
J.D. Salinger’s short stories
‘They’re imperishable and immaculate master-classes in fiction.’
Anton Chekhov’s short stories
‘If I were able to say why they are so good then you wouldn’t need to read them.’
Mikhail Bulgakov’s The Master and Margarita
‘It’s ingenious, playful and moving, and that’s a rare combination in a book.’
Henri Alain-Fournier’s Le Grand Meaulnes
‘It stays with you all your life, the same way that your own youth does.’
Neil Gaiman’s Coraline
‘It’s the one book I’ve read about which the word ‘unputdownable’ is apt.’
Posted at 12:23 PM · Comments (0)
STICK OUT YOUR TONGUE: Tibet has a startlingly cruel side that belies its picturesque beauty.
May 9, 2006 12:13 PM
Copyright The Washington Post
Sunday, May 7, 2006; Page BW15
Review of STICK OUT YOUR TONGUE
By Ma Jian
Translated from the Chinese by Flora Drew
Farrar Straus Giroux. 93 pp. $16
When Westerners think of Tibet, they often visualize austere holy men and hardy peasants in cracked leather headgear; they picture lush hidden valleys or the snow-capped vistas of the Himalayas. There, nourished on yak butter and the pure, thin air of the mountains, people live out long lives of simplicity and serenity, and they welcome death itself with gentle courtesy.
It’s certainly a pretty postcard, and one that anybody worn down by industrial civilization occasionally likes to pick up and daydream over. But if Ma Jian’s Stick Out Your Tongue is to be believed, modern Tibet is rather more like Tobacco Road than Shangri-La.
These short stories — vignettes, really — disclose a sad, inbred land of loneliness and desperation. A dead 17-year-old girl, pregnant with an unborn fetus, is torn and chopped to pieces by the two brothers who had shared her. A woman suckles her son until he is 14, then sleeps with him and bears a daughter; the daughter in turn is eventually forced to submit to her father’s sexual hunger. In one story, a minor character mentions in passing that an uncle had once traveled to the city of Saga to learn the black arts. During an initiation ceremony, “the Living Buddha Danba Dorje ripped out his uncle’s eyes, pulled out his tongue, chopped off his hand and offered the severed parts to Avalokitesvara, the Bodhisattva of Compassion.”
Sometimes the narrator of these stories appears to be Ma Jian himself, recalling his experiences in Tibet after fleeing the oppressions of his native China. At other times, we are inside the mind of a Tibetan schoolboy lost in the mountains or of a very young girl facing ritual sex, in public, with a repulsive and ancient priest. The author describes everything, no matter how horrible, with unnerving calmness, whether it’s eating congealed animal blood or almost touching the dried-out, wafer-thin body of a woman hung like a piece of parchment on the wall of a hut.
In the afterword to this English translation — which doesn’t read like a translation at all, thanks to Flora Drew — the author tells us that, back in 1985, Stick Out Your Tongue was banned by the Chinese government “as a vulgar and obscene book that defames the image of our Tibetan compatriots.” The announcement then went on to say that “Ma Jian fails to depict the great strides the Tibetan people have made in building a united, prosperous and civilised Socialist Tibet.” As usual, the censors got it wrong. If anything, Ma Jian reveals the harshness of all too ordinary Tibetan life and, quite simply, how “dehumanising extreme hardship can be.” The culprit doesn’t seem to be socialism or modernity so much as ancient traditions that treat the human body and sometimes human life with contempt. That said, Ma Jian also notes that Lhasa itself has now “become a dirty, polluted city like any other you might find in China, with karaoke bars and massage parlours and gaudy neon signs.”
Can’t human beings ever get the balance right, even in the holiest lands? Now and again, Ma Jian gives us glimpses of something better: “In the grasslands, if you have a rifle, some gunpowder, a horse and a dog, you can feed on gazelles and wild deer, and sleep for free under the stars.” But before long we cast aside these pastoral interludes and are back to a world where the narrator, like some latter-day W. Somerset Maugham, hears stories of lustful wives impaled on pillars while trying to steal a holy relic made of beaten gold.
Obviously, an American reader can hardly be certain that Stick Out Your Tongue offers an accurate portrait of the Tibetan peasantry. Perhaps Ma Jian, like one of our own Southern Gothic writers, hascreated a fantasy Tibet of incest, depravity and madness. But he himself rightly notes that to idealize any people is to deny them their humanity. These powerful pages, so convincing in what appears an unflinching naturalism, are hard to shake from one’s memory and remain, if nothing else, testimony to the storytelling artistry of Ma Jian. Still, it’s little wonder that the pieces were once suppressed and that their author now lives in London. ?
Posted at 12:13 PM · Comments (0)
Students put China’s spin on Web
May 9, 2006 10:29 AM
By Howard W. French
Copyright The New York Times
MONDAY, MAY 8, 2006
SHANGHAI To her fellow students, Hu Yingying appears to be a typical undergraduate, plain of dress, quick with a smile and perhaps possessed of a little extra spring in her step, but otherwise decidedly ordinary.
And for Hu, in her second year at Shanghai Normal University, coming across as ordinary is just fine, given the parallel life she leads. For several hours each week she repairs to a little-known on- campus office crammed with computers, where she logs on, unsuspected by other students, to help police her university’s Internet forums.
Once online, following suggestions from professors or older students, she introduces politically correct or innocuous themes for discussion.
Recently, she says, she started a discussion of which celebrities make the best role models, a topic suggested by a professor as appropriate.
Politics, even university politics, are banned on university bulletin boards like these. Hu says she and her fellow moderators try to steer what they consider negative conversations in a positive direction with a well- placed comment of her own. Anything they deem offensive, she says, they report to the university’s Web master for deletion.
During some heated anti-Japanese demonstrations last year, for example, moderators intervened to cool nationalist passions, encouraging students to mute their criticisms of Japan and discouraging any bellicose remarks.
Part traffic cop, part informer, part discussion moderator - and all done without the knowledge of her fellow students - Hu is a small part of a huge effort in mainland China to sanitize the Internet. For years, China has had its Internet police, reportedly including as many as 50,000 state agents who are online, blocking Web sites, erasing commentary and arresting people for what is deemed anti-Party, or anti-social, speech.
But Hu, one of 500 students at her university’s newly bolstered, student-run Internet monitoring group, is a cog in a different kind of machine, an ostensibly voluntary one that the Chinese government is mobilizing to help it manage the monumental task of censoring the Web.
In April, that effort was named “Let the Winds of a Civilized Internet Blow,” and is itself part of a broader “socialist morality” campaign started by the Chinese leadership to reinforce social and political control, known as the Eight Honors and Disgraces.
Under the Civilized Internet initiative, Internet service providers and other companies have been urged to purge their servers of offensive content, ranging from pornography to anything that smacks of overt political criticism or dissent.
The Chinese authorities say that more than two million supposedly “unhealthy” images have already been deleted under this campaign by various mainland Internet service providers, and more than six hundred supposedly “unhealthy” Internet forums were shut down.
These deletions are presented as voluntary acts of corporate civic virtue, but have a coercive aspect to them, because no company would likely risk being singled out as a laggard.
Having started its own ambitious Internet censorship efforts, or “harmful information defense system,” long before the latest government campaign, Shanghai Normal University, where Hu monitors her fellow students, is promoting itself within the education establishment as a pioneer.
Although most of its students know nothing of the university’s Internet monitoring efforts, the leaders of Shanghai Normal conducted seminars last week for dozens of other Chinese universities and education officials on how to emulate their success in taming the Web.
University officials turned away a foreign reporter, however, making clear that the university does not wish to publicize its activities more broadly. “Our system is not very mature, and since we’ve just started operating it, there’s not much to say about it,” said Li Ximeng, deputy director of the university propaganda department. “Our system is not open for media, and we don’t want to have it appear in the news or be publicized.”
For her part, Hu beams with pride over her contribution toward building what the government calls a “harmonious society.”
“We don’t control things, but we really don’t want bad or wrong things to appear on the Web sites,” she said. “According to our social and educational systems, we should judge what is right and wrong. And as I’m a student cadre, I need to play a pioneer role among other students, to express my opinion, to make stronger my belief in Communism.”
While the larger Civilized Internet campaign all but requires companies to step forward and demonstrate their vigilance against what the government deems harmful information, the new censorship drive on college campuses shows greater subtlety and some might say greater deviousness, too.
It is here that the government is facing perhaps its most serious challenge: how to orient and maintain control of young people’s thoughts in a world of increasingly free and diverse information. And the answer relies heavily on stealth.
For one thing, interviews with numerous students at a sprawling and well-manicured campus of Shanghai Normal University showed that few knew anything about the student-run monitoring, and none of those who had heard of it had imagined that such a large number of students had been enlisted for it.
“It’s true there are some bad things on the Internet, but they shouldn’t overdo it,” said one student, Liao Xiaojing. “Five hundred is too many.”
Others expressed more alarm. “Five hundred members sounds unbelievable,” said a male undergraduate who gave his name only as Zhu. “It feels very weird to think there are 500 people out there anonymously trying to guide you.”
As they try to steer discussion on university bulletin boards toward what the authorities consider to be a healthy direction, the monitors pose as otherwise ordinary undergraduates, in a bid for greater persuasive power.
Even topics that would seem to outsiders totally devoid of political interest merit the monitors’ intervention. When one recent discussion about the reported sale online of a video showing the torture of a cat grew heated, with some commentators urging harsh punishment or even death to the animal abusers, and others saying the video should be sold to the Japanese, because of their supposed fondness for perverse material, several monitors jumped in and began talking about the need to develop the Chinese legal code to handle such matters.
Just as remarkable, though, is how the monitors themselves have been convinced that they are not engaging in censorship, or exercising control over the free speech of others. In interviews with five of the monitors, each initially rejected the idea that they were controlling expression, and occasionally even spoke of the importance of free speech.
“Our job consists of guidance, not control,” said Ji Chenchen, 22, majoring in travel industry studies. “Our bulletin board’s character is that of an official Web site, which means that it represents the university. This means that no topics related to politics may appear.”
A classmate, Tang Guochao, 20, spoke in fervent terms about what he and his fellow monitors were doing. “A bulletin board is like a family, and in a family, I want my room to be clean and well-lit, without dirty or dangerous things in it.”
Chinese efforts to censor and control the Internet in the broader society have often come up short against the curiosity and inventiveness of ordinary Web surfers, who constantly develop ingenious ways to find content that is banned and to discuss controversial topics.
Several students at Shanghai Normal University said they expected the same thing to happen there.
“I don’t think anybody can possibly control any information in Internet,” said Ji Xiaoyin, 20, a third-year student studying mechanical design. “If you’re not allowed to talk here, you just go to another place to talk, and there are countless places for your opinions. It’s easy to bypass the firewalls, and anybody who spends a little time researching it can figure it out.”
Ma Lihong, an education major, questioned whether it was possible to monitor every Web site. “If there is a hot topic, people can never be prevented from finding it,” Ma said. “People’s thoughts can never be strangled. With one click on the Internet you can find anything.”
Posted at 10:29 AM · Comments (0)
The Most Influential People in the Media
May 9, 2006 10:25 AM
Copyright New York
Richard Parsons
Chairman and CEO, Time Warner
Parsonss purview is mind-boggling: HBO, CNN, TBS, Cartoon Network; Time Warner Cable; Time Inc., with more than 150 titles; AOL, still generating $8 billion in annual revenue; and Warner Bros. (No. 1 in film grosses, television production, and DVD sales). Cleanup man for historys most disastrous merger, hes succeeded in creating internal stability and installing well-regarded former HBO head Jeff Bewkes as his heir apparent. As corporate managers find themselves attacked by hedge funds and self-styled shareholder activists, Parsonss handling of Carl Icahns attempt to push him off the board and split up the company was picture-perfect, a B-school case study. But that pesky stock price still isnt moving …
Roger Ailes
Chairman and CEO, Fox News Channel; chairman, Fox Television Stations
Ailess Fox News Channel is the preeminent news organization of George W. Bushs America. He brought the brash, outspoken, unabashedly right-wing sensibility of talk radio (and of Ailes himself) to TV, with vast and continuing commercial success. So dominant is FNC that nine of the ten most-watched cable-news shows air on Fox. Its ties to the Bush White House (remember that Fox was the first to declare Bush the victor in 2000) are strong enough that commentator Tony Snow was named press secretary, and a journalist complained that the TVs on Air Force One are tuned only to FNC. Ailess dominion keeps expanding: Last year, he wrested control of Foxs television stationsNews Corp.s biggest cash-flow generatorfrom wayward heir Lachlan Murdoch. Also, inadvertently created Stephen Colbert.
Bill Keller, Arthur Sulzberger, Jr., and Jonathan Landman
Executive editor, publisher, and deputy managing editor of the New York Times
A stock thats lost more than half its value over the past four years, a newsroom buffeted by scandal, bellwether of an industry with its best days behind itand yet the New York Times remains Americas most vital news outlet, the chief codebook with which New Yorkers (and the world) decipher the interesting times weve been cursed to live in. Every day, it also changes that worldthink, especially, of Nick Kristof, who single-handedly forced the worlds attention on Darfur. Keller steers the paper, in turn setting the days news agenda around the country, and the bedraggled Sulzberger attends to larger issues, like new e-newspaper software developed with Microsoft. For different reasons, Keller and Sulzberger are both unfireable, and theyll be around for years. But the future of the paper rests at the moment with Landman, who is director of the papers online strategy. The redesign, DealBook, and even the amateur-hour video blogs are a good start: Will the papers long-overdue lavishment of attention on the Web protect the Times future, or will 155 years of history not matter in a realm of limitless alternatives?
Jon Stewart, Ben Karlin, and Stephen Colbert
Host and executive producer, The Daily Show With Jon Stewart, and executive producer, The Colbert Report; executive producer, The Daily Show and The Colbert Report; host and executive producer, The Colbert Report
The Pew survey said it all: Twenty-one percent of Americans between the ages of 18 and 29 turn to The Daily Show as their only source of news (the networks got 23 percent)and that was before Stewarts Oscar-hosting gig, The Colbert Report, and Colberts own ultra-Establishment gig emceeing the White House Correspondents Dinner. The Daily Shows political sensibilitysmart, pragmatic, fed up with the Dems but horrified by the GOPis extremely appealing to New Yorkers (we flatter ourselves by seeing it as our own). Stewart has become the comedian-as-Cronkite; to some, his team are the only people on TV worthy of trust.
Si Newhouse
Chairman, Cond Nast
Newhouses Cond Nast demonstrates that expensive, upmarket, lavishly produced magazines still have a place in the national conversation (witness Sy Hershs Washington-rattling New Yorker scoops and Vanity Fairs latest tabloid-of-record tearful-celebrity confession), in dictating stylishness, and on ad buyers budgets (Vogue had 2,959.33 ad pages in 2005). Unlike the more penny-conscious Hearst or the layoff-prone Time Inc., Newhouses company spends money freely, offering favored talent outsize salaries and perks. Hes a living economic inefficiency in an industry increasingly attuned to profit over prestige. Si just has to please Si.
Nick Denton
Publisher, Gawker Media
Made blogs a popularand profitableart form, partly by paying his bloggers intern-level wages. Denton and Gawker.coms original editor, Elizabeth Spiers, both jockey for credit for pioneering the now-ubiquitous form: jokey headline; snide, quippy post; links; and a willingness to run suspect info (hey, the Internet hive mind auto-corrects!). New Yorks other blog baron, Weblogs, Inc., founder Jason McCabe Calacanis, has already cashed out by selling to AOL, but Denton remains on his own, bringing the Gawker formula to, among others, sports nuts (Deadspin), shoppers (The Consumerist), and Silicon Valley (Valleywag).
Media: Katie Couric, El Diario’s Publisher, Sean Cassidy, …
Rossana Rosado
CEO and publisher, El Diario/La Prensa
The queen of local Hispanic media. Rosado runs El Diario, the ink-and-newsprint lifeblood of New Yorks Hispanic population (28 percent of the city; its 12.5 percent nationally), which has a notably activist tenor: El Diarios motto translates to Champion of the Hispanics. The El Diario empire has recently increased its reach and visibility, linking with a series of Spanish-language papers across the country to form impreMedia, Americas largest publisher of Spanish-language papers. And the papers have amped up their reporting, publishing an award-winning series on New Jersey prisons illegally using dogs to handle immigrant inmates. As Rosado, a former street reporter who segued to publisher after serving as editor-in-chief, has said, Were a small paper in a big newspaper town. But were a huge paper within the small town that is the Hispanic community.
Gamma
Newscom)
Katie Couric
Co-anchor, the Today show; anchor-to-be, CBS Evening News
Just look at all the fuss. Courics move seismically altered the landscape of nightly news, as well as the profit-drenched morning shows. Her sway over her audience is undeniable: After her on-air colonoscopy led to a whopping 20 percent increase in test rates, the phenomenon of celebrities having an impact on health issues has been dubbed the Katie Couric Effect.
William Bastone
Editor and co-founder, the Smoking Gun The Smoking Gun Website has brought gotcha journalism into the digital ageand now no celebritys divorce filing, concert rider, or mug shot is safe. Bastone, a former Village Voice reporter, scored a mind-blowing 75 million page views by exposing James Freys Million Little fabrications in January, but that was just one in a series of scoops that include posting Arnold Schwarzeneggers 1977 Oui interview, the Bill OReilly sexual-harassment complaint, and the Duke rape indictment. Court TV (which bought TSG in 2000) brought cameras into the courtroom; the Smoking Gun puts the evidence on your desk.
Richard Johnson
Editor, Page Six
Orchestrator of the most closely read gossip page in America. Like the Mafia, as Jared Paul Stern so inelegantly put it, Page Six doles out favors to its friends and wreaks havoc on those who dont cooperate, making stars and enemies alike. Its turned the foibles of the famous into a highly entertaining spectator sport. Column mentions help keep Johnsons favored restaurants and nightclubs full. Has popularized memorable nicknames (the portly pepperpot) and euphemisms (canoodling). The column was such an irritant to a press-shy California billionaire that he came out of hiding in an attempt to swat Page Six downand its Teflon editor continues to ride the whole thing out.
Dan Klores and Sean Cassidy, Howard and Steven Rubenstein, and Ken Sunshine
Chairman and CEO, Dan Klores Communications; managing director and president, Dan Klores; president, Rubenstein Associates, Inc.; senior executive vice-president, Rubenstein; president, Ken Sunshine Consultants
The men on top of New Yorks prime public-relations firms play crucial, largely offstage roles in practically every public skirmish in this town, deciding vicious municipal battles (what was the stadium face-off but a PR fight?) and celebrity duels (Nick vs. Jessica! Howard vs. CBS!). Both the Rubensteins and Kloress shop are caught between generations: Howard Rubenstein, 74, is handing the firm to his son Steven, 36; Klores has left the day-to-day running of his eponymous agency to make films, and Cassidy has not so quietly expanded Kloress roster by 25 percent. Sunshine, the Hollywood man in the city, has been called the Madonna of PR, that is, the king of reinvention. Respected for keeping huge clientsLeo DiCaprio, Justin Timberlakeout of trashy media, Sunshines credited with making stars change their behavior so the tabs wont find them.
Media: Rupert’s World and the Bonnie Fuller Effect
Its Ruperts World
Youre just watching, reading, listening, surfing, and singing karaoke in it.
You get up early and switch on Fox News for Your World With Neil Cavuto and catch the end of an OReilly Factor repeat; hes hawking The Spin Stops Here golf balls. Flip to Good Day New York, then grab the Post for the subwaycheck out that Page Six item on The Simple Life. At work, update your MySpace page, search for a better job at SimplyHired.com, then pop to the newsstand for the Times of London, the Sun (National Rugby League scoressweet!), and the Weekly Standard (to see what Tony Snows White House pals are thinking). Your FoxSports.com Fantasy Football draft is coming upstudy the prospects at Scout.com. Then chat with the cute sales rep from HarperCollins about How I Met Your Mother (using flirting tips from AskMen.com; so much better than The Game). Say, maybe she wants to catch a film: How about The Sentinel? MehRottenTomatoes.com says its a poor mans 24. So you head home aloneyou need to catch up on The Shield anyway. Too bad your DirectTVs been acting upit didnt record M*A*S*H or Boston Legal. Your buddies in England and India never have problems with BSkyB Or Star. You could always rent a flick: Napoleon Dynamite or Alien? Though you should finish Freakonomics, and Moms been pushing The Purpose-Driven Life. But you cant put down Nicole Richies The Truth About Diamonds! Finish it, then surf IGN.com for dirt on next summers Halo movie. Whoa, theres a Website that lets you do karaoke online! Then check the TV Guide Channel: Hey, a Buffy rerun on Channel 9! Wait: Isnt tonight a new episode of American Idol? Doh!
Wireimage)
The Fuller Effect
Bonnie and her children.
(1.) February 2002: Bonnie Fuller hired as Us Weekly editor. She brings a tabloidmeetsTiger Beat aesthetic and the epochal StarsTheyre Just Like Us! Sales rise 55.2 percent.
(2.) November 2002: Euro mag giant Bauer launches Uss first imitator, In Touch, featuring In touch with their real sides! celeb pics.
(3.) June 2003: Us loses Fuller to American Media, Inc. She remakes the National Enquirer and Star, which now asks, Stars: Are They Normal or Not? Circulation at Star jumps over 10 percent.
(4.) The Fuller frenzy:People, still the category leader, unveils a new cover treatment in September 2003 that closely apes Uss Fullerized design. Life&Style, Celebrity Living, Inside TV, and OK! debut.
(5.) August 2005: Celebs get tab-savvy. Vanity Fair is used to shape tabloid coverage; Jennifer Anistons cover interview is virtually reprinted in Us, which blares, JEN TELLS ALL.
(6.) Bonnies bubble bursts? Inside TV folds last November, Celebrity Living in April. Newsstand sales at Fullers Star slide 8 percent in the most recent quarter. Still, Uss hot streak continues, with a 12.7 percent circulation jump in 2005.
Posted at 10:25 AM · Comments (0)
Peddling democracy: Convinced of our superiority, Americans keep trying to impose freedom on the rest of the world. It’s arrogant, immoral — and it hasn’t worked.
May 8, 2006 7:12 PM
Copyright Salon
May. 03, 2006 | There is something absurd and inherently false about one country trying to impose its system of government or its economic institutions on another. Such an enterprise amounts to a dictionary definition of imperialism. When what’s at issue is “democracy,” you have the fallacy of using the end to justify the means (making war on those to be democratized), and in the process the leaders of the missionary country are invariably infected with the sins of hubris, racism and arrogance.
We Americans have long been guilty of these crimes. On the eve of our entry into World War I, William Jennings Bryan, President Woodrow Wilson’s first secretary of state, described the United States as “the supreme moral factor in the world’s progress and the accepted arbiter of the world’s disputes.” If there is one historical generalization that the passage of time has validated, it is that the world could not help being better off if the American president had not believed such nonsense and if the United States had minded its own business in the war between the British and German empires. We might well have avoided Nazism, the Bolshevik Revolution, and another 30 to 40 years of the exploitation of India, Indonesia, Indochina, Algeria, Korea, the Philippines, Malaya and virtually all of Africa by European, American and Japanese imperialists.
We Americans have never outgrown the narcissistic notion that the rest of the world wants (or should want) to emulate us. In Iraq, bringing democracy became the default excuse for our warmongers — it would be perfectly plausible to call them “crusaders,” if Osama bin Laden had not already appropriated the term — once the Bush lies about Iraq’s alleged nuclear, chemical and biological threats and its support for al-Qaida melted away. Bush and his neocon supporters have prattled on endlessly about how “the world is hearing the voice of freedom from the center of the Middle East,” but the reality is much closer to what Noam Chomsky dubbed “deterring democracy” in a notable 1992 book of that name. We have done everything in our power to see that the Iraqis did not get a “free and fair election,” one in which the Shia majority could come to power and ally Iraq with Iran. As Noah Feldman, the Coalition Provisional Authority’s law advisor, put it in November 2003, “If you move too fast the wrong people could get elected.”
In the election of Jan. 30, 2005, the U.S. military tried to engineer the outcome it wanted (“Operation Founding Fathers”), but the Shiites won anyway. Nearly a year later in the Dec. 15, 2005, elections for the national assembly, the Shiites won again, but Sunni, Kurdish and American pressure has delayed the formation of a government to this moment. After a compromise candidate for prime minister was finally selected, two of the most ominous condottiere of the Bush administration, Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice and Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld, flew into Baghdad to tell him what he had to do for “democracy” — leaving the unmistakable impression that the new prime minister is a puppet of the United States.
- - - - - - - - - - - -
After Latin America, East Asia is the area of the world longest under America’s imperialist tutelage. If you want to know something about the U.S. record in exporting its economic and political institutions, it’s a good place to look. But first, some definitions.
The political philosopher Hannah Arendt once argued that democracy is such an abused concept we should dismiss as a charlatan anyone who uses it in serious discourse without first clarifying what he or she means by it. Therefore, let me indicate what I mean by democracy. First, the acceptance within a society of the principle that public opinion matters. If it doesn’t, as for example in Stalin’s Russia, or present-day Saudi Arabia, or the Japanese prefecture of Okinawa under American military domination, then it hardly matters what rituals of American democracy, such as elections, may be practiced.
Second, there must be some internal balance of power or separation of powers, so that it is impossible for an individual leader to become a dictator. If power is concentrated in a single position and its occupant claims to be beyond legal restraints, as is true today with our president, then democracy becomes attenuated or only pro forma. In particular, I look for the existence and practice of administrative law — in other words, an independent, constitutional court with powers to declare null and void laws that contravene democratic safeguards.
Third, there must be some agreed-upon procedure for getting rid of unsatisfactory leaders. Periodic elections, parliamentary votes of no confidence, term limits and impeachment are various well-known ways to do this, but the emphasis should be on shared institutions.
With that in mind, let’s consider the export of the American economic, and then democratic “model” to Asia. The countries stretching from Japan to Indonesia, with the exception of the former American colony of the Philippines, make up one of the richest regions on Earth today. They include the second most productive country in the world, Japan, with a per capita income well in excess of that of the United States, as well as the world’s fastest-growing large economy, China’s, which has been expanding at a rate of over 9.5 percent per annum for the past two decades. These countries achieved their economic well-being by ignoring virtually every item of wisdom preached in American economics departments and business schools or propounded by various American administrations.
Japan established the regional model for East Asia. In no case did the other high-growth Asian economies follow Japan’s path precisely, but they have all been inspired by the overarching characteristic of the Japanese economic system — namely, the combining of the private ownership of property as a genuine right, defensible in law and inheritable, with state control of economic goals, markets and outcomes. I am referring to what the Japanese call “industrial policy” (sangyo seisaku). In American economic theory (if not in practice), industrial policy is anathema. It contradicts the idea of an unconstrained market guided by laissez faire. Nonetheless, the American military-industrial complex and our elaborate system of “military Keynesianism” rely on a Pentagon-run industrial policy — even as American theory denies that either the military-industrial complex or economic dependence on arms manufacturing are significant factors in our economic life. We continue to underestimate the high-growth economies of East Asia because of the power of our ideological blinders.
One particular form of American economic influence did greatly affect East Asian economic practice — namely, protectionism and the control of competition through high tariffs and other forms of state discrimination against foreign imports. This was the primary economic policy of the United States from its founding until 1940. Without it, American economic wealth of the sort to which we have become accustomed would have been inconceivable. The East Asian countries have emulated the U.S. in this respect. They are interested in what the U.S. does, not what it preaches. That is one of the ways they all got rich. China is today pursuing a variant of the basic Japanese development strategy, even though it does not, of course, acknowledge this.
The gap between preaching and self-deception in the way we promote democracy abroad is even greater than in selling our economic ideology. Our record is one of continuous (sometimes unintended) failure, although most establishment pundits try to camouflage this fact. The Federation of American Scientists has compiled a list of over 201 overseas military operations from the end of World War II until Sept. 11, 2001, in which we were involved and normally struck the first blow. (The list is reprinted by Gore Vidal in “Perpetual War for Perpetual Peace: How We Got to Be So Hated,” pages 22-41.) The current wars in Afghanistan and Iraq are not included. In no instance did democratic governments come about as a direct result of any of these military activities.
The United States holds the unenviable record of having helped install and then supported such dictators as the Shah of Iran, Gen. Suharto in Indonesia, Fulgencio Batista in Cuba, Anastasio Somoza in Nicaragua, Augusto Pinochet in Chile, and Sese Seko Mobutu in Congo-Zaire, not to mention a series of American-backed militarists in Vietnam and Cambodia, until we were finally expelled from Indochina. In addition, we ran among the most extensive international terrorist operations in history against Cuba and Nicaragua because their struggles for national independence produced outcomes that we did not like.
On the other hand, democracy did develop in some important cases as a result of opposition to our interference — for example, after the collapse of the CIA-installed Greek colonels in 1974; in both Portugal in 1974 and Spain in 1975 after the end of the U.S.-supported fascist dictatorships; after the overthrow of Ferdinand Marcos in the Philippines in 1986; following the ouster of Gen. Chun Doo Hwan in South Korea in 1987; and following the ending of 38 years of martial law on the island of Taiwan in the same year.
One might well ask, however: What about the case of Japan? President Bush has repeatedly cited our allegedly successful installation of democracy there after World War II as evidence of our skill in this kind of activity. What this experience proved, he contended, was that we would have little difficulty implanting democracy in Iraq. As it happens, though, Gen. Douglas MacArthur, who headed the American occupation of defeated Japan from 1945 to 1951, was himself essentially a dictator, primarily concerned with blocking genuine democracy from below in favor of hand-picked puppets and collaborators from the prewar Japanese establishment.
When a country loses a war as crushingly as Japan did the war in the Pacific, it can expect a domestic revolution against its wartime leaders. In accordance with the terms of the Potsdam Declaration, which Japan accepted in surrendering, the State Department instructed MacArthur not to stand in the way of a popular revolution, but when it began to materialize he did so anyway. He chose to keep Hirohito, the wartime emperor, on the throne (where he remained until his death in 1989) and helped bring officials from the industrial and militarist classes that ruled wartime Japan back to power. Except for a few months in 1993 and 1994, those conservatives and their successors have ruled Japan continuously since 1949. Japan and China are today among the longest-lived single-party regimes on Earth, both parties — the nucleus of the Liberal Democratic Party and the Chinese Communist Party — having come to power in the same year.
Equally important in the Japanese case, Gen. MacArthur’s headquarters actually wrote the quite democratic Constitution of 1947 and bestowed it on the Japanese people under circumstances in which they had no alternative but to accept it. In her 1963 book “On Revolution,” Hannah Arendt stresses “the enormous difference in power and authority between a constitution imposed by a government upon a people and the constitution by which a people constitutes its own government.” She notes that, in post-World War I Europe, virtually every case of an imposed constitution led to dictatorship or to a lack of power, authority and stability.
Although public opinion certainly matters in Japan, its democratic institutions have never been fully tested. The Japanese public knows that its constitution was bestowed by its conqueror, not generated from below by popular action. Japan’s stability depends greatly on the ubiquitous presence of the United States, which supplies the national defense — and so, implicitly, the fairly evenly distributed wealth — that gives the public a stake in the regime. But the Japanese people, as well as those of the rest of East Asia, remain fearful of Japan’s ever again being on its own in the world.
While more benign than the norm, Japan’s government is typical of the U.S. record abroad in one major respect. Successive American administrations have consistently favored oligarchies that stand in the way of broad popular aspirations — or movements toward nationalist independence from American control. In Asia, in the post-World War II period, we pursued such anti-democratic policies in South Korea, the Philippines, Thailand, Indochina (Cambodia, Laos and Vietnam) and Japan. In Japan, in order to prevent the Socialist Party from coming to power through the polls, which seemed likely during the 1950s, we secretly supplied funds to the representatives of the old order in the Liberal Democratic Party. We helped bring wartime Minister of Munitions Nobusuke Kishi to power as prime minister in 1957; split the Socialist Party by promoting and financing a rival Democratic Socialist Party; and, in 1960, backed the conservatives in a period of vast popular demonstrations against the renewal of the Japanese-American Security Treaty. Rather than developing as an independent democracy, Japan became a docile Cold War satellite of the United States — and one with an extremely inflexible political system at that.
In South Korea, the United States resorted to far sterner measures. From the outset, we favored those who had collaborated with Japan, whereas North Korea built its regime on the foundation of former guerrilla fighters against Japanese rule. During the 1950s, we backed the aged exile Syngman Rhee as our puppet dictator. (He had actually been a student of Woodrow Wilson’s at Princeton early in the century.) When, in 1960, a student movement overthrew Rhee’s corrupt regime and attempted to introduce democracy, we instead supported the seizure of power by Gen. Park Chung Hee.
Educated at the Japanese military academy in Manchuria during the colonial period, Park had been an officer in the Japanese army of occupation until 1945. He ruled Korea from 1961 until Oct. 16, 1979, when the chief of the Korean Central Intelligence Agency shot him to death over dinner. The South Korean public believed that the KCIA chief, known to be “close” to the Americans, had assassinated Park on U.S. orders because he was attempting to develop a nuclear-weapons program that the U.S. opposed. (Does this sound familiar?) After Park’s death, Maj. Gen. Chun Doo Hwan seized power and instituted yet another military dictatorship that lasted until 1987.
In 1980, a year after the Park assassination, Chun smashed a popular movement for democracy that broke out in the southwestern city of Kwangju and among students in the capital, Seoul. Backing Chun’s policies, the U. S. ambassador argued that “firm anti-riot measures were necessary.” The American military then released to Chun’s control Korean troops assigned to the U.N. Command to defend the country against a North Korean attack, and he used them to crush the movement in Kwangju. Thousands of pro-democracy demonstrators were killed. In 1981, Chun Doo Hwan would be the first foreign visitor welcomed to the White House by the newly elected Ronald Reagan.
After more than 30 postwar years, democracy finally began to come to South Korea in 1987 via a popular revolution from below. Chun Doo Hwan made a strategic mistake by winning the right to hold the Olympic Games in Seoul in 1988. In the lead-up to the games, students from the many universities in Seoul, now openly backed by an increasingly prosperous middle class, began to protest American-backed military rule. Chun would normally have used his army to arrest, imprison, and probably shoot such demonstrators as he had done in Kwangju seven years earlier; but he was held back by the knowledge that, if he did so, the International Olympic Committee would move the games to some other country. In order to avoid such a national humiliation, Chun turned over power to his co-conspirator of 1979-80, Gen. Roh Tae Woo. In order to allow the Olympics to go ahead, Roh instituted a measure of democratic reform, which led in 1993 to the holding of national elections and the victory of a civilian president, Kim Young Sam.
In December 1995, in one of the clearest signs of South Korea’s maturing democracy, the government arrested Gens. Chun Doo Hwan and Roh Tae Woo and charged them with having shaken down Korean big business for bribes — Chun Doo Hwan allegedly took $1.2 billion and Roh Tae Woo $630 million. President Kim then made a very popular decision, letting them be indicted for their military seizure of power in 1979 and for the Kwangju massacre as well. In August 1996, a South Korean court found both Chun and Roh guilty of sedition. Chun was sentenced to death and Roh to 22 and a half years in prison. In April 1997, the Korean Supreme Court upheld slightly less severe sentences, something that would have been simply unimaginable for the pro forma Japanese Supreme Court. In December 1997, after peace activist Kim Dae Jung was elected president, he pardoned them both despite the fact that Chun had repeatedly tried to have Kim killed.
The United States was always deeply involved in these events. In 1989, when the Korean National Assembly sought to investigate what happened at Kwangju on its own, the U.S. government refused to cooperate and prohibited the former American ambassador to Seoul and the former general in command of U.S. Forces Korea from testifying. The American press avoided reporting on these events (while focusing on the suppression of pro-democracy demonstrators in Beijing in June 1989), and most Americans knew next to nothing about them. This coverup of the costs of military rule and the suppression of democracy in South Korea, in turn, has contributed to the present growing hostility of South Koreans toward the United States.
Unlike American-installed or -supported “democracies” elsewhere, South Korea has developed into a genuine democracy. Public opinion is a vital force in the society. A separation of powers has been institutionalized and is honored. Electoral competition for all political offices is intense, with high levels of participation by voters. These achievements came from below, from the Korean people themselves, who liberated their country from American-backed military dictatorship. Perhaps most important, the Korean National Assembly — the parliament — is a genuine forum for democratic debate. I have visited it often and find the contrast with the scripted and empty procedures encountered in the Japanese Diet or the Chinese National People’s Congress striking indeed. Perhaps its only rival in terms of democratic vitality in East Asia is the Taiwanese Legislative Yuan. On some occasions, the Korean National Assembly is rowdy; fist fights are not uncommon. It is, however, a true school of democracy, one that came into being despite the resistance of the United States.
Given this history, why should we be surprised that in Baghdad, such figures as former head of the Coalition Provisional Authority L. Paul Bremer III, former Ambassador John Negroponte, and present Ambassador Zalmay Khalilzad, as well as a continuously changing cohort of American major-generals fresh from PowerPoint lectures at the American Enterprise Institute, should have produced chaos and probable civil war? None of them has any qualifications at all for trying to “introduce democracy” or American-style capitalism in a highly nationalistic Muslim nation, and even if they did, they could not escape the onus of having terrorized the country through the use of unrestricted military force.
Bremer is a former assistant and employee of Henry Kissinger and Gen. Alexander Haig. Negroponte was American ambassador to Honduras, 1981-85, when it had the world’s largest CIA station and actively participated in the dirty war to suppress Nicaraguan democracy. Khalilzad, the most prominent official of Afghan ancestry in the Bush administration, is a member of the Project for a New American Century, the neocon pressure group that lobbied for a war of aggression against Iraq. The role of the American military in our war there has been an unmitigated disaster on every front, including the deployment of undisciplined, brutal troops at places like the Abu Ghraib prison. All the United States has achieved is to guarantee that Iraqis will hate us for years to come. The situation in Iraq today is worse than it was in Japan or Korea and comparable to our tenure in Vietnam. Perhaps it is worth reconsidering what exactly we are so intent on exporting to the world.
This article originally appeared on TomDispatch.com.
http://www.salon.com/opinion/feature/2006/05/03/johnson/print.html
Posted at 7:12 PM · Comments (0)
The poker machine
May 8, 2006 1:46 PM
Copyright 2006 The Financial Times
May 6, 2006 Saturday
HEADLINE: This man is a computer scientist and an expert in game theory. He is also one of the 21st century’s most successful poker players, and when the game’s World Series starts in Las Vegas next month, everyone will be watching to see if Chris Ferguson can once again use maths to win the title. Are the geeks finally ready to conquer poker?
The World Series of Poker in Las Vegas in 2000 attracted a record 500 players. Over four days, contestants were gradually eliminated until just two men were left to face off in poker’s flagship game, Texas Hold ‘Em. The more experienced player was a living legend named T.J. Cloutier, a 62-year-old Texan road gambler who was regarded by many as the best in the world. His opponent was a 37- year-old computer scientist from California named Chris Ferguson who had only been playing World Series games since 1996, never finishing higher than fourth place.
Ferguson might have been a relative newcomer, but he was hard to miss. He had earned the nickname “Jesus” because he hid his face behind a long beard and hair that cascaded over his shoulders, buttressed by wraparound mirror shades and a big cowboy hat.
Ferguson never spoke during a game, determined not to show any sign of human emotion; he didn’t pay much attention to other players’ nervous tics either, preferring to draw all his information from the cards. In Las Vegas that week he had destroyed the field and came to the table with 10 times as many chips as his opponent.
Cloutier, a former football pro with huge shoulders, paws that dwarfed his cards, and a dominant presence at the table, had seen it all before. Playing brilliantly and riding his luck, he ate into Ferguson’s lead and was only slightly behind when he lured Ferguson into serious trouble. By making a modest raise of Dollars 175,000, he provoked Ferguson into raising again to Dollars 600,000. Then Cloutier pushed about Dollars 2m dollars in chips into the pot, going “all in”.
Ferguson paused, calculating the odds. Cloutier probably had a stronger hand than he’d expected. However, Cloutier was playing well, and if Ferguson backed out of the pot now his opponent would have a substantial lead.
On the other hand, if Ferguson called and won, the World Series was his. He reckoned his chances at about one in three, and that that was as good as it was likely to get.
In a game of poker, players bet to earn the right to compare cards at the end of each hand, the “showdown”. A player who does not bet must drop out of the hand. The accumulated bets make up the prize for each showdown, the “pot”. The best combination of five cards wins the pot.
Strong hands, such as a straight (five cards in sequence) or a full house (a pair and a triplet) are enviable, but also the gift of pure chance. The skill comes in betting and reading other players’ bets. Big bets may scare away an opponent who does not realise he holds the best hand, or they may simply ensure that when your full house wins, the pot is a big one.
In Texas Hold ‘Em, each player holds just two cards. The other three are selected from shared cards, dealt on the table in stages to allow extra rounds of betting. Before the shared cards are dealt, players can only guess how happily their two private cards will fit with the cards on the table. Nevertheless, it is common to see huge bets at that stage - none larger than those of Cloutier and Ferguson.
Finally, after several minutes of furious thought, Ferguson removed his hat and shades, suddenly shrinking and revealing his human qualities of exhaustion and vulnerability - “much more like Jesus”, observed writer James McManus in Positively Fifth Street, his book on playing in the same tournament. (McManus himself was knocked out of the tournament in fifth place.) Then Ferguson called.
Cloutier revealed he had an ace and a queen to Ferguson’s ace and nine. Since there were no more chips to bet, the five communal cards were revealed at an agonising pace. Ferguson had slightly overestimated his chances: they were one in four. He needed a nine to appear on the table to pair the one in his hand, and for no queen to show up and pair Cloutier’s. When the last card - a nine - hit the table, Ferguson realised what had happened before the hushed crowd did. His arms shot into the air and he leapt up to give Cloutier a boney embrace. The great man took the loss with equanimity: “That’s poker,” he said, according to McManus in Positively Fifth Street.
Ferguson’s record since then has proved that the upset that year was no fluke. Only four men have more World Series finishes in profit - poker’s equivalent of making the cut in golf - than Ferguson, and Ferguson won more World Series events from 2000-2004 than any of his rivals had in a decade. So “Jesus” has a respectable claim to be the most successful tournament player of the 21st century, and his ascendancy is more than just a personal triumph: it marks a turning point in the long campaign to apply the rigours of mathematics to the psychological subtleties of poker.
Ferguson, who is reported to have won more than Dollars 5m in tournament play, is the best of a new generation of players trying to conquer poker with the branch of mathematics known as game theory. It is a curious struggle, one that has pitted bespectacled geeks against hardened gamblers. But the strangest thing is that poker intellectuals exist at all.
Late in the 1920s, the most brilliant man in the world decided to work out the correct way to play poker. John von Neumann, the mathematician who would mastermind the development of the computer and the atomic bomb, had been struck by an engaging new conceit: he wanted to apply mathematical principles to social sciences and devise a theory to analyse everything from the breakdown of diplomatic negotiations to unexpected co-operation between enemies, or even the possibility of nuclear terrorism. He believed that if you wanted a theory that could explain life, you should start with a theory that could explain poker - game theory. “Real life consists of bluffing, of little tactics of deception, of asking yourself what is the other man going to think I mean to do, and that is what games are about in my theory.”
Bluff, deception and mind-reading are unpromising subjects for a mathematician to study, but if anyone could do it, it was von Neumann. His biographer, William Poundstone, says his ostentatious feats of calculation were notorious. At Princeton after the war - where he arguably outshone his campus colleague, Albert Einstein - von Neumann helped to design the fastest computer in the world, then demonstrated that he was faster. Nobody was surprised. His colleagues joked that he was a demigod who, having studied humans intensively, was able to imitate them perfectly.
To tackle poker, von Neumann had to break new ground. There had long been analyses of games of chance using probability theory. Then there are games such as chess, which are strictly logical - albeit demanding extraordinary feats of calculation. Poker is another matter altogether.
Most of the important information in poker is private; each player sees only one part of the jigsaw and must piece together the bigger picture by observing what other players do. Since the strongest hand takes all the money, the higher the betting, the more expensive it becomes to lose. Yet in many hands of poker, especially between skilled players, there is no showdown: one player bets aggressively enough to scare the others away. In short, there is no straightforward connection between what a player bets and the hand he holds.
It was the bluff that interested von Neumann. Novices wrongly believe that bluffing is merely a way to win pots with bad cards. In the 1972 final of the World Series, the famous hustler Amarillo Slim won because he had bluffed so often that when he finally put all his chips in the pot with a full house (a very strong hand), his opponent assumed Slim was bluffing again; called (matching the bet), and lost. A player who never bluffs will never win a big pot, because on the rare occasions that he raises the betting, everyone else will fold before committing much money.
Then there’s the reverse bluff: acting weak when you are strong. In the 1988 World Series, the Chinese-born Johnny Chan (dubbed the “Orient Express” because he won money so quickly) passed up every opportunity to raise the stakes and meekly called his opponent’s bets. By the last round of betting, his opponent became convinced that Chan didn’t have a hand and bet everything he had. Chan called and turned over a straight - a strong hand - scooping up Dollars 700,000 and the title of world champion.
These stories seem to be all about psychology, not mathematics. But although Chan and Slim had no interest in mathematics beyond calculating the odds, von Neumann’s theory could explain everything they had done. What von Neumann showed in his ground-breaking 1944 book, A Theory of Games and Economic Behavior (written with economist Oskar Morgenstern), was that you should bluff only with your worst hands, rather than with something half-decent.
The reasoning is simple enough. A modest hand may beat another modest hand, so it’s worth limping along to a low-stakes showdown. A bad hand will only win anything if the opponent folds, so bad hands should be played aggressively or not at all; indeed, when the best players are caught running a huge bluff they are often holding the most atrocious cards. Von Neumann’s model also highlights the other benefit of bluffing: it forces the opponent to match your bids frequently, and so wins more money with strong hands.
Von Neumann’s book was hugely celebrated, but academics were soon disillusioned: they found that game theory was too narrow and too difficult to apply to the real world. The book sold poorly, although a few copies, as the Princeton University Press noted sheepishly in 1949, “were bought by professional gamblers”.
It is a safe bet that young Walter Clyde Pearson was not a customer. “Puggy” Pearson was typical of the hard-living, cigar- chomping, poker professional of his time. He was born in Kentucky in 1929, to a dirt-poor family. But, as Michael Kaplan and Brad Reagan reveal in their book Aces and Kings, when Pearson joined the Navy in 1946 he began to clean up at poker and pool - during an 18- month tour of duty in Puerto Rico he wired home Dollars 10,000 to his mother.
Pearson, who became world champion in 1973, had no use for mathematics. He was an intuitive poker player, and a highly aggressive one, whose big bets often scared other players into folding superior hands. It wasn’t the only sense in which he was aggressive; Pearson fled to Las Vegas in 1962 after cracking the skull of a Nashville bookmaker with a golf club. And he moved to the desert city for good in 1963 after robbers ransacked his Nashville home.
Pearson was a rough character, but at the time poker was a rough business. Amarillo Slim was once robbed of Dollars 50,000 by three armed men who broke into the house where he was playing and seized the stakes on the table. In 1976, Slim tried to buy into a Las Vegas casino in partnership with another poker devotee, casino owner (and convicted murderer) Benny Binion, who hosted the first World Series tournament in 1970 at Binion’s Horseshoe casino. But Slim was convincingly put off after a visit from friends of Tony Spilotro, the most feared man in Vegas, who was reputed to have hung a 320lb man on a meat hook and tortured him.
The game didn’t begin to become safe for mathematicians until the late 1980s, when big entertainment corporations moved into Las Vegas and started to offer civilised ways to part people from their money. The geeks were welcome, but they were still struggling to turn game theory into wins at the poker table.
For many years after von Neumann’s death in 1957, academics were also struggling to apply game theory to real life problems of economics, biology and military strategy. One of the main difficulties was the sheer fallibility of human intellect. The joke about von Neumann being a demigod was spot on: he modelled his “zero sum” games as one demigod playing another, assuming that both players were as clever as he was himself. But excellent play cannot always assume an excellent opponent: there is no point in defending against brilliant strategies that your adversary is not smart enough to use.
This problem can be particularly acute in poker. A game- theoretically perfect poker strategy will pass up big opportunities against weak opponents who may bluff too much or too little. Punishing one mistake requires conservative play; punishing the other requires more aggression. Game theory assumes the mistakes will not be made.
Another difficulty for applying game theory that poker is so complex that even the fastest computer cannot find the optimal solution. Considering 10 possibilities a second, a player would have had to start calculating at the birth of the galaxy to find a game-theoretic solution for two players of Texas Hold ‘Em.
A real poker player who wanted to use von Neumann’s theories would somehow need to be able to perform calculations that were beyond even the great man himself. Or he would have to discover short cuts that simplified the mathematics without seriously damaging the quality of his play. And he would also need to recognise when the opponent was playing so badly that the game theory strategy needed to be set aside. It was going to take something special.
In 1988, the fledgling internet began to reverberate with a new phenomenon: IRC Poker. This was a simple program that used something called “internet relay chat”, a precursor of today’s online chat rooms, to deal cards and moderate a game of poker between internet players. There was no money at stake, just the chance to beat the world’s most obsessive, highly mathematical geeks.
Chris Ferguson soon emerged as a dominant player in this rarefied world. A computer-science graduate in the doctoral programme at University of California, Los Angeles, Ferguson was studying artificial intelligence, using game theory to help computers play board games. Ferguson was exposed to both poker and game theory at an early age. His family were avid games players, and his father was a maths professor who taught game theory at UCLA. On some weekends, the younger Ferguson drove to Las Vegas and covered his hotel bill by playing very conservative poker against the tourists. But IRC Poker was a much better laboratory for someone who wanted to get inside the game and see what made it tick. It produced raw data for him to analyse and enough fierce competition to keep him hooked.
He began using game theory to explore which hands to bluff with and how often to bluff, and the trade-offs between raising too little with a promising hand, versus raising too much and scaring people away. He memorised table after table of his results. His approach was pure von Neumann but, armed with powerful computers, he was able to analyse far more realistic poker games than his predecessor.
Soon he began to produce some unexpected conclusions. He showed that the old-school poker professionals were raising too much with strong hands. The idea was to win the pot while they were still ahead, but Ferguson showed that it was worth making smaller raises and encouraging opponents to stay in to try to improve their cards. Sometimes those opponents would get lucky, but on balance the strong hand would make more money with smaller raises.
“I showed a lot of my research to well-respected poker players,” Ferguson told me. “They pooh-poohed it, I think because they didn’t understand it and disagreed with the results. But I knew that what I was doing was accurate, and that disagreement showed that mathematics could outplay the best players in the world.”
That self-confidence is typical of Ferguson: he knew that game theory would give him an advantage, not because of his winnings at the table, but because the theory was right. By the time he outdrew T.J. Cloutier in 2000, few doubted that Ferguson had a formidable insight into the game.
By 2005, the World Series had outgrown the ageing Binion’s Horseshoe casino and moved to the Rio Hotel just off the Las Vegas Strip. At hundreds of tables, 6,000 contestants toyed with their clay chips, filling the huge hall with a sound like a swarm of demented crickets.
Many had qualified in online tournaments rather than paying the Dollars 10,000 entry fee - at peak times, more than 100,000 players around the world are playing internet poker for cash, a far cry from the old IRC days. Live televised poker has fed the demand, and been fed by it. After the networks started installing cameras to film each player’s hidden cards, the world’s worst spectator sport became a gripping contest, and players such as Ferguson became huge stars. When I walked the casino floor with him at the Rio he was approached every few seconds for pictures or autographs. He responded each time with practised good grace. “I enjoy it,” he confessed.
The new poker, open to anyone, has meant that cerebral players have had the courage to follow in Ferguson’s footsteps. “If poker were played only by outlaws in saloons, you wouldn’t get these doctors and lawyers here,” says Matt Matros, a mathematician from Yale and a poker writer who has won more than Dollars 750,000 playing in tournaments. Matros is certain that game theory is going to become a necessity to compete at the highest level of poker. So is Andy Bloch, an MIT graduate, game theorist and another tournament- winning poker player. Bloch believes that the two-person version of Texas Hold ‘Em will soon be solved, meaning that each decision at the table will have an answer that is known to be correct.
Game theory certainly confers the biggest advantage in the two- player game against the best players. Ferguson has reached both finals of a new head-to-head knockout all-star poker tournament, beating Cloutier on the way. If Bloch and Matros are right, every serious player will simply have to learn the moves for two-player poker, just as chess players memorise dozens of opening variations.
But most poker is not head-to-head, and most players are nowhere near von Neumann’s optimal play. Most of the new poker players are not expert mathematicians, but hopefuls with more money than sense. “If you want to play poker to make money, you’re doing it for the wrong reasons,” says Ferguson. “You have to love the game, and you have to like to work hard.”
Ferguson knows that amateur players spoil game theory’s assumption of expert play. Other top professionals believe that this will always limit the theory’s usefulness.
Howard Lederer, broad-shouldered and standing well over six feet, is nicknamed “The Professor” for his studied game and demeanour. When I buttonholed him at the Rio, he told me there were too many bad players around for game theory to be the main asset of a professional. “Pure game theory only comes into play against another great pro in a very pure situation. Basically, it’s the psychology of the game. You need to have a feel for the game theory, but psychology trumps game theory: dominating people at their moments of weakness in the tournament, getting to them.”
If Lederer is correct, the flood of new players is undermining the usefulness of game theory. Game theory tells you how to avoid losing to perfect play, not how to beat the weak players - known as the fish. The more fish enter the game, the less relevant game theory becomes. The poker legacy of von Neumann may therefore rest with an unusual new breed of players.
Back at Binion’s, just a short cab ride from the Rio, an alternative championship was being staged during the 2005 World Series. The scene was more internet cafe than casino, with the green baize hidden under a tangle of cables, six computers facing each other, invisibly playing dozens of hands a minute, dealing chips and betting with cards that existed only in cyberspace.
When Binion’s hosted the World Series of Poker in 1970, participation was by invitation only; a few hands were played and then everyone voted to honour the veteran Johnny Moss with the title of world champion. The 2005 World Poker Robot championship, the first such event, harked back to that tradition. The six software programs were there by invitation, and the true champion was not in doubt: the University of Alberta games research group, having defeated all electronic challengers for seven years, was asked to referee rather than play.
Darse Billings, the strongest poker player in the Alberta team and another game theorist, sat down with me at a nearby table, delighted to be speaking to someone who had heard of John von Neumann. With a smiling moon face covered by a short fuzzy beard, Billings has something of the teddy bear about him, but he claimed to be less than cuddly when the chips are down. “I used to be the top of the IRC Poker tables,” he said, with obvious pride. What happened? “Chris Ferguson started playing and he overtook me.”
Billings and his colleagues have yet to produce software capable of beating Ferguson, who is seen as a particular challenge because he is unfazed by an opponent who gives away no physical clues. But they relish the challenge of besting a world champion who holds a doctorate in artificial intelligence and game theory. For now, though, just about any top human player can outplay the robots. In a pair of exhibition matches concluding the World Poker Robot championships, the big-name professional Phil “Unabomber” Laak was recruited to play the machines. As a partisan crowd chanted “Hu- mans! Hu-mans!” he swiftly disposed of both the Alberta program and the newly minted world champion, a program called PokerPro. Nobody was surprised.
Artificial intelligence researchers see the same challenge in poker that von Neumann did nearly 80 years before them, that of understanding deception. At the moment von Neumann’s game theory remains the most successful approach, exemplified by the fearsome computer program, SparBot, which beats most of the humans who log on to the Alberta website to try their skill. “I believe that bots will eventually play better than all human beings,” predicts Billings. Ferguson agrees. “If poker robots had a tenth of the resources that were spent on chess, they’d already have beaten us.”
Many commentators now fear that the robots will destroy the online game that so enthused their creators in the days of IRC poker. Online poker players are thought to wager more than Dollars 250m a day - a tempting incentive to write a software program that could be let loose on unsuspecting “fish” all over the world. A decent poker player can make thousands of dollars a month playing the online game, so what if that player was replaced by an unlimited number of copies of a fiendish computer program?
Billings is convinced that the risk of this happening soon has been exaggerated. His own SparBot, an academic project, does not play for money, while he dismisses the other programs as simply not good enough. “The fear of bots is a much bigger problem than the threat of bots. There are dozens of poker robots out there on the internet, but all they are doing is contributing money to everyone else.” But he admits that it is only a matter of time before anyone will be able to download a free poker robot that will outplay the world champion. At that point, people may not care to risk money online against unidentified opponents.
One ironic possibility looms large: eventually, online poker will be dominated by the only poker players able to master John von Neumann’s game theory, the computers. Meanwhile, the humans will retreat back to the flesh-and-blood world of the casinos, where a nervous tic can tell more than a thousand calculations. Human computers such as Ferguson have carved out a niche, but as long as there are fish to hook at the table, the time-honoured skills of Puggy Pearson and Amarillo Slim will not be lost. Rather than conquering traditional poker, the biggest legacy of the poker mathematicians may be to make the game more exciting for the rest of us than ever before.
POKER FOR DUMMIES
The most popular version of poker is Texas Hold ‘Em. Each player is dealt just two private cards face-down, instead of the five dealt in traditional poker. The other three are chosen from five shared or “communal” cards that are dealt face-up in stages to allow extra rounds of betting.
Players have four betting choices. They can “fold” (throw in the hand), “call” (match the existing largest bet), “raise” (increase the amount wagered) or “check” (opt not to bet - but only if there are no preceding bets in the round).
If one player bets and the rest fold, the better wins the round. If two or more players remain after the last round of betting, there is a “showdown” in which each player makes the best five-card hand from their two private cards and the communal shared cards on the table. The winner is the player with the best hand.
THE BEST POKER HANDS
1. Royal flush
The highest ranking poker hand is five cards of the same suit - any suit - from 10 through Ace
2. Straight flush The next best hand is five cards of the same suit in sequence
3. Four of a kind Four cards of the same number or face, and one unmatched card
4. Full house Three cards of the same number or face, and two others of a different rank
5. Flush
Five cards of the same suit, not in sequence
6. Straight
Five cards ordered sequentially.
7. Three of a kind Three cards of the same face of number, plus two unmatched cards
8. Two pair Two pairs of cards of the same number or face, plus one unmatched card
9. Pair Two cards of the same number or face, plus three unmatched cards
10. High card
No matching cards. The lowest hand in poker. If two players have the same hand, the one with the highest card wins
Posted at 1:46 PM · Comments (0)
Chinese reoccupying Russia
May 7, 2006 1:14 PM
Copyright The Japan Times, May 5, 2006
VLADIVOSTOK, Russia — 2006 is the Year of Russia in China; 2007 will
be the Year of China in Russia — if the current friendly relationship
of the leaders of the two countries lasts that long. Friendly relations
are not something that the peoples of the two countries support that
much.
Among the noncultural things that Russian President Vladimir Putin did
in China recently was to sign agreements to build two pipelines to
carry Russian gas to west China. This was just a week before the
Chinese signed an agreement with Turkmenistan for another pipeline to
carry even more gas to west China.
This irked the Russian leaders as they regard the Turkmens as their own
supplier of cheap gas. The contract could have been a slap in the face
to the Russians for continuing to refuse to commit themselves to build
an oil pipeline from Siberia into China as they keep open the option of
supplying Japan instead.
Putin is applying a policy of triangulation between China and Japan,
letting them both think that he will favor them in the final settlement
of the direction of the pipeline. He will have to come off the fence
eventually, but while he continues to sit he is upsetting both
countries.
Russia, however, is the major supplier (almost the only supplier) of
military equipment and technology to China. Russia may come to regret
this. Whatever the basis of the love-in between Putin and Chinese
President Jintao, the Russian and Chinese people on the whole hate and
mistrust each other.
The 5 million Russians who live in Russia’s provinces bordering China’s
northeast (population 107 million) are nervous and frightened. The
Treaty of Neighborliness, Friendship and Cooperation that the two
leaders signed in 2001 and the “final resolution” of the centuries-old
border dispute earlier this year have done nothing to assuage that
hatred and fear. Measures taken by the leaders do not have the support
of either the people of northeast China or the people of Russia’s
border provinces.
Chinese people are taught in school that the Russian provinces on the
other side of the 4300-km border, or Outer Manchuria, are Chinese. They
were “stolen” from China in two unequal treaties that the Russian czar
forced on a weak China in 1858 and 1860 at the beginning of the Hundred
Years of Humiliation. Not only their textbooks but all of their leaders
up to Hu Jintao have told them that these provinces will return to
China one day, just as Hong Kong and Macau did.
The Russians in the southern provinces of Far East Russia also are
angry about the 2001 treaty, and about one in 2006. They believe the
treaties give too much away to the Chinese.
The Chinese are living in the past they say: Territories that the
Russians colonized in the 19th century were of no interest to the
Chinese; the Chinese made no effort to occupy and develop the area,
which only technically came under Chinese sovereignty in another
unequal treaty that the strong Manchu emperor forced upon a weak czar,
with the help of the Jesuits, in 1648.
In the province I am currently visiting, Primorsky Krai, Chinese and
Russians lived in harmony, under conditions set by 19th-century
treaties, until the 1930s. Chinese made up between 30 and 40 percent of
the province’s population. The hostility of Stalinist Russia toward the
Chinese ended this. Today nobody knows how many Chinese are in the
province, but even the wildest estimates give a figure of less than 5
percent. There is marked tension between the two groups.
One of the things I wanted to do while I was here was to cross the
border from Russia into China and back again. Thousands of Russians do
this every day to shop. Consumer goods sourced in this way (duty-free
under a special deal — with limits that Putin has just lowered) and
brought back in thousands of canvas bundles each day make life
tolerable for Russians here, who feel neglected by Putin.
I crossed into China by bus (with my Russian interpreter) without any
trouble. While the Russians stayed on the bus for the first passport
control check, the Chinese were made, very brusquely, to get off. The
inspection took a long time. The problem for me was in coming back —
remember, I look Russian to Chinese.
We bought our tickets for the return journey at the Chinese agency in
Suifenhe, a town that exists only as a giant shopping center for
Russians. Or at least we thought we did. We got on the bus to the
border OK, standing like most of the passengers as most of the seats
were covered by canvas bags.
We went through Chinese border controls (it took a long time for me as
the officers had never seen an EU passport), but when we tried to get
back on the bus we were stopped: Our tickets were counterfeit, we were
told. They did look different from those held by other passengers.
A very noisy black-suited Chinese official kept shouting at us in
Chinese for about an hour, telling us that we could not go anywhere.
After an hour of waiting, he suggested that for a fee of about $ 35 he
could arrange for a Russian minibus to take us to the Russian border
control. We paid up and were taken across.
The people on the bus told us that they are frequently asked to do
this; they do not see anything of the $ 35. Counterfeit tickets are
apparently regularly provided to Russians traveling on their own.
While we were waiting in no man’s land, another Russian was sitting
near us (we never did discover why). We were sat by a large flower pot.
The Chinese guard who was holding our passports was digging in the soil
with a wooden ladle. He suddenly loaded the ladle with soil and pushed
it toward the mouth of the Russian and said “would you like to eat
dirt?”
The hatred between local Chinese and Russians is palpable. Russians are
moving out of this province and others that make up Russia’s Far East
as fast as they can; Chinese are moving in — far more than officially
admitted. Not a basis for long-term tranquillity and happiness.
David Wall is a research associate at the East Asia Institute of the
University of Cambridge and an associate fellow of Chatham House.
Posted at 1:14 PM · Comments (0)
Congo’s Daily Blood: Ruminations from a failed state
May 5, 2006 3:00 AM
Copyright Harper’s Magazine, April 2006
On some nights Dave and I would sit around over beers and discuss the
depression, how living alone on this river, in this steaming mess of a
city, made you forget you had the power to leave. The crumbled roads out of
town only led to other choking cities with little to offer, or simply
turned wild and melted back into the bush. The red-eye to Europe lifted off
every night but never truly took you away. The key to maintaining your
sanity in this place was to get out whenever possible, and most of the
mundeles did. Congo’s plentitude of horror and paranoia was the burden we
chose to drag behind us, for that was our job. But when you stayed too
long, you left yourself open, allowing the ghosts, rumors, and scary sounds
that inhabit the rainy nights to climb up your neck.
As wire-agency reporters based in Kinshasa, Dave and I agreed that busy
weeks saved us from this unhappy end. You get one or two stories in the
morning and ride the wave through the afternoon, just in time for
sundowners or a hearty dinner to put you off to bed. Slow weeks lifted the
shield and left you suddenly vulnerable, pacing your bedroom with all the
murders, disease, and gross mutilation of the past weeks stirring around in
the air-conditioning, struggling to make sense of themselves. The
depression made you paranoid and suspicious, made you more susceptible to
the fevers and myriad pestilence that crawled out of the earth. It kept you
out at degenerate nightclubs until the sun rose over the palms, and it was
on one of these nights that we found ourselves in the VIP Saloon.
The bar was just off Kinshasa’s main boulevard, and it was usually filled
by midnight with shifty Lebanese diamond dealers, French and Belgian
mercenaries, and the few Congolese who could afford the $5 beers and sodas.
We ordered two bottles of local Skol at the long, lamp-lit bar and stared
out onto the floor, where long-legged Congolese prostitutes in miniskirts
and flame-red boots watched themselves dance in the wall of mirrors. The
Euro pop on the speakers was loud and monotonous but punchy enough to lift
us from our doldrums.
We’d suffered four days with no stories, and neither of us had really left
our apartment. We’d enjoyed a nice run before hitting the current slump. In
mid-March, United Nations humanitarian chief Jan Egeland had announced that
Congo had become “the world’s worst humanitarian crisis,” a disaster that
was being virtually ignored by the rest of the world.
Dave and I took this as fantastic news, because it meant we’d somehow edged
out the tsunami in Asia and the genocide in Sudan in terms of absolute
misery. The announcement did wonders for getting my stories printed in
American papers. If the story had a heady lead of cannibalism, endangered
gorillas, or little girls being raped with machetes, then it might have big
enough wings to survive its journey across the Atlantic. Everything else
was like punting in a hailstorm. Stories left the desk and crashed straight
into a watery grave, where a half-century of dispatches of bothersome
African despair boils at the bottom.
But now our moment had passed once again, and we were left restless and manic.
Across the bar at VIP, a group of Belgian businessmen sipped J&B while bar
girls sat like smiling mannequins in their laps. Two Germans stood in the
far comer, twitchy and bug-eyed, taking turns doing bumps of cocaine in the
bathroom.
Dave had just returned from an assignment across the river in
Congo-Brazzaville, where notorious Ninja rebels had ambushed his convoy. No
one had been hurt, but a dope-crazed Ninja had jumped into Dave’s truck,
held two grenades to his head, and stolen his cherished jungle boots.
“Two grenades in one hand, and a bloody joint between his fingers,” he
howled, demonstrating with a cigarette. We laughed about it now over beers.
Sometimes even the most rotten assignments seemed like holidays once we got
back to Kinshasa.
“The U.N.’s saying the Mai Mai are sporting fetuses around their necks,” he
said.
“Oh, lovely. I hear the Lendu wear human kidneys on their bandoliers. I
think I saw it once.”
“I say we round up a few for Fashion Week, mate. Do they allow Kalashnikovs
on the runway?”
It was our usual banter, tasteless and maybe a little too loud. But
something about it must’ve struck a nerve in Dave, who went quiet for a
minute, then said: “I haven’t written one story in six months where someone
didn’t die.”
“Same here,” I answered. “I’m thinking of counting all the dead people in
mine. I wonder how many I’ll get.”
You could never count all of Congo’s dead, the way they kept piling up. The
country is slowly emerging from a five-year war that has killed 4 million
people, mostly from war-induced sickness and hunger, and aid groups
estimate 1,200 people still die every day. The war drew in seven African
armies at its peak, and helped create and maintain tens of thousands of
militiamen who still live by the gun, killing and maiming at will. The
militias have all but commandeered the eastern half of the country—rich in
timber, gold, diamonds, and coltan—which they’ve divided into personal
fiefdoms at the expense of the population.
Near the eastern border with Rwanda, packs of Hutu rebels survive in the
forests only by looting. These rebels, who fled into Congo after
participating in Rwanda’s 1994 genocide, control huge swaths of jungle too
dangerous for U.N. and Congolese soldiers to police. They carry out regular
massacres and are known for rounding up a village’s women and gang-raping
them while family members are forced to watch. Farther north, near the
Ugandan border, other militias simply exterminate everything alive, then
loot and burn what’s left. Often these militias butcher the dead on the
battle floor and feast on hearts and livers, both as ceremony and as a
tactic of cold intimidation. Its effectiveness is superb.
Maj. Gen. Patrick Cammaert knew all of this too well, and more. He sat in
the posh, flower-decked bar of a hotel in Bukavu, the eastern city on the
Rwandan border that had become the U.N.’s command post in dealing with the
Hutu rebels. The Dutch general was in charge of more than 14,000
peacekeepers in eastern Congo, stretching from the Ugandan border to the
southern province of Katanga, and there was never a moment when his command
wasn’t hot.
It was early June, and Cammaert had just returned from the dense forests of
the South Kivu territory, where Hutu rebels had just sliced up the village
of Nindja, hacking off the hands and feet of their victims and removing
their kidneys. The Hutu had been assisted by Rasta gunmen, an even more
macabre band of killers consisting of Mai Mai militia, Hutu, and renegade
Congolese soldiers. During the raid, Rastas had kidnapped fifty young
girls, who were most likely taken to mountain camps and raped day after day
before being left for dead. Panicked villagers had fled into the mountains,
where many were likely to die from exposure and disease. The general was
trying to decide whether to send troops into the jungles to protect the
population and how to keep his men from being ambushed.
The general removed his blue beret and rubbed his temples. He’d toured the
scene of the killings. “The brutality, it’s beyond comprehension,” he said,
the words trailing off. “Innocent kids, two years old, just beaten to pulp.”
No one at the U.N. had any idea how deep the evil ran in the jungles. The
tiny U.N. mission that began in 1999 with 90 staffers observing a rebel
cease-fire had since grown by sheer necessity to encompass much of the
country’s infrastructure. Congo is now the U.N.’s largest, most expensive
mission, with 16,700 peacekeepers and a combined annual budget of nearly $2
billion. Congo’s peacekeepers, along with U.N. agencies, have been saddled
with trying to eradicate some 20,000 militiamen in the east, while at the
same time trying to assist more than 2 million people displaced as a result
of war and the ongoing raids. More recently, they’ve attempted to midwife a
democracy by arranging elections in a country three times the size of
Texas, a country lacking roads, electricity, telephones, and local
governments. Battling the various militias while planning elections in
Congo has unexpectedly become the single most ambitious project the world
body has undertaken in its sixty-one-year history.
What was heavy on the general’s mind that night in Bukavu was how to purge
10,000 Hutu and Rasta fighters from the east, a mandatory assignment before
elections could take place. Cammaert had already lost twelve peacekeepers
in combat in the northeastern hills this year, and there the terrain was
wide open and ideal for open-ended assaults. The mountains and jungles near
Rwanda were an altogether different war zone, where the probability for
ambush was extremely high. But the general had just pulled a brilliant
maneuver, convincing the U.N. brass to bring in units of Guatemalan special
forces, American-trained jungle fighters who could creep through the dense
terrain to stage surgical strikes on unsuspecting Hutu. Once the rebels
were flushed into open territory, MI-25 attack helicopters could dispatch
them.(*)
It was certainly one of the most ingenious moves the U.N. had managed, but
it also was possibly one of its worst mistakes. The decorated general,
who’d just served as Kofi Annan’s top military adviser in New York, now
found himself in a lead role in Congo’s confusing nightmare. And Cammaert
had his own bad dream, the one in which he’s the U.N. commander in the
world’s next Mogadishu. “I’m losing sleep,” he said, staring off into
nothing. “I can’t stop thinking about those forests.”
Nowhere has the mettle of U.N. peacekeepers been tested more than in
northeast Ituri province, where raids and fighting between ethnic Hema and
Lendu militias have killed more than 60,000 people since 1999. Trained and
armed by both Uganda and Rwanda during Congo’s war, the two militias
routinely battle for control over lucrative trade routes across Lake Albert
and for concessions on area gold mines. Over the years, Ituri, like the
rest of eastern Congo, has become the gun dump of the world, with foreign
businessmen funneling Cold War—era weapons and heavy artillery to militia
leaders through Uganda.
On February 25, 2005, near a tiny village called Kafe, a gang of Lendu
militiamen ambushed a foot patrol of Bangladeshi peacekeepers and killed
nine. During the well-coordinated attack, the other peacekeepers fled the
scene, and the Lendu stripped the dead U.N. soldiers’ uniforms and
equipment. The peacekeepers had been sent to Kafe—part of a vast,
hill-swept territory called Djugu—in late January to protect more than
100,000 people who’d fled battles between Hema and Lendu fighters over
taxation rights to the nearby lake. The Lendu staged a series of looting
raids on Hema villages, punctuating their attacks by burning down homes and
even eating some of the dead. The villagers, who’d managed harrowing
escapes from these attacks, walked dozens of miles to four separate camps
in the remote hills, and once there started dying by the hundreds from
cholera, dysentery, and measles.
In late March, I boarded a U.N. flight for Bunia, the capital of the Ituri
province and headquarters for the 5,000-strong U.N. Ituri Brigade. One week
after the ambush, peacekeepers gunned down some sixty Lendu fighters using
armored vehicles and MI-25 attack helicopters. The assault was led by
Pakistani ground troops, hardened from battling Al Qaeda in the mountains
of Pakistan, and assisted by Indian helicopter pilots. Locked in a
years-long face-off on their own borders, the two armies now combined to
create a rolling killing machine along the bloody hills of eastern Congo.
A rush of cold nostalgia settled in my chest when I stepped off the plane
at the Bunia airport. I’d come here for the first time in April 2003, as a
freelancer, to cover a massacre by Lendu militia in the distant hills, only
to be caught in another killing spree right here in town. I’d stayed in
Bunia close to a month while the Ugandan army prepared to withdraw after
five years of fighting their war. During those weeks, the Lendu and Hema
battled the army daily with mortars and heavy machine guns, waiting to
ravage the town once the troops had gone. I’d been caught in some fierce
gunfights on these dusty streets and experienced mortal fear for the first
time in my life. During that time, only a few hundred U.N. peacekeepers
were in Bunia, and their mandate forbade them from protecting civilians.
Just when it was almost too late, I’d managed to evacuate myself on the
last Ugandan plane out of Congo, and that night the town fell. I returned
nine days later to find the town in ruins and controlled by drunken child
soldiers. Mangled bodies littered the streets and rotted in the equatorial
sun, and every morning I watched as they were torn apart by wild dogs.
Friends and contacts had disappeared or been killed. Nothing was the same
in Bunia, and since then nothing has really been the same for me.
I left Africa several months later. Five hundred people had been
slaughtered that week, and the U.N. had done nothing. Bunia had been a blip
on the news radar, and back in New York no one seemed to know anything
about it. For a year I sat with those faces, the bloated bodies, the dogs,
and the smell, and never gave them a good reason for dying. All the
gangsterism and hatred became tangled into a question I couldn’t resolve.
So when I was offered a job as Congo correspondent for the Associated
Press, I took it, hoping that maybe I’d come to understand what I’d missed
before. I wasn’t out to change anything, I wasn’t that pompous. But it had
been my story, it was now part of me, and I had to bring the terrible tale
to a conclusion that at least made some kind of sense.
Bunia had been drastically transformed since I’d seen it last. The U.N.
mission had tripled in size, and there were no longer any teenage soldiers,
in wigs and painted fingernails, prowling the streets with rocket
launchers. Several new restaurants and hotels had opened, including an
enterprising Indian joint at the Hotel Ituri that catered to Indian and
Bangladeshi troops, plus the massive influx of international press and
foreign aid workers. There was a lopsided pool table in the bar of the
Indian restaurant, and every night a dozen Italian aid workers would line
up to play two hefty Congolese girls who’d established themselves as local
sharks. The two girls played for bottles of beer, knocking back one after
another, yet they never weaved or staggered, and I never saw them Jose. The
Italian men wore their hair long and kept it clean and bouncy, even in
Bunia’s thick dust and heat. They wore tight designer jeans and pointy
leather shoes and thundered through town on silver Ducatis, which they had
shipped in from Italy. The Italian women were young and loud, and would
fall down drunk in front of tables of staring Congolese.
I was having a beer in the restaurant one night with an old friend, a
hardened U.N. logistics officer who’d been through the war, seen enough
gore to fuel a lifetime of nightmares, and had even seen arrows shot
through his truck during the siege. We watched the aid workers spilling
their drinks and running into tables. “Look what’s happened to this town,”
the officer said, his face twisted in disgust. “These kids don’t have a
fucking clue what happened here.” Bunia had also become a backwater feeding
ground for cowboy journalists looking for serious action. You’d see them at
dinner, outfitted with elaborate GPS devices and dressed in the latest
Columbia rip-away pants, talking about cannibals, gunfights, and maximum
coverage. The ones who rolled in hot from New York were the best, like a
photographer whose business cards were shaped like dog tags, metal and all.
One day he sat on the steps of his hotel smoking cigarettes, cursing a
press officer at the U.N. because she wouldn’t let him embed with
peacekeepers like he’d done in Iraq. He’d just come back from one of the
displaced camps in Djugu, where he’d photographed kids dying from cholera
and measles. “The light,” he said, “was just fantastic.”
A few days later I landed a seat on a U.N. chopper that was taking Ross
Mountain, the U.N. deputy in charge of Congo, on a tour of three of Djugu’s
camps, where more than 75,000 people now stayed. Mountain had served as
Kofi Annan’s special representative in Iraq through October 2004, before
arriving in Kinshasa in December. He was a straight-talking Kiwi who never
tried to sugarcoat the U.N.’s mistakes or bad judgment calls, and there’d
been many. Every week Mountain would take trips into the thick of Congo’s
misery to get a look for himself, and this week he’d asked to see the great
catastrophe of Ituri.
Staring down from a chopper over eastern Congo was like glimpsing a
prototype of Earth during the first days of creation. Where are all the
people? I always wondered from my high seat, usually en route to some
backwater camp where war and sickness had already claimed them before they
ever had a chance to live. The camp in Tche was located forty miles north
of Bunia amid a panorama of sweeping, green hills. About 25,000 people had
congregated in the crook of a narrow valley, which quickly became an ideal
container for disease. At least twenty kids were dropping every day from
measles and drinking dirty water, and groups like Mdecins Sans Frontires
were working without sleep just to slow down the death rate. About 350
Pakistani peacekeepers were dug into the valley and had brought tons of
steel and firepower, but it wasn’t enough to stop kids wasting away from
diarrhea.
The helicopter landing zone was on a ridgeline overlooking the camp, and as
we approached I could see that the Pakistanis had arranged some sort of
welcoming ceremony nearby for the guests. The camp had also spread up onto
the ridge, and hundreds of its ragged and desperate residents stood below
eagerly watching the helicopter land. But as we touched down, the rotor
wash from the chopper blades blew the thatched roofs off several huts and
sent a wall of red, stinging sand into the crowd. Children screamed and
scattered in all directions. The plastic tables and chairs meant for our
ceremony sailed through the air and slammed into people’s backs, knocking
them over. As the wheels bounced and settled, someone from Mountain’s
entourage shook his head and yelled, “Jesus Christ, what have we done?”
The people had returned when I stepped out of the chopper. Some now stood
pressed together behind a high wall of razor wire, while others perched in
trees, watching and waiting. The eyes stopped us dead, even after the
blades stopped spinning. We stood frozen in the awkward silence. But
Mountain broke the ice for all of us. “My God,” he gasped, walking forward,
“look at all these kids who aren’t in school.” A Pakistani colonel ferried
off Mountain and his staff, so I headed down into the camp to get my story.
Amid the haze of cooking fires and strange morning shadows, I saw Johnny
Ngure, my old translator from Bunia, who’d lived through the war and was
now a U.N. interpreter. I ran over and tackled him with a giant bear hug.
He had saved my skin several times during those bad weeks in Bunia, and I
hadn’t seen him since. I immediately enlisted him to translate Swahili for
me, and we made our way through the camp, speaking to people who’d escaped
the village raids with little but their lives. One man who still stands out
in my mind was named All Mohammed. He’d walked outside his hut in Loga just
in time to watch Lendu teenagers butcher his mother and two children with
machetes. He’d escaped by throwing himself down a mountain and tumbling to
the bottom. He was still dressed in the long, torn nightgown he’d been
wearing during the first shots of the raid, now his only material
possession. I didn’t have time for many interviews. The chopper stayed no
longer than thirty minutes in each camp, long enough for Mountain and his
staff to speak with aid workers and military personnel, get off some
snapshots, and declare that, yes, this was indeed the world’s worst
humanitarian crisis. We then climbed back into the bird, fired up the
blades, and sailed off again like a white ghost over the hills.
A week later, U.N. peacekeepers pulled out of the camps at Tche, Gina,
Tchomia, and Kafe, leaving more than 100,000 people in the hands of poorly
paid, ill-equipped Congolese soldiers, who promptly began looting the tents
as soon as the blue helmets were out of sight. A cholera epidemic had
already descended on two camps, so when hundreds of people fled the
marauding troops, many also carried their deaths with them into the tall grass.
The March operation in Loga—when peacekeepers killed around sixty
fighters—had also resulted in a number of civilian deaths, according to
villagers. Peacekeepers had taken small-arms fire as they’d approached a
crowded market and responded by pounding the market with mortars, while
gunships hovered overhead and emptied their cannons. The militia had used
the market vendors as human shields, the U.N. said, and women and children
were also seen firing guns. As with most peacekeeping operations, there was
no way to confirm the U.N.’s information. In fact, most of our days were
spent trying to decipher the official sludge that slid from under the door
of the U.N. headquarters and still remain credible. To sell the world
body’s new method of peace enforcing to the world press, the U.N. relied on
Kemal Saiki, a short, chain-smoking Algerian with a hard-on for war. Saiki
was a tough talker who routinely issued threats and ultimatums to the
militias from his air-conditioned office 900 miles away, a real Sgt.
Slaughter for the struggling blue helmets. A former spokesman for OPEC,
Saiki was better than past public information officers the U.N. had
employed. But still, when it came down to numbers and hard facts, you often
filed at your own risk.
One Friday night I’d called Saiki to follow up on a raid that had begun
that morning south of Bunia. The blue helmets were tearing down another
Lendu camp, and we knew they’d made contact.
“How many dead?” I asked.
“Eighteen casualties,” he said.
“No, I mean dead. How many militia killed?”
“Yeah, eighteen,” he said. “Eighteen fatalities.”
I ran with the story. Hours later, Dave called and said he got thirty-eight
dead, and Radio France International was reporting ten, all from different
sources within the U.N. At the weekly press conference days later, Dave and
I cornered Saiki to get an explanation.
“Look, we’re all getting different numbers,” I said. “Which is it:
eighteen, thirty-eight, or ten?”
“It’s eighteen,” he said. He then leaned in and whispered, “Look, what
really happened was the helicopter fired eighteen shots, and it got
mistaken for eighteen shot. Get me? We don’t really know.”
“But you told me eighteen,” I said.
“Yeah, or it was eighteen militia standing on the roof of a house when the
helicopter released its rockets. The roof collapsed, the people
disappeared. Boom. Eighteen.”
He pulled out a cigarette and made his way to the door.
“Why are you so obsessed with death counts?” he said. “This isn’t Vietnam.”
News of the dead came in several ways, and sometimes when you wanted it
least—two beers into the night after filing all day, or just when you
reached a restaurant and put in your order. If Dave was there, and it was
something small like a plane crash (Soviet-era Antonovs fell out of the sky
in Congo nearly weekly), we’d exchange a haggard look and start making
deals. “If you wait, I’ll wait,” we’d say, just to finish our food like
normal people. We never waited long; the desk and telephone controlled us
like tin men. But while we sat there with a mouthful of food, the dead now
among us to sort out, one of us would shoot a glance and repeat our sacred
news-grunt mantra: “If we don’t file, it doesn’t exist.”
Many reports of attacks, rapes, and massacres came through confidential
sources within the U.N., and to them from humanitarian officers, local
government officials, or residents—often those who’d escaped attacks and
then walked several days with children and festering wounds to a military
post. I had a contact within the U.N. who shuttled information to me
through instant messaging, usually blood-soaked with raunch when it flashed
my screen: Hear about the attack near Tchomia? Eighteen Hema lost their
livers. Most often the jokes came out of boredom or those dark recesses
where coping mechanisms had terribly malfunctioned after years of being in
the bad bush: Have you thought much about the huri cook-book? I have an
addition: stewed hearts of Hema in mother’s milk. Or perhaps kidney
brochettes with peacekeeper pie?
We all lived our jobs, and the jokes were a good way to keep cocktail
parties from becoming mired in gossip or humanitarian jargon. If some U.N.
brass was nearby, not part of our clique, we’d take off our shoes and start
measuring the size of our toes, or launch into make-believe Rambo odysseys
of Ross Mountain (whom some had nicknamed “Mohammed”) that usually began
with the deputy U.N. chief losing his mind on voodoo cocaine and
disappearing into the jungle like Kurtz, naked and smeared in mud,
whispering to his knife, “To kill a Rasta, one must become a Rasta.” With
my contact in the U.N., things were never serious, even on those rare
occasions when I desperately wanted them to be. During one of those
unrelenting weeks of sitting in Kinshasa while filing daily blood from the
east, hardly ever leaving the house, I’d said something that probably came
off as naive, about never having time to write positive, hopeful stories.
The reply was quick and barbed: “There aren’t any happy stories here, pal,”
the message read. “This place is
a Viking holiday, all blood, rape, and gore.”
Gradually the cocktail and dinner parties, and later our lives in general,
became weighted down by one encompassing subject: June 30, 2005, the day
many predicted Kinshasa would crumble in a wave of blood and terror. The
date marked the end of the country’s transitional government, which had
been agreed upon in 2003, at the end of the war, by government and rebels.
The agreement also made clear that June 30 must also be the date of the
presidential election—the first in Congo since the country gained
independence from Belgium in 1960.
Anyone expecting real elections in June was living a fantasy. The
government was in constant disorder, gutted by corruption and allegiances
that fell alongside Congo’s four vice presidents, two of whom were former
rebel leaders who’d been integrated into the postwar, power-sharing
government. President Joseph Kabila had come to power after his father
(who’d overthrown the pink-champagne-sipping dictator Mobutu Sese Seko) was
assassinated by his own bodyguard in 2001, and he immediately made strides
in ending the war, gaining respect from Western leaders. But the president
remained surrounded by men with agendas, lawmakers with too much money and
power to lose in a transparent, corruption-free state. As one American
diplomat once told me, “Kabila is alone in a lake of piranhas. He knows the
second he puts the first toe in, his whole body will follow.”
Decades of corruption and dirty politics, militia attacks in the east, no
infrastructure, and two years of foot-dragging by the administration had
sucked dry any hope of democracy. So as expected, in late April of 2005,
the government extended the transitional government and delayed elections
until the spring of 2006.
The first hint of an election postponement back in January had sparked
massive rioting in the capital that ended when police opened fire into the
crowds. I’d only been in town a couple of weeks and didn’t venture out into
the mobs alone, knowing how easy it would have been for one kid to smash a
rock in my face and for me to be lost forever underfoot. But after the
official April declaration, rumors quickly spread that June 30 would be
much worse, that crazy mobs would run through the streets, and soldiers
would be leading the parade of rape and pillage. It was billed as “Congo’s
apocalypse,” a Y2K in the heart of darkness that would terminate in a rain
of bullets and machete blades, and I knew I’d be right at the core with no
place to hide.
The June 30 fear slowly crept its way into the expat community. Aside from
U.N. and humanitarian staff, Kinshasa had many Belgians who’d stuck around
after independence, having invested everything in a falling star. There
were Lebanese, who owned much of the city’s commercial center, and Indians,
who were booted out by Mobutu in the 1960s and returned after his fall.
The basis of the expats’ fear was rooted in les pillages of the ’90s, three
instances when soldiers and residents had grown so tired of Mobutu’s
neglect and lies that they looted for days, literally stealing the roads
from underneath the city’s feet. The infrastructure that hadn’t withered
away from decay was stripped and sold. Government offices still bore the
scars where appliances had been ripped from their foundations and light
fixtures had been reduced to dangling wires and crumbling plasterboard.
Kinshasa’s main post office hasn’t received mail in years, but dozens of
employees still turn up for work every day, hoping to be paid. Most of the
city remains without regular water or electricity, and jobs are a distant
memory, reserved mostly for those with family connections or a hand in the
government pie. Most streets run with sewage that breeds the malaria that
kills countless children in the city.
We’d sit around and listen to the old hands tell about the old days, about
watching the city disappear piece by piece in the gunfire and looting while
they bravely fought to maintain their small stake. “There were two days
between the time Mobutu fled in 1997 and Kabila’s rebels advanced onto
Kinshasa,” my friend Moi would tell us. He was a Congolese businessman
married to a beautiful Polish woman, and they’d lived in a large house on
the outskirts of town. The city had gone mad after Mobutu’s retreat, with
ravenous mobs of residents and soldiers looting every quarter. For two
days, Moi sat on his roof with a pump shotgun and a case of shells,
scattering the crowds that gathered at his gate. Government soldiers would
cruise by and listen for the gun blast; the heavier the weapon, the better
the chance that they’d keep going. Other security forces raced down the
block, gunning down looters and lining up bodies on the roadside. While Moi
blasted away on the roof, his wife, Nesh, kept the NBA playoffs on the
television below, poking her head out the window every half hour to
announce the score. “I was up there trying to save our house,” he’d say,
“and there was Nesh yelling, ‘HEAT 67, KNICKS 55.’ BOOM! BOOM!”
For the complete article, please see the April 2006 issue of Harpers.
Posted at 3:00 AM · Comments (0)
Bangkok 8
May 5, 2006 1:15 AM
A great airport novel. Capable police story, moved to Thailand, told through the eyes of a half-blood Thai cop — all put together with the kind of color and spice the subject demands. Sure, this is genre fiction, but little bits of Buddhism, and the insights that are peppered here and there about discrimination make it special.
Posted at 1:15 AM · Comments (0)
Fishing With Howell (Raines): Life lessons from the former Times editor, whose new memoir, The One That Got Away, shows him living by the same manly code, whether in the midst of a great journalism scandal or on a trout stream.
May 5, 2006 12:26 AM
Copyright New York magazine
Howell Raines told me to come meet him in New Orleans and wed go fishing in the bayous with his son. We could hit some good restaurants and tour the damage, and then he would give me the galley of his new memoir, The One That Got Away. Later, when we both returned north, we could have the serious conversations.
One afternoon in late March, I checked into Rainess hotel in the French Quarter, a beautiful restored building called the Soniat House, and at 5:30 I met him downstairs. He hunted the honor bar for Jack Daniels, but there was none, so we had vodka. Raines, 63, is a small, thickset man with a very large presence and a hickory-cured voice. We sat in the courtyard near an orange tree and talked about writing and the South. We didnt talk about the New York Times. Three years ago this June, Raines was forced out as executive editor in the wake of the Jayson Blair scandal. Hed held the top job for less than two years. But Rainess publisher had told me that his new book was not about the Times; it was about fishing and coming to his real calling, being a writer.
After a few minutes, we were joined by Rainess wife, Krystyna, a slender and striking woman many years his junior, wearing a fine Oriental-style dress, and she drove as we went uptown to dinner with Rainess son and friends. It was a big party, but I stuck at Rainess elbow, and he seemed to like that. He is gregarious, but hes not a joker. His charm is focused.
We got going the next morning at five. We fished all day in the bayous without success. Raines seemed disappointed that he had not gotten one, but the landscape was stunning and it was interesting to watch him with his son. He and Jeff, the guitarist for a funk band called Galactic, have an easygoing but formal relationship. There wasnt much cursing in the boat, no goofiness.
They were respectful with one another, as Jeff poled his father around toward good spots. Oh, man, we just spooked a big one … See him boiling? … Dont worry, theres more in here for sure … That was a jack crevalle … Bless your heart, Dad.
Jeff was loyal. He mentioned that he doesnt read the Times anymore (though his father does). And when I asked him to describe his fathers fishing technique, he said, Tenacious. Hes got a beautiful cast. Hes studied the mechanics more than me or my brother and can accomplish more with less effort. He gets a lot of line out with little motion.
Then Jeff got out sandwiches and Raines talked politics. People have called him charismatic and spellbinding. I saw that on the boat as he talked about political character.
Ronald Reagan is the most mysterious politician in our experience. You know, Clark Clifford called him an amiable dunce. And Clark Clifford winds up being indicted for bank fraud, and Ronald Reagan ends the Cold War. But at the deepest levelfamily or political levelReagan was unknowable.
I wonder, was Reagans decision to up the ante in the arms race intuitive or reasoned? You know, one of Reagans secrets, the rubber-chicken dinners people go to because of civic obligation, and we [reporters] go to of necessitywell, Reagan loved them. He was having a great time. And Im told he liked bawdy jokes. There was a press reception when he was running for president, in a social setting, and he was asked what his physical regime was, and he said, with a wink, I do everything a younger man does. It was a guy joke, delivered very cleverly and disarmingly.
Now I better stop talking. Ive had two beers. I think Im going to catch a fish.
The next day was all politics. Driving around the Lower Ninth Ward, viewing the devastation and the fact that only college kids in white hazmat suits were doing anything, Raines got worked up. He used history to throw a light on what we were seeing. He spoke about the racism that went on in the flood of 27. He talked about what FDR and LBJ would do with the problem.
Think what Eisenhower would have done with this! You have to entertain the possibility that Bush cant think his way through problems like this. Heres a family that has had every benefit that American society can offer for four generationswealth, education, social positionand they have no impulse toward repaying anything back to this society that has been so generous to them. Faulkner talks about the human heart in conflict. Well, I see no evidence of conflict in their hearts. Just meanness.
Raines about ran into another car, and Jeff said, Watch it, Dad.
Hearing Rainess riffs left the feeling that here was a great engine up on the blocks. Why wasnt he still running the Times?
Back at Jeffs house, a little thing happened. A guy who had been displaced by the hurricane had moved in across the street, and he was outside, sorting through stuff in his pickup. He wanted to talk, tell us his sad story. I lingered in the street to talk to him for a minute, but Raines was impatient to get inside, and I felt rude either way. Here was a real-life victim, he didnt care. Then Raines saw I was interested in the guy and he came back into the street. Well, you know what they say. We say we want justice when all we really need is mercy, he said. Then everyone smiled politely and we went inside.
At Jeffs house, Raines gave me the book galley with instructions not to share it. As soon as I got on my plane, I cracked it open.
Scribner had said that Raines had said all he had to say about the Times in a critical Atlantic magazine piece in 2004. The One That Got Away was mostly about fishing and writing, and included a majestic narrative of Rainess battle with a marlin in the South Pacific. There was a folksy humor too. At one point, Raines imagines God chiding him: Listen, through a happenstance that even I do not fully understand, you have wound up as Editorial Page Editor of the New York Times. Next time Ill be more careful.
But toward the end, the book felt like a fish costume on a different book. It told a story about the Times that was a lot like the article two years back: how Raines the crusading journalist had tried to shake up a dust-covered institution that was dying, its circulation flat, but the bureaucrats had risen up against him.
Raines was born in 1943, the son of a successful manufacturer of department-store fixtures in Birmingham, Alabama, and as a young man dreamed of becoming a novelist la William Faulkner. But when he went to graduate school in Tuscaloosa, he discovered that the life of the belletrist was too unengaged. He needed action and experience. Having dabbled in newsrooms, he came to understand that he craved the rush of news. So in his mid-twenties, he threw himself into what he calls his second love, journalism.
Things came easily to him. He was charming and smart; he and his first wife, Susan Woodley, a photographer, made an attractive couple. He was a natural writer, and he understood politics. Not just electoral politics but the newsroom variety. And the righteousness of his personal ambition was married to a righteous cause: the civil-rights movement.
From the beginning, he was the sort of Southerner I trusted. Very blunt-spoken and very direct, but also very modern, says Eugene Patterson, the former editor of the St. Petersburg Times. He was not a throwback to the old Dixie. He was a reader and a thinker, especially on race issues. A person with impatience and revolt against the southern attitude that had hold of the South, the old Dixie bubba thing … Howell was one of the strong men down here.
Patterson says that when he got calls from politician friends complaining, he could see Raines watching him steely-eyed at his desk to see if he buckled.
Raines was the best hire Patterson ever made, but after two years, Raines was gone. More than anything, he was ambitious. In 1977, at 34, he simultaneously published two splendid books, a novel called Whiskey Man, about Depression-era Alabama, and an oral history of the civil-rights movement called My Soul Is Rested. He had worked out the last literary problems in the novel on a legal pad in the back of a planeafter one Beefeater martini and before several moreflying east and still high from seeing Jimmy Carter and Ronald Reagan in the 76 California primary. With some shrewdness, he had then played the publishers, not letting either one know the books were coming out simultaneously. The bang-bang publication was a careerist coup. Patterson says that Times executive editor A. M. Rosenthal saw the books and asked, Who is this guy?
Rainess ascent at the Times began in the Atlanta bureau. The Times had a tradition of promoting Southerners, and Raines wasnt above playing that card with humorous colloquialisms. At first, the Times rigid deadlines got to him. I was anxious in a way I didnt like. Then I said, They cant hang me, they cant make my family quit loving me if I dont make it, and he got over it. He was courtly and engaging and high-minded. He had presence. He was an instinctual writer and storyteller. It came from his hillbilly roots: Scotch-Irish men who sang and fiddled and drank all night in the road. Soon they were using Raines leads in the Times stylebook.
Courtesy of Scribner)
Raines found himself more interested in power than in writing. Within seven years, he had left writing to become deputy Washington editor and thereby take part in the great game of the Times: executive competition. A couple of years later, Times executive editor Max Frankel chose Joe Lelyveld as foreign editor, and then Frankel had to fly to Washington to persuade an obviously hurt, passed-over Raines to take Lelyvelds former job as London bureau chief and broaden his skills.
Thats a story from Frankels autobiography, not from Raines. If Raines had everything, one thing he did not have was comfort with his dark emotions. He held hurts in. When he differed with his father and older brother over the sale of family land in Florida, his way was not to quarrel or have it out but not to speak to his brother, and only occasionally to his father, for several years, till he got past the feelings and things went smooth again. Raines was similarly repressed when it came to defeats at work. In 1993, he published a best-selling memoir, Fly Fishing Through the Midlife Crisis, that spoke movingly of the black dog of depression that comes to mens lives in their forties or fifties, after disappointments. The problem for the reader who wants to sympathize was that Raines didnt really tell where it hurts. The end of his long marriage, for instance, took place in a curt sentence or two: Theyd stopped getting along.
The most confessional aspect of Rainess new book is its descriptions of his move up the ladder. Times editors are usually closemouthed about this stuff. But Raines shows himself courting Arthur Sulzberger Jr. in the nineties to get a crack at the executive editorship when it opened up in 2001. Raines again put his hearts first callingwriting bookson hold in order to serve Sulzberger as editorial-page editor and scheme to be pope. It was worth the six-year wait, he says.
If passed over, I would bail out of the Times immediately to try to make up for the lost years of my writing career.
People I knew at the Times had described that courtship satirically. How Raines wore red suspenders and gold-toed socks like Arthur and slipped off his shoes to put his feet up on the desk as he cultivated to a fare-thee-well. How Arthur, the scion famous for being tentative and callow, seemed to glow when Rainess confidence was projected on him.
The One That Got Away is kind to Sulzberger, describing him as highly intelligent despite his insecurities. It is much harder on Lelyveld, Rainess predecessor as executive editor, and his interim replacement in 2003, when he was pushed out. Lelyveld is the very opposite character of Rainesurbane, reserved, a little cool. Raines never names him, while referring to him as an intensely traditional Timesman who would keep the news sections on automatic pilot. According to Raines, the Times was a newspaper without a pulse.
Youd think there would be a little more deference. But Raines has often shown a bumptious attitude toward his elders. He was the best, most gifted, most influential reporter on the staff of the St. Pete Times, says Roy Peter Clark of the Poynter Institute. And he was always living in tension with the institutions that were forming and nurturing him.
Thats a theme of his first novel. Brant Laster, the hero of Whiskey Man, twice faces down his father, B.B., in stunning ways, once calling him an old man in front of other men. Id commented on that in Louisiana while Jeff was cleaning his boat at a car wash.
It seemed like you must have had a lot of anger for your dad, I said to Raines. Did you write that novel about the time you were on the outs with him?
No, the book was before that time, Raines answered. I dont see that as angry, he said. It was about the sociology of two southern generations …
On March 29, I drove out to Rainess place in Pennsylvania. In between talking, I could watch his new dog, a German short-haired pointer called Pokey, get trained.
Raines and his wife live in a light-filled farmhouse on a hill in the Poconos. I got there in time for lunch. Krystyna had made chili and a tomato-and-mozzarella salad. She has a sweet, affectionate way with her husband. The marriage began in 2003 with a power-studded celebrity wedding reception at the Bryant Park Hotel with such a Gatsby-esque air of aspiration and triumph that some had predicted that the marriage wouldnt survive Rainess comedown. To use a Rainesism, that prediction is looking like a pat hand in poker. I saw Krystyna and Raines holding hands, nuzzling.
She showed me around the house. It has wide country wainscoting painted gray and new slate countertops and the inevitable Sub-Zero. There are few fish pictures anywhere on the walls, but there is a discreet framed collection of arrowheads Raines collected as a boy in Alabama. The master bedroom is dominated by a huge scoop-shaped bathtub on its own oak-floored platform, sans walls or tiling, a few feet from the bed.
Id noticed a box from Cabelas, an outdoor-gear store, outside the front door. Raines sawed it open hungrily in the kitchen. Two boxes of chartreuse jig heads for panfish. Rainess brother was visiting for a month, and theyd use them in the Delaware River. One great thing about leaving the Times, he said, was all the time hes had to go fishing.
Raines sat beside the massive stone fireplace and talked for a couple of hours about writing and politics. His books theme is that because of the loss of the Times job, he got his first love back, writing books. Theres no question that he leads a real literary life. He forages in history and The New York Review of Books. He quotes Vonnegut on plot and Hemingway on economy. He knows what Faulkners body looked like, also Zane Greys harem. He studies Lincolns temperament, and his hill-country ancestors, for his next book, a Civil War novel set in Alabama. His keen sense of character makes his political stories come alive.
During Bushs campaign for his first term, I invited him to come meet with the editorial board and the senior news-department editors and the publisher in the Times boardroom. And we kept getting put off, kept getting put off. I have a friend named Stuart Stevens who was working in the Bush campaign, mid-high-level. I said, Stuart, this needs to happen, not just because we want it to, but because its part of the festival of democracy, that the presidential candidate comes to the Times, and even though he is not supported by the paper editorially, he is treated with the respect that a nominee of the party is entitled to.
So StuartI dont know what he did, but weeks go by, then the word comes down that Bush is coming, and he does, and he comes and he goes around the table, there are probably 25 people, and he says something personal to each person in the room. Oh, youre the one … or Ive heard you have a daughter at University of Texas. Almost every person, there was something, or he had read something. He gets to me, and he shakes my hand, and he leans in confidentially, and he said, Thank you for putting this meeting together. As if I had done him a great service, when in fact they had been resisting it with every means possible for months.
What I subsequently found out is that despite this characterization of him as the laid-back guy who gives everybody nicknames, he had spent a long time on the telephone the previous night with his friend who runs Chelsea Piers [Roland Betts], who was with him at Yale and who was his most important backer in New York. They had asked us for a list of people who would be there. For security and other reasons, and he had gone over this list with this guy. That tells you several things. One, I was impressed by his memory. It told me that there was an element of calculation there that was completely different from the casual-Texan persona we were asked to believe in. And I saw him later, after he was elected. Katharine Graham gave a dinner party, and he and I spoke, and he remembered that visit. I said, We enjoyed the discussion … we hope youll come back, and he said, Yeah, you know, boythat was really tough. Meaning, those tough, smart guys at the Times really grilled me, really stressed me. When in fact he had moved through it quite easily … I interpret that as having a pretty good native political sense.
During the Clinton years, a story went around that Raines was tough on Clinton because he was jealous. Two political charmers from the New South, but Clinton was younger and had gotten further.
Raines said I had it wrong.
The line was I was jealous of Clinton not because he was president but because he had been able to build his career and become a success without having to leave home, whereas I had had to leave the South and scramble and scratch to get into a prominent position. And I remember when this was presented to me, I just said, This is amazing. Ive lived in Atlanta, Ive lived in Washington, Ive lived in London, Ive lived in New York, and Im supposed to be jealous of a man who had to spend 25 years in Little Rock?
Then Raines made Grey Goose martinis, dribbling in just a couple of drops of vermouth, and we sat out by the barbecue pit with Krystyna. We went out to dinner, and Raines ordered wine. Talking about poetsAuden, Larkin, Yeatshe was also drinking me under the table.
The next morning, Raines picked me up in his black Toyota Tundra. Krystyna and Pokey were in the crew cab. Krystyna had a quilted red designer jacket on, Pokey an orange rope. We went to a friends pond nearby, where Matt Fetter was waiting by his truck to give Pokey his hunting lesson. The first part of the training was retrieving. Fetter hurled a dummy shaped like a duck 25 feet into the pond. Pokey, who had already been in and out of the water, stood quivering and trembling on the bank.
Go get it, Fetter kept saying. Go get it.
The handsome dog mewled and shook like crazy but moved not a limb. The three of us on the bank echoed Fetters goading in our hearts: Go get it, Pokey!
Finally, Fetter got Pokey to go in by using real duck scent and throwing a stick out by the float. The dog brought the dummy back. Fetter called out, Good boy, good bird, again and again, congratulating the dog.
We started around the pond to do scenting training. Raines moved to the trainers side.
His initial reluctance on the dummy, was that because the water made him cold?
No, because of lack of confidence, Fetter said.
Raines nodded, but Pokeys failure seemed to make him a little sour.
That afternoon, we sat by the massive stone fireplace, and it was time to ask about the Times.
Raines writes in the book that he was trying to save the Times with drastic but necessary changesrevolutionary ideas. Early in his newspapering career, he writes, I began forming the ideas that would one day get me fired. After the Times won seven Pulitzer Prizes for 2001, he had the political capital to take on one after another those creaky, dust-covered sections that were supposed to tell our readers about culture, travel, sports, books, the life of the mind. This was such heroic work, Raines says, that for once he did not regret giving up his first love, his literary career. The Times was a crucial democratic institution. Yet it was a dying lake. He was going to reverse that process. No wonder the lifers resented him.
They got their chance to turn the tables during the Jayson Blair scandal.
The six weeks from the first charge of plagiarism on April 28, 2003, to Rainess firing on June 5 are surely among the most awful in the history of the paper. That first accusation against Blair, a young black reporter, soon led to an investigation of scores of other articles he had made up or stolen. His fraud seemed to pervade the most important newsroom in the country. It became a national scandal, on magazine covers and the nightly news.
In his book, Raines places the blame squarely on Blair. Noting his son Bens question about whether Blair was a dwarfhe is said to be five feet tallRaines wrote, My career had been hit by a plummeting dwarf, falling straight and fast and nothing is likely to survive that. There are also several references to Little Jayson Blair.
You seem angry at him, I said, trying to draw out his emotion.
No. Raines said he pitied Blair. I would never try to disown anger as an emotion. What I was trying to use that language for was to show some distance and some understanding, as well as obviously the initial anger that I and everyone at the Times felt, that this guy had betrayed the most fundamental compact of our profession.
You dont mention Lelyveld by name. Why not?
No need to.
In the Kremlinology of the book, unnamed, but identified in other ways, are two reporters he calls among the smartest at the paper: Adam Liptak and David Barstow. They were two of Rainess favorites, put in the terrible position of helping to prepare the Times long investigative piece about the Blair scandal that ran May 11. Raines judged the story to be fatal to his career, as it offered a theory of the Blair case that Raines and his top aides should have paid more attention six months before, when prosecutors in the Washington-area sniper case angrily questioned a Blair scoop in the story.
Are you angry at Liptak?
No. Whether or not Im referring to Adam, or whoever Im referring to, is not germane to a memoir, which is my experience in a situation. One thing I wanted to do in this book was not for it to be about hugging my friends and sticking my finger in the eyes of people I didnt like. And in fact, I have a pretty high regard for just about everybody involved at the Times in that period.
Liptak and Barstow represent the best of the Raines system. Liptak might be moldering at his desk as a lawyer for the Times to this day were it not for Raines. And as for Barstow, he won a Pulitzer Prize the year after Raines left for an investigative series on workplace horrors that Raines had encouraged him to do.
Raines was obviously upset, but he wasnt letting anyone in. Here were two guys hed lifted up, and theyre both doing great. And he has fallen from the highest perch in journalism. Whose heart wouldnt go out to him?
I will be forever grateful to that man for doing the things he did for me, giving me the green light, giving me the space, giving me the time. And more than that, being completely behind a story that would absolutely hurt him in his hometown, Birmingham, Barstow says. I cant think of a story that I took less pleasure in [than the investigation of Blair in May]. I hated every minute. The only good things that came out of that were the unbelievable bonds I formed with the guys I worked with. But if Howell thinks that our theory of the case is what did him in, he is a man who has not come to grips with himself.
Raines sensed my interest in his feelings. I once told Gail Sheehythis was not an original insight on my part, I read it somewherethat football is the perfect metaphor for American corporate life. You have to inflict pain and sustain pain for the good of the organization … So to suddenlyfor a halfback to suddenly jump up and say, Hey, I got tackled and it hurt! its just not on. Maybe thats a silly example.
Of course, these days, after a big game, coaches and players come out to a big room to face the press. The ones who let it hang out are the ones who get fawned over. But Raines was living by an old code. I found this out when I pressed him about the several oblique references in his book to his time as a romantic freelancer in Manhattan.
I wanted to experience that liberated aspect of life in New York in the same way that if one suddenly found oneself transferred to Paris, one would want to experience the romance of Paris.
So, did you make it with a lot of girls? I asked, being blunt.
Raines scowled. Im not going to … Theres no way a gentleman can answer that question.
I said, I guess you just demonstrated the difference between a gentleman and someone whos not.
One of the definitions of a gentleman is that a gentleman has an acute sense of propriety. Full stop.
As the Times part of our conversation went on, I began to identify with Times staffers who had said that they were afraid to cross him. Raines and I had gotten along well for days; he was hugely entertaining. Now his broad, dark face was full of storm. He said Id picked up a caricature of him that was out there. It was something that happens when you get a big clip file, and he wasnt going to try to correct it. I still know who I am, I know who the real me is, I know my strengths and my weaknesses …
At the height of the Blair scandal, on May 14, the Times held a town-hall meeting for over 1,000 staff members in the Loews cinema in Times Square, and hardheaded newsmen rose in the seats to accuse Raines of undermining basic journalistic values. You saw Times lifers who in a million years were not the type to get upset, erupt in anger or tears, one writer recalls. Sam Roberts, Susan Chirathese are nice, solid, intelligent Times loyalists, not revolutionaries.
They said that Raines had driven them hard only on stories that would get the most attention or that reflected his concerns. The normal checks and balances of an institution had given way to an intense, headlong, individualistic culture. One editor rose to say that Raines had lost the newsrooms confidence. When reporter Alex Berenson asked, Have you considered resigning? there were stunned murmurs throughout the hall.
Raines came away from the meeting staggered. He was in shell shock, says Glenn Kramon, an assistant managing editor. He couldnt believe people felt so strongly. Over the next three weeks, Raines had meetings with staff, trying to win them back. He was desperate to survive, Kramon remembers. He said, I can change, and What do I need to do to regain your confidence? But people didnt help him. It was too late. And he never really said, I was wrong.
None of that humiliation and struggle is in Rainess book. He describes the theater rebellion as the work of mediocre talents. The people in those seats, he writes, were by and large young and unconfident reporters, too swiftly promoted, terrified of failing at the Times star system. Or, as he said to me, they came out of a professional culture where whining is considered viable behavior.
Theres a lot of scar tissue, but Raines is unhealed. Of Sulzbergers decision to fire him, he said, None of us will ever know whether it was the right decision. When Ben Bradlee and Bob Woodward got caught with the Janet Cooke story [a fabrication at the Washington Post in 1980], I heard Mrs. Graham said to others at the time, Were not going to let this crazy person break up what were building here. She could have easily made a different decision.
Its difficult to find anyone at the Times who thinks Sulzberger could have made a different decision.
Jonathan Landman, now a deputy managing editor, says the problem was grandiosity: When he became executive editor, what developed very quickly, and this was the real tragedy, because this was a guy of such talent, intelligence, all kinds of abilityan interesting guybut the pursuit of the prize and the personal meaning of it to him seemed to have taken over. The substance was gone.
The newsroom disliked Howell before Jayson Blair … He was a jerk, and he ran the institution for himself, Berenson says.
Advocates for Raines point out that he brought excitement to the paper, and that the Times needed it. He was hard-driving. That is what was wanted in an executive editor and thats why he was chosen, says Bill Safire. He did what he later described as raise the metabolism.
Kramon says he often sees evidence of Rainess style in the paper to this day. I have to give Howell credit. He made some gutsy changes, and were still benefiting from some of them.
But his critics say that in many ways, the paper is still recovering from the Raines turmoil. That he set the papers process of change back two years. That worse than giving Jayson Blair freedom was his giving Judith Miller freedom, and Judith Miller put bad stories about weapons of mass destruction in Iraq on the front page that euchred a nation.
Landman, whose own career was burnished by the Blair debacle, still hasnt let go of his anger at Raines. I pushed him to acknowledge Rainess achievements.
He did a terrific job in the way that people used photographs. It was an important change. His most lasting.
Pokey came rambling in, followed by Krystyna. Rainess face lit up.
Hello, sweetie. How was your walk?
It was great. I was reinforcing the swimming lesson.
Oh, did he go in?
Oh, yes. Pecan pie?
We asked her to wait a few minutes while we finished up talking about journalism. Raines believes in the greatness of journalism as a progressive force, in which reporters suppress their biases and bring out facts that help common people. But he says that the right (notably Rupert Murdoch) subverted the model. He doubts whether journalism can meet the challenges of a society dominated by big business if it lacks professional tools.
Cant journalism still be a progressive force with more active biases in its production? I asked.
Raines sighed. I leave that for the next generation to figure out. Im on another journey now.
It was a graceful note. We went into the kitchen, where his wife was reading the TimesWho died today? he asked. Then we went outside to the new barbecue area with mugs of tea and pieces of pecan pie. It was a gorgeous spring day. Raines played with Pokey and told me another great political story, about LBJs failed effort to dam the nearby Delaware. He pointed out the slumped apple tree and told me how hed hauled it straight with his truck after a storm. It was a hopeful story. There are times that Raines doesnt sound like Lear, bewildered by his dispossession. Yes, hes still caught up in the tragedy, and there are still bodies lying around the stage, but hes only 63. Hell get a couple more acts. He really is a writer, with a writers transformative vision, the mind-lock of self and material that was so inappropriate to editorship and so essential to, say, a great Civil War novel.
Then Raines said he hadnt shown me the pictures for his new book. As we walked back to the house, I reminded him of a joke he had made on his sons boat in Louisiana when I had taken his picture. Thats one thing I hardly have any of, hed said, fish picturesand its always the same photograph! He had held out his hands pretending to hold a fish. Its a good thing to hear a man laugh at himself.
http://www.newyorkmetro.com/news/media/16862/index.html
Posted at 12:26 AM · Comments (0)
Letter from China: U.S.-China relationship isn’t the most vital one
May 4, 2006 11:38 AM
Copyright The International Herald Tribune
Howard W. French
WEDNESDAY, MAY 3, 2006
SHANGHAI What’s the most important international relationship? An easy case could be made for China’s ties with the United States, but that would be the wrong guess, at least now. The recent visit to Washington by President Hu Jintao of China lent proof to an increasingly glaring fact: This immensely important relationship is vastly underperforming its potential.
With critical issues begging for heavy lifting everywhere you look, from energy and the environment to nuclear proliferation, human rights or East Asian security, Washington and Beijing settled for a sterile photo-op.
Given the state of the world’s problems, this is truly unfortunate, but there seems little hope for near-term change. Under President George W. Bush, Washington has squandered so much of its power, influence and treasure that there is little energy or inclination left for true engagement with the emerging Chinese colossus. What happens under a future administration is anyone’s guess.
China’s leadership is equally uninspired, albeit for different reasons. Giving new meaning to the label conservative, Hu and his team are shaping up as the ultimate risk evaders.
Seemingly fed by a belief that the winds are blowing its way, that the world will come to it, and that it is only a matter of time before China attains a commanding position on the global stage, Beijing sees little point in soiling its hands trying to manage the world’s problems. What better, then, than to let the United States exhaust itself, and moreover to exhaust the good will of others, as it pushily goes about trying to defuse ticking time bombs here and there that few others can be bothered with?
Beijing prefers to burnish its image as the unthreatening, noninterfering, all-respecting, new and improved superpower: a see-no-evil nation whose bland and benign visage is meant to lull the world until such time as China has finished rebuilding and is ready to engage the world on its own terms.
So why, the reader may be forgiven for wondering, is the right answer China’s relationship with Africa? It’s because China has the largest population and the most resource-hungry economy, and because Africa has the richest portfolio of raw materials and the largest collection of poor and badly governed countries.
The combination of foreign need for raw materials and the continent’s weak societies has left a legacy of devastation in Africa that dates at least as far back as the rubber trade run by the Belgian Congo, under which millions of Africans were killed under a system of terror-driven forced labor.
The abysmal record of the West in Africa, from colonial times through the Cold War, poorly acknowledged even today, makes it hard for it to find a perch to issue a credible moral warning to China.
And yet as Beijing rushes to rebuild relations with Africa, which have stagnated since the Mao era, the world cannot afford to allow hard truths to go unsaid, especially given the kind of diplomatic language that China favors.
“China needs to grow, and in order to grow it needs energy sources, minerals and raw materials, particularly from Africa,” said Patricia Feeney, executive director of the private British group Rights and Accountability in Development.
China is becoming the dominant player in a number of countries that have been particularly marginalized in recent years by the West. You can see its influence and presence spreading in ways that are different from what existed in the ’70s, when it supported the anti-colonial struggle. It still has some credit for that among African countries. But if it doesn’t adapt to the aspirations of the African peoples themselves, which are not necessarily the same as those of African governments, it is going to run into trouble, as it already is in Sudan.
“In our dealings with African countries we respect the political model chosen by the African people,” Hu declared during his recent stop in Kenya, a young and fragile democracy riddled with corruption and governance problems.
Hu was there to sign offshore oil exploration agreements for Chinese companies, and the best he could muster was a bland statement like this: “We use the policy of noninterference in the affairs of other countries.”
Superficially, such a stance may seem to suit China’s narrow self-interests just fine. But on a continent where the pillaging of resources by governing elites is taking place on a monumental scale, while the most basic needs of citizens go unmet, see- no-evil amounts to evil.
Nor is it good enough to say, as some in the Chinese news media already are, that the pillaging isn’t being done - certainly not in any direct sense - by the Chinese, as it was done by European colonizers in the past.
Pillaging takes many imaginative forms, nowhere more so than in Africa, where the foreign hand in the African glove has been a time- honored mode at least since the time of Mobutu Sese Seko in Zaire. This pattern was on full display recently during a competition between Indian and Chinese companies over Nigerian oil. The Indian company pulled out, citing concerns that its African counterpart was a dubious shell company manipulated by corrupt politicians. Showing no such qualms, the Chinese company went ahead.
Today, Hu’s language doesn’t cut it, and in Africa, the world cannot afford to watch China repeat the mistakes of the past. If current patterns hold, Africa’s forests will be depleted and its oil resources tapped out, leaving behind a environmental and human disaster of unprecedented proportions.
The continent’s population is growing at a staggering rate, and before long could equal China’s own. The difference is that Africans, ill-served by their elites and by the outside world, will be predominantly illiterate and plagued with diseases, setting the stage for mass migration and general chaos.
China has much to teach Africa, having lifted more people out of poverty in a shorter period of time than had ever been accomplished anywhere. The rub is that the old Chinese diplomatic bugbear of internal affairs has everything to do with Africa’s problems, and pretending otherwise, while narrowing serving only self-interests, will only make things worse.
Posted at 11:38 AM · Comments (0)
Why China Won’t Slow Down
May 4, 2006 1:12 AM
Copyright The Wall Street Journal
May/June 2006
For China today, the questions on everybody’s lips are: Can the People’s Republic survive so much change? Can China’s performance sustain its pace? What steps are needed next? Minxin Pei addresses the first two of these three questions, and his answers are not flattering. Actual conditions on the ground in China, however, suggest there is little reason to be so pessimistic.
China’s gross domestic product (GDP) growth has now outperformed other Asian “miracle” economies. Last year’s economic census, conducted after several decades of improvement to China’s statistical system, presents a clearer picture of the country’s economic performance than was available a decade ago, when Western scholars “improved” official statistics by shaving them. China grew, on average, 10 percent a year during the past 15 years. World Bank and Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development data show that the best 15-year average performances for South Korea, Singapore, and Taiwan never reached 10 percent. Furthermore, China’s growth potential is huge. Its per capita GDP is just 5 percent of the U.S. level. South Korea had roughly the same growth gap with the United States in the 1960s, and continued rapid growth is even more likely in China today than it was in Korea then, thanks to new technologies.
Can China continue this incredible pace? Five factors suggest it can. First, China is good at investing in things that feed its growth. It gets roughly the same growth bang for its investment buck as India. But China’s financial system mobilizes more money than India’s, and it allocates a much larger share to private-sector-friendly infrastructure such as roads, ports, and sewage systems. Second, China has created incentives that reward hard work, knowledge, and risk-taking. Fifty million layoffs eased urban workers out of their cradle-to-grave jobs. Rural workers can now move to towns and compete for urban jobs. Compulsory education was extended to nine years, and China’s high literacy rate underpins its increasing worker productivity. Third, China’s daring openness to global commerce has enhanced its economic flexibility and financed new technologies, while judiciously managing key areas such as foreign investment. Japan and Korea never risked opening this fast. Fourth, foundations for a lasting middle class have emerged, thanks to land reforms, improvements in education, and new social safety nets. Lastly, China is a relatively low-crime society, where unthreatened physical safety enhances economic opportunities. Corruption exists, but at levels lower than those in India, Indonesia, and the Philippines?nd it is vigorously prosecuted.
This performance suggests that Chinese officials are leading an agile, energetic government. It is implementing a wide range of reforms and adjusting well to unexpected developments. Social unrest is a good example. Discontent is guaranteed in any country converting privilege to productivity as quickly as China. The issue is how to manage that unrest. China’s approach is to compensate displaced people, discipline losers who cause trouble, and punish local governments’ malfeasance. That process is hardly perfect. But freedom of speech and assembly?uch of it critical of the Communist regime?re widespread and largely peaceful in China.
The regime does crack down harshly on political movements that threaten government authority, social stability, or continued reform. These are policies of a confident leadership implementing a sophisticated and balanced policy. Hardly frail, China’s government has peacefully refreshed its ranks with younger, better- educated leaders who increasingly make decisions based on practical compromise.
Could a crisis sink China’s ship of state? It hasn’t so far. Both the Asian financial crisis and the sars epidemic had the potential to do so. In both cases, the government learned from its mistakes and recovered quickly. Yes, China must continue expanding the choices available to ordinary citizens about where they work and live, and it must increase the number of ways people can seek redress for their grievances. But China is already a hive of reform proposals, test projects, and nationwide rollouts. The expansion of local nongovernmental organizations, for instance, is being encouraged to help care for the needy. The government is also pursuing higher educational standards, new approaches to rural poverty, and the modernization of its tax system. Consumer credit for homes and cars is just one example of the new opportunities available to its citizens.
Pei says China is a “neo-Leninist state” and condemns it to frailty. The facts on the ground, however, suggest a political system that is far more nimble and robust.
Albert Keidel is senior associate at the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace. From 2001 to 2004, he was deputy director of the Office of East Asian Nations at the U.S. Treasury Department.
Posted at 1:12 AM · Comments (0)
Democracy’s ‘Dangers’
May 2, 2006 5:16 PM
Copyright The Wall Street Journal
May 2, 2006, WSJ
Did you know that most U.S. presidents over the 200 years “were only of
mediocre calibre”? Or that democracy was responsible for electing not
only Hitler and Mussolini but also someone else equally “evil” —
Taiwan’s pro-independence President Chen Shui-bian?
That’s right, China’s been lecturing the rest of the world on the evils
of democracy once again. At a seminar in Beijing Thursday, “legal
scholars” explained why Chinese people — or just about anyone else,
for
that matter — can’t be trusted to choose their leaders. “Blind worship
of universal suffrage” is to be abhorred, declared Professor Xu Chongde
of People’s University, after he’d finished slandering Washington and
Lincoln.
His immediate target was Hong Kong, where a local paper had suggested a
day earlier that the territory’s Beijing-appointed Chief Executive
Donald Tsang might propose an eventual shift to universal suffrage for
the election of future Hong Kong leaders. The irony is that the
newspaper was almost certainly off the mark. Aides to Mr. Tsang
expressed “bewilderment” at the report.
Prof. Xu and his colleagues, who are renowned for parroting the Chinese
government’s line, laid down a long list of conditions that need to be
fulfilled before universal suffrage can even be contemplated in China’s
most prosperous city — let alone the rest of the country. Mixed in
among the usual excuses (no community consensus, no draconian
national-security laws, etc.) was one that goes to the heart of
Beijing’s fear of democracy. Hong Kong people, Prof. Xu declared, won’t
be allowed to choose their leaders until they can be trusted to choose
Chinese “patriots.” In other words, until Beijing is sure they will
choose the “right” people.
China, as one of its advisers in Hong Kong once memorably declared,
doesn’t want to rig elections — but it does like to know the results
in
advance. And until Prof. Xu and his colleagues can work out how to
solve
that conundrum, it seems democracy is simply too dangerous to
contemplate.
Posted at 5:16 PM · Comments (0)
The truthiness hurts: Stephen Colbert’s brilliant performance unplugged the Bush myth machine — and left the clueless D.C. press corps gaping.
May 2, 2006 5:10 PM
Copyright Salon
May 1, 2006 | Make no mistake, Stephen Colbert is a dangerous man — a bomb thrower, an assassin, a terrorist with boring hair and rimless glasses. It’s a wonder the Secret Service let him so close to the president of the United States.
But there he was Saturday night, keynoting the year’s most fawning celebration of the self-importance of the D.C. press corps, the White House Correspondents’ Association dinner. Before he took the podium, the master of ceremonies ominously announced, “Tonight, no one is safe.”
Colbert is not just another comedian with barbed punch lines and a racy vocabulary. He is a guerrilla fighter, a master of the old-world art of irony. For Colbert, the punch line is just the addendum. The joke is in the setup. The meat of his act is not in his barbs but his character — the dry idiot, “Stephen Colbert,” God-fearing pitchman, patriotic American, red-blooded pundit and champion of “truthiness.” “I’m a simple man with a simple mind,” the deadpan Colbert announced at the dinner. “I hold a simple set of beliefs that I live by. Number one, I believe in America. I believe it exists. My gut tells me I live there.”
Then he turned to the president of the United States, who sat tight-lipped just a few feet away. “I stand by this man. I stand by this man because he stands for things. Not only for things, he stands on things. Things like aircraft carriers and rubble and recently flooded city squares. And that sends a strong message, that no matter what happens to America, she will always rebound — with the most powerfully staged photo ops in the world.”
It was Colbert’s crowning moment. His imitation of the quintessential GOP talking head — Bill O’Reilly meets Scott McClellan — uncovered the inner workings of the ever-cheapening discourse that passes for political debate. He reversed and flattened the meaning of the words he spoke. It’s a tactic that cultural critic Greil Marcus once called the “critical negation that would make it self-evident to everyone that the world is not as it seems.” Colbert’s jokes attacked not just Bush’s policies, but the whole drama and language of American politics, the phony demonstration of strength, unity and vision. “The greatest thing about this man is he’s steady,” Colbert continued, in a nod to George W. Bush. “You know where he stands. He believes the same thing Wednesday that he believed on Monday, no matter what happened Tuesday.”
It’s not just that Colbert’s jokes were hitting their mark. We already know that there were no weapons of mass destruction in Iraq, that the generals hate Rumsfeld or that Fox News lists to the right. Those cracks are old and boring. What Colbert did was expose the whole official, patriotic, right-wing, press-bashing discourse as a sham, as more “truthiness” than truth.
Obviously, Colbert is not the first ironic warrior to train his sights on the powerful. What the insurgent culture jammers at Adbusters did for Madison Avenue, and the Barbie Liberation Organization did for children’s toys, and Seinfeld did for the sitcom, and the Onion did for the small-town newspaper, Jon Stewart discovered he could do for television news. Now Colbert, Stewart’s spawn, has taken on the right-wing message machine.
In the late 1960s, the Situationists in France called such ironic mockery “dtournement,” a word that roughly translates to “abduction” or “embezzlement.” It was considered a revolutionary act, helping to channel the frustration of the Paris student riots of 1968. They co-opted and altered famous paintings, newspapers, books and documentary films, seeking subversive ideas in the found objects of popular culture. “Plagiarism is necessary,” wrote Guy Debord, the famed Situationist, referring to his strategy of mockery and semiotic inversion. “Progress demands it. Staying close to an author’s phrasing, plagiarism exploits his expressions, erases false ideas, replaces them with correct ideas.”
But nearly half a century later, the ideas of the French, as evidenced by our “freedom fries,” have not found a welcome reception in Washington. The city is still not ready for Colbert. The depth of his attack caused bewilderment on the face of the president and some of the press, who, like myopic fish, are used to ignoring the water that sustains them. Laura Bush did not shake his hand.
Political Washington is accustomed to more direct attacks that follow the rules. We tend to like the bland buffoonery of Jay Leno or insider jokes that drop lots of names and enforce everyone’s clubby self-satisfaction. (Did you hear the one about John Boehner at the tanning salon or Duke Cunningham playing poker at the Watergate?) Similarly, White House spinmeisters are used to frontal assaults on their policies, which can be rebutted with a similar set of talking points. But there is no easy answer for the ironist. “Irony, entertaining as it is, serves an almost exclusively negative function,” wrote David Foster Wallace, in his seminal 1993 essay “E Unibus Pluram.” “It’s critical and destructive, a ground clearing.”
So it’s no wonder that those journalists at the dinner seemed so uneasy in their seats. They had put on their tuxes to rub shoulders with the president. They were looking forward to spotting Valerie Plame and “American Idol’s” Ace Young at the Bloomberg party. They invited Colbert to speak for levity, not because they wanted to be criticized. As a tribe, we journalists are all, at heart, creatures of this silly conversation. We trade in talking points and consultant-speak. We too often depend on empty language for our daily bread, and — worse — we sometimes mistake it for reality. Colbert was attacking us as well.
A day after he exploded his bomb at the correspondents dinner, Colbert appeared on CBS’s “60 Minutes,” this time as himself, an actor, a suburban dad, a man without a red and blue tie. The real Colbert admitted that he does not let his children watch his Comedy Central show. “Kids can’t understand irony or sarcasm, and I don’t want them to perceive me as insincere,” Colbert explained. “Because one night, I’ll be putting them to bed and I’ll say … ‘I love you, honey.’ And they’ll say, ‘I get it. Very dry, Dad. That’s good stuff.’”
His point was spot-on. Irony is dangerous and must be handled with care. But America can rest assured that for the moment its powers are in good hands. Stephen Colbert, the current grandmaster of the art, knows exactly what he was doing.
Just don’t expect him to be invited back to the correspondents dinner.
http://www.salon.com/opinion/feature/2006/05/01/colbert/
Posted at 5:10 PM · Comments (0)


